2 : BE

. . . . - ONE. . . . . : . +INDICATION (THIS IS ... WHAT'S THIS?)

Illustrative Situations /. : 1. This is a map. This is a fine map. 2. That is a book. That is a good book. 3. That is an office. No, it isn't an office. It's a hospital. 4. These are armchairs. They are comfortable armchairs. 5. Those are flowers. They are nice flowers. //. . : 1. Is this a pen? Yes, it is. 2. Is that a book? No, it isn't. It's a notebook. 3. Are these chairs? No, they aren't. They are armchairs. 4. Are those desks? Yes, they are. ///. : 1 What's this? This is a book. 2. What's that That is a watch. 3. What are these? -^ These are toys. 4. What are those? Those are maps. IV. , : 1. Is this a typewriter or a tape-recorder? It's a typewriter. 2. Is that a cup or a saucer? It's a cup. 3. Are these apples or pears? They are pears. 4. Are those lemons or oranges? They are oranges. V. : 1. This is a radio-set, isn't it? Yes, it is. 2. That isn't a desk, is it? No, it isn't. It's a bed. 3. That isn't an armchair, is it? Yes, it is. It's a comfortable armchair. 4. These are glasses, aren't they? Yes, they are. 5. Those are knives, aren't they? No, they aren't. They are forks. 6. Those aren't books, are they? Yes, they are. They are English books. Practice /. , : e.g. This is a room, (large) This (it) is a large room. 1. This is a car. (comfortable) 2. That is a tent. (little) 3. This is an apple, (tasty) 4. That is a bag. (brown) 5. This is a carpet, (thick) 6. This is a bank, (big) 7. This is a text, (easy) 8. This is a lake, (large) 9. That is a vase, (nice) 10. This is a tie. (red) 11. That is a cap. (white) 12. This is a textbook. (English) 13. That is a flat, (good) e.g. These are notebooks, (thin) These (they) are thin notebooks.

1. Those are cups, (blue) 2. These are shelves, (good) 3. Those are hats, (old) 4. These are coats, (grey) 5. These are chains, (silver) 6. Those are pictures, (nice) 7. These are knives, (sharp) 8 Those are carpets, (green) 9. These are oranges, (sweet) 10. Those are books (interesting) //. , , : e.g. That is an umbrella, (my) It's my umbrella. 1. This is a typewriter, (her) 2. Those are books, (our) 3. These are maps, (their) 4. That is a tie. (his) 5. Those are pencils, (her) 6. That is a toy. (your) 7. This is a bed. (my) 8. Those are apples, (our) 9. That is a coat, (his) 10. That is a car. (their) ///. , . . e.g. That is a radio-set. No, it isn't a radio-set. It's a record-player. e.g. Those are lemons. No, they aren't lemons. They are oranges. IV. (, , , ). 11. V. . . 1. I think that's my jacket. This isn't your jacket. This is my jacket. I'm sorry. I made a mistake. 2. I think those are my gloves. These aren't your gloves. They are my gloves. I'm sorry. I made a mistake. 3. What is this? This is a radio. Is it really a radio? Not a telephone? Yes, it is a radio, not a telephone. 4. What are those? Those are offices. Offices? Not shops? No. 5. Those are beds, aren't they? No, they aren't. What are they? They are desks. 6. Is that an office? No, that isn't an office. Well, what is that? That is a school.

Fluency
/. , : 1. Excuse me! Yes? Is this your handbag? Pardon? Is this your handbag? Yes, it is. Thank you very much. 2. Is this your umbrella? No, it isn't. Are you sure? Yes, I am sure. That umbrella is brown and my umbrella is black. 3. Are these your boots? No, they aren't. Are you sure? Yes, I am sure. Those boots are dirty, my boots are clean. 4. My coat and my umbrella, please. Here is my ticket. Thank you, sir. Number five. Here is your umbrella and your coat. This is not my umbrella. Sorry, sir. Is this it?

 Yes, it is. Thank you very much. //. : 1. . , . 2. . , .

BE+POSSESSION (WHOSE ...?) Illustrative Situations

/. :

1. Whose bag is this? This is my bag. The bag is mine. 2. Whose coat is that? That is Jack's coat. The coat is his. 3. Whose umbrella is this. This is my sister's umbrella. The umbrella is hers. 4. Whose house is that? That is our house. The house is ours. 5. Whose bikes are those? They are the boys' bikes. The bikes are theirs. 6. Whose car is that? Which one? The green one. Oh, it's Mr Black's. 7. Whose newspapers are those? Are they yours, Peter? No, they aren't. I think they are Jane's. 8. George: This is not my coat. Marian: Is it my husband's coat? George: No, it is not. Marian: Is it Richard's? George: Yes, it is.

Practice
/. : e.g. These are our books. The books are ours. 1. Those are their tickets. 2. Is this your pen? 3. That is our dog. 4. This is his typewriter. 5. Are those your gloves? 6. Is that my umbrella? 7. This is Mary's hat. 8. That is my brother's house. 9. This is his coat. 10. Are these my flowers? 11. Is that your car? 12. Is that her tape-recorder? e.g. These pencils are hers. These are her pencils. 1. Those gloves are yours. 2. Is that dictionary hers? 3. Is that bag mine? 4. That car is ours. 5. The dog isn't mine. 6. Those glasses are his. 7. Are these pictures John's? 8. Is that shirt his? 9. That newspaper is hers. 10. That house is my brother's. 11. These newspapers are yours. //. , -: e.g. Which car is theirs? The green one is theirs. 1. Which pencil is yours? (red). 2. Which bag is Mary's? (brown). 3. Which coat is his? (black) 4. Which house is theirs? (small) 5. Which glass is yours? (that) 6. Which umbrella is hers? (blue) 7. Which notebooks are theirs? (thin) 8. Which room is ours? (room 30)
///. . :

\. Jill: Whose book is this' Is it yours, Maria? Maria: No, it isn't mine. I think it's Helen's. Helen: No, it isn't mine Ask Lucy. Perhaps, it's hers. 2. Whose coat is that? I think it's Mary's. Isn't it yours? Oh, no! Mine is grey. 3 Is that John's dictionary? Which one? The one on the desk. No, it isn't. His dictionary is red. 4. Are those Jane's gloves? Which ones? The ones on the chair. No, they aren't. Her gloves are brown. Whose gloves are they? I think they are Betty's. 5. Which umbrella is yours? The blue one is mine. Which umbrella is Kate's? The green one is hers.

Fluency
/. , . .
At Table

Peter: Ann, here are two plates: a blue plate and a green plate. Which is your plate? Ann: The green one is mine, Peter. Peter: Then the blue one is mine.

Ann: Yes, the blue one is yours and the green one is mine. Peter: Here are two glasses: a small one and a big one. Which is mother's glass? Ann: The small one is hers. The big one is father's. Peter: The small one is hers, and the big one is his. Ann: Yes, that's right. Peter: Which is father's plate? Ann: The yellow one is his. Peter: Here are four bowls. Ann: Yes, the big bowls are Tom's and Paul's. Peter: The small ones are ours, then? Ann: Yes, the small ones are ours, and the big ones are theirs. Which One? George: How about some more wine? Charles: Please. George: Which glass is yours? Charles: That one's mine George: Which one? Charles: The empty one! (a little later) George: Well, good night ... Charles: Good night ... thank you for a lovely evening. George: Now, which coats are yours? Charles: Oh, those coats are ours. George: Which ones? Charles: The black one and the grey one. George: Ah, yes ... I've got them. Charles: Good. The grey one's mine, and the black one's hers.
Whose Shirt is That?

Teacher: Whose shirt is that? Is that your shirt, Frank? Frank: No, sir. It's not my shirt. This is my shirt. My shirt is blue. Teacher: Is this shirt Tim's? Frank: Perhaps, it is, sir. Tim's shirt is white. Teacher: Tim? Tim: Yes, sir? Teacher: Is this your shirt? Tim: Yes, sir. Teacher: Here you are. Catch! Tim: Thank you, sir.
BE+LOCATION (WHERE IS IT?)

Illustrative Situations
/. : 1. Where are you? I'm in the kitchen. 2. Where is John? He's in the living-room. 3. Where is Helen? She's at the bar. 4. Where are Mr and Mrs Jones? They are in the garden. 5. Where am I? You are in King Street. 6. Where are we? We are in Oxford Circus. 7. Where is the newspaper? It's on the desk. 8. Where is the table? It's in the middle of the room. 9. Where are the flowers? They are in the vase. 10. Where is the garden? It's behind the house. 11. Where is the ball? It's under the bed. 12. Where is the clock? It's above the piano. 13. Where is the car? It's in front of the house. 14. Where is the school? It's opposite the bank. 15. Where is the supermarket? It's near the hospital. 16. Where is the restaurant? It's next to the bank. 17. Where is your office? It's between the library and the park. 18. Where is the type-writer? It's on the table. And the ink? It's there, too. 19. Jack is in London. In London? Yes, he is in London. 20. Jack and Mary are in Paris. In Paris? Yes, they are in Paris.

Practice
/. , : e.g. shirt/on the bed Where is the shirt? It's on the bed. the teapot/on the shelf; the bank/next to the cinema; the carpet/in the middle of the room; the suits/in the wardrobe; the shop/between the school and the hotel; the pictures/above the desk;

the boxes/under the bed; the supermarket/opposite the bank; your car/in front of the office; the library/near the school; the garage/behind the hotel. //. , : e.g. Bob/in the sitting-room. Where is Bob? He's in the sitting-room, the children/in the park; Mr Smith/in Paris; the Blacks/in Italy; Lucy/at a party; Jane/at her office; the boys/at the cinema; your mother/in the garden; John and Helen/at the bar. ///. .

Fluency
/. , . . 1. Mary is in New York. In New York? Yes, she is in New York. 2. Is Jane in Paris now? Yes, she is. And Kate? She is in Paris, too. 3. Is Kate in London now? No, she isn't. Where is she? In Manchester. 4. Are Jim and Paul in Chicago now? No, they aren't. Where are they? They are in New York. 5. The Blacks are in Rome now, aren't they? No, they aren't. Where are they? They are in Madrid. 6. Fetch my glasses, please. Where are they? They are on the desk or on the sofa. They aren't there. Look on the TV set then. They aren't there either. 7. Excuse me, sir. Yes? Where is the bank? It's in Regent Street. //. : 1. . , , . 2. . . , . , . BE + APPEARANCE OF THINGS, QUALITY RATINGS (WHAT COLOUR IS IT?)

Illustrative Situations
/. 1. What colour is your new dress? It's blue 2. What colour are your gloves? They are brown. 3. What is the book like? It's very interesting. 4. What are the cars like? They are very comfortable. 5. What kind of house is that? It's very big and modern. :

Practice

/. , : e.g. What colour is your car? ( It's black, your suit/grey; the shoes/brown; the walls/blue; your hat/white; , , the coat/black; the sofa/green; the carpet/red; the armchair/grey; your dress/yellow. e.g. What is the film like? It's very interesting, the hotel/modern; the flowers/beautiful; your handbag/very small; your flat/large; the restaurant/comfortable; the carpet/thick; the books/interesting; your car/fast e.g. What kind of house is that? It's very modern, river/deep; park/beautiful; flat/light; place/quiet; office/large; hotel/big; vase/nice.

Fluency
/. , . . 1. Mrs Brown: What colour's your new dress? Mrs White: It's green. Come upstairs and see it. Mrs Brown: Thank you. Mrs White: Look! Here it is! Mrs Brown: That's a nice dress. It's very smart. Mrs White: My hat's new, too. Mrs. Brown: What colour is it? Mrs. White: It's the same colour. It's green, too. Mrs. Brown: That is a lovely hat! ** * 2. Mrs Fox: What is your new house like? Mrs Morrison: It's large and nice. Mrs Fox: What is the sitting-room like? Mrs Morrison: It's light and comfortable. Mrs Fox: What is the garden like? Mrs Morrison: It isn't large but it's very nice. Mrs Fox: What is the garage like? Mrs Morrison: It's too small.

Self check
/. .

1. ? , . 2. ? . 3. , ? . 4. ? . 5. ( )? , . 6. ? . 7 , ? . 8. ? , . , . 9. ? . 10. ? ? , . 11. ? . 12. , . ? . , . 13 ? . 14. ? . ? , . . 15. ? , ? , . . , .

U NIT 3

GRAMMAR: BE PRESENT TOPIC: ABOUT YOURSELF AND OTHERS COMMUNICATION: INTRODUCTION. SOCIAL GREETINGS

Illustrative Situations /. Listen and imitate: * ... name 1. What's your name? (It's)Chris Best. 2. What's your surname, please? (It's) Best. 3. What's your first name, please? (It's) Chris. 4. Excuse me, please, but is your name Bill Blake? No, I'm sorry, it isn't. It's Baxter, Steve Baxter. Oh, I'm so sorry. 5. Excuse me, please, but are you Janet Blake3 No, I'm sorry, I'm not. My name's Jill Baxter. Oh, sorry. 6. Who are you? I'm John Forest. Who is that man? He's Peter Baker. ... numbers and addresses 1. What's your address, please? My address is 235 Main Street.

2. What's your phone-number? My ... occupation What are you? I'm a teacher. What's your job? I'm an engineer. What is your brother's job? He's a driver. Is your son a student? Yes, he is. ...origin/nationality Where are you from? I'm from Spain. What nationality are you? I'm Spanish. . Where is your wife from? She's from England. She's English.

phone

number

is 7418906.

...appearance/age How old is Pat? I think he's about 28 (years old). What is he like? He's tall and handsome. How tall is Pat? He's about 6 feet. (1.83 metres tall).
... character and ability

Favourable 1. He is friendly. 2. She is kind. 3. She is nice. 4. He is clever. Unfavourable 1. He is unfriendly. 2. She is unkind. 3. She is unpleasant. 4. He is stupid.
...introductions

Informal A: This is Pat Wilson and this is Chris Best. B: Hullo, Chris. C: Nice to meet you, Pat. Formal A: This is Mr. Pat Wilson and this is Miss Chris Best. B: How do you do. Miss Best. C: How do you do, Mr. Wilson. (At an informal party) A: Hullo. My name's Pat Wilson. B: Hi! I'm Chris Best. A: Pardon? B: I'm Chris Best. A: Nice to meet you. ... social greetings A: Hullo, Pat. How are you today? B: Fine, thanks, Chris. And you? A: Oh, very well. How's the family? B: (They're) all fine, thanks. A: Good. Well, give my regards to every one. B: Thanks. And give my love to your sister, too. Good-bye. ... physical states Ooh! I'm cold: Are you?
Yes, I am. Oh, I'm not. I'm hot. ...mental states

She is angry. He is happy. They are pleased.

Practice
/. Answer the questions: What's your name? Where are you from? What nationality are you? How old are you? What's your job? What's your address? What's your telephone number? What's your wife's first name? How old is she? What is she like? Is she kind? What is your friend's name? Where is he from? How old is he? What's his job? What's his address? What's his

telephone number? Is your friend married or single? What is your friend like? //. Ask your partner about: a) his (her) name; b) his (her) job; c) his (her) age; d) his (her) address; e) his (her) telephone number; f) his (her) origin; e) his (her) nationality.

///. Ask your partner the same questions about his(her) relatives. IV. Make up dialogues. Use the prompts. Teacher: I'm tired. Are you tired, Victor? Student: No, I am not. Teacher: Jane, is Victor tired? Student: No, he isn't. The students take over the teacher's role and ask each other questions. Prompts: busy, married, hungry, thirsty, cold, hot, free. V. Read the dialogues. Make up similar dialogues. 1. What's your name? My name is Paul. And what is your neighbour's name? His name is Jack. 2. Excuse me, please. Is your name Baxter? Yes, it is. I'm Steve Baxter And this is my wife, Jill. Oh, good. How do you do? 3. Hullo! You're Jill Baxter. Yes, that's right, I am. And this is my husband Steve. Oh, good. How are you? Fine, thanks. 4. How are you? I am very well, thank you. And how is Mr. Green today? He isn't very well, I'm afraid 5. Good morning, Mr. Wilson. Good morning, Miss Best. How are you? Fine, thank you. How's your sister? Very well indeed, thank you, Mr. Wilson. Please give her my regards. Thank you. And give my regards to your tamily, too. Goodbye. Good-bye, Miss Best. Nice to see you. 6. What's your job? I'm a doctor. And what about your husband? He is a pilot.
7. What are you?

I'm an engineer. Is Jim an engineer, too? Yes, we are both engineers. 8. Hello. I'm David Clark. Hello. I'm Linda Martin. Are you a teacher? No, I'm not. Oh, are you a student? Yes, I am. 9. Who is that man? Which man? The one next to Betty Brown Oh, that's Anthony Andrews. 10. A: (answering phone): 0742189. B: Is that you, Pat? A: Yes, who is it, please? B: It's me, Chris. Chris Best. A: Oh hullo, Chris. 11. Where are you from71 I'm from England. Where is Hans from? He is from Germany. Is he German? Yes, he is. 12. Are you busy tonight? Yes, I am. And you? So am I. 13. I'm not hungry. And you? Neither am I.

14. Jack is married. And what about his brother? So is his brother. 15. Tom isn't tall. Neither is his brother. 16. Aren't you tired?
No, I am not

Are you? No, I am not either.

Fluency /. Listen to the texts. Ask and answer questions on the texts. I. Steve Baxter is a journalist in London. He's a busy man His work is very interesting. Steve's wife, Jill, is a teacher at a language school. She's busy woman. Her work is very interesting too. 2 I'm Stephen Slade. I'm English I'm 24 I'm an architect I m from London. My friends' names are Pat and Chris They are both engineers. Their office telephone number is 5952943 They're about 25 years old. They are both good-looking and very nice. 3. Dick Smith is a teacher. He is from New York. He is tall and thin. Mary and Bob Jones aren't teachers. They are from Los Angelos. Mary is tall, but Bob is short. 4. George and Alice are students George is from Washington Alice is from New York. They are in Boston They are students al Boston University, but they aren't in the classroom now. George is in the gym. Alice is in the library. 5. My friend's name is Peter Morrison. He's English. He's an engineer. His address is 27 Grafton Street, London Wix 5 A. H., England. His telephone number is 6320748 He's good-looking He's 28 years old and about 1.75 metres tall He's a very nice man. He's always ready help //. Listen to the conversations. Read and reproduce them. Act out situations based on these conversations. 1. Mr. Ford: Good afternoon, Mrs. Davis. Mrs. Davis: Good afternoon, Mr. Ford. Mr. Ford: How are you today? Mrs. Davis: I'm very well, thank you. And you? Mr. Ford: I'm fine, thanks. How is Mr. Davis? Mrs. Davis: He's fine, thanks. How is Mrs. Ford? Mr. Ford: She's very well, too, Mrs. Davis. Goodbye, Mrs. Davis Nice to see you. Mrs. Davis: Nice to see you too, Mr. Ford. Goodbye. Situation: You meet your friend, greet each other and as! about your families. * ** 2. Mr. Blake: Good morning. Students: Good morning, Mr. Blake. Mr. Blake- This is Miss Alice Dupont. Alice is a new student She is French. Alice, this is Hans. He is German Hans: How do you do? Mr. Blake: And this is Britt. She's Swedish. Britt: How do you do? Mr. Blake: And this is Dimitry. He is Greek. Dimitry: How do you do? Mr. Blake: And this is Paul. He's Brazilian. Paul: How do you do? Mr. Blake: And this is Stella. She's Spanish. Stella: How do you do? * * * 3. Robert: I am a new student. My name's Robert. Alice: How do you do? My name's Alice. Robert: Are you French? Alice: Yes, I am. Are you French, too? Robert: No, I am not. Alice: What nationality are you? Robert: I'm Italian. Are you a teacher? Alice: No, I'm not. Robert: What's your job? Alice: I'm a typist. What's your job? Robert: I'm an engineer. * * * 4. Jill: Good morning. My name's Jill Baxter, I'm your English teacher. Welcome to London and to our school. Now, what are your names, please? Ali: My name's Mr. Badran. Jill: And what's your first name, please? I'm Jill, not Mrs. Baxter. First name in class. Ali: O. K. I'm Ali. I'm from Egypt. Jill: Thank you, Ali. And who are you, please? Monika: I'm Monika Wengli from Brugg. Jill: Where's that? Is it in Germany? Monika: No, it isn't. It's in Switzerland, near Zurich. Jill: Thank you, Monika. And where are you

from? Annegret: I'm from Germany. My name's Annegret Wade. Jill: Wade? But that's English. Annegret: Yes, that's right. I'm married to an Englishman. * * * 5. Mr. Jackson: Come and meet our employees, Mr. Richards. Mr. Richards: Thank you, Mr. Jackson. Mr. Jackson: This is Miss Grey and this is Miss Taylor. Mr. Richards: How do you do? Those girls are very pretty. What are their jobs? Mr. Jackson: They are typists. This is Mr. Baker and this is Mr. Short. Mr. Richards: They aren't very busy. What are their jobs? Mr. Jackson: They're clerks. They are very lazy. Mr. Richards: Who is this young man? Mr. Jackson: This is Jim. He's our office boy. Situation ': You are in class. You introduce each ot'ier and ask some questions. Situation 2: At a party you introduce your guests to each other.
Writing

1. Write about yourself and your family. 2. Write about your friends. 3. Write about your relatives.

Self check
/. Use the proper forms of the verb be Jill: Hello. . we all here today? No, who .. missing? Maria: Enrico .. missing and Luisa ... missing too. Jill: Yes, they ... late. I hope they ... not ill. Enrico: Good morning! Here I .... Luisa: Sorry, I . . late. Jill: Oh, that .. all right. ... you both O.K.? Maria: Yes, we .. . U. Translate into English: 1. . 30 . . . . . 2. ? . ? . ? . ? . 3. ? . ? , . ? . 4. ! ? , . ? , . , 5- ! , . , - . . 6. ? . ? 45.

U NIT 4 GRAMMAR: HAVE(GOT). Indefinite Pronouns SOME, ANY, NO. Illustrative Situations /. Listen and imitate: 1. We have a big kitchen.= We've got a big kitchen. 2. They have a new office. = They've got a new office. 3. I have a sister.= I've g9t a sister. 4. I haven't a brother.= I haven't got a brother. 5. Jack has a bicycle. = Jack has got a bicycle. 6. Jack hasn't a car. = Jack hasn't got a car. 7. Have you got a phone? Yes, I have.

8. What have you got in your hand? A coin. 9. Have you got a sister or a brother3 I've got a sister.

10. Jane has (got) a dog, hasn't she? Yes, she has 11. You haven't got a dog, have you? No, I haven't. Some, Any, No 1. Mary has got some money. 2. Jack hasn't got any money, or Jack has no money. 3. Have you got any red ink? Yes, I've got some. 4. We've got some oranges. 5. We haven't got any lemons, or We have no lemons. 6. Has your brother got any Spanish books? Yes, he has some. 7. You haven't got any relatives in Minsk, have you? No. Practice /. Answer the questions: Have you got a family? Have you got any children? Have you got a sister or a brother? Have you got a good flat? Have you got a large kitchen? Has your kitchen got a fridge? Your flat has got a balcony, hasn't it? Have you got a telephone in your flat? Have you got a taperecorder? Have you got any French books in your library? Have you got any good records? Huve you got a car? Have you got a garage? What is your native town/village? Has the town got a cinema? Has it got a theatre, too? The town has got a library, hasn't it? Has the town got a church? Has the town got a park? It has got a school, hasn't it? //. Read the dialogues. Learn them. Make up similar dialogues. Use the prompts. 1. Kate is a lucky woman. Is she? Oh, yes, very. She's got a house of her own. (Jane a good husband; Mary a good son; Mrs. Smith a nice garden) 2. Mike has got a telephone. And Lucy? Lucy hasn't got a telephone./Lucy has no telephone. (Jack Alec a car; Roger Paul a boat; Dick Mary a tent; Jane Lucy a watch) 3. Have you got a bathing-suit? Yes, I have. What is it like? It's a green one. (a car fast; a house large; a dog clever; a chain silver) 4. Jane has got a typewriter, hasn't she3 Yes, she has./ No, she hasn't. (Lucy a phone; Mike a map; Helen a dictionary; Roger a taperecorder) 5. Peter has no car, has he? Yes, he has. (He has an American car) (Mike garage; Helen record-player; they TV-set; Peter boat) 6. I've got some apples. Have you got any pears? Yes, I've got some. (pens pencils; lemons oranges; newspapers magazines; shirts ties; butter milk; red ink blue ink) 7. You have some cigarettes, haven't you? Yes, I have some. (you money; she coffee; Mary notebooks; you oranges) 8. You haven't got any tea, have you? Yes, I have some. (you money; she relatives; Jane friends; you free time) 9. Have you got a radio? No, I haven't, but I've got a piano. So have I. (a newspaper a magazine; a pen a pencil; a TV set" a record-player) 10. Has Dick got a car?

 No, he hasn't. Neither has Peter. (Paul a garage Bob, Peter a boat Alec; Mary a bicycle Jane) ///. Alice is choosing a present for her husband. Lucy is making suggestions. Answer as in the examples: e.g. Has he got an electric shaver? (German) Yes, he's got a German one. What about sunglasses? He's got expensive ones. 1. Has he got a pocket calculator? (American) 2. What about gloves? (leather) 3. Has he got a digital watch? (Japanese) 4. Has he got a typewriter? (portable) 5. What about nice ties? (silk)

Fluency /. Listen to the texts and answer the questions:

Mr. Robinson: My wife and I have a nice house. It's a small house, but it's nice. We have three children. Oh, look! I have a picture of the children. And this is a picture of the house. We have two trees in our garden. That's the children's room, and that's our bedroom. The children have the big room. Questions: What is Mr. Robinson's house like? Has he got any children? The Robinsons have got a garden, haven't they? Mr. and Mrs. Robinson are in the sitting-room now. Mr. Robinson is in an armchair. He has a book in his hand and a cigarette in his mouth. Mrs. Robinson has a pen in her hand. Her bag is on the table. They have a dog. It is under the table. Questions: Where are the Robinsons at the moment? What has Mr. Robinson got in his hand? He has a cigarette in his mouth, hasn't he? Mrs. Robinson has got a pencil in her hand, hasn't she? Have the Robinsons got a dog? Where is it? //. Listen to the texts. Ask and answer questions on the texts. 1. Hi! My name's Gloria Gusto I'm an actress. I'm from London. I've got a flat in London and a house in Hollywood, with a swimming pool. I've got a new Rolls-Royce and a lot of money in the bank. I've got a husband and three wonderful children in Hollywood. Life's great! I've got everything. 2. Hello, my name's Tom Atkins. I'm from London, too. I'm broke. I haven't got any money. I haven't got a job, or a house, or a car. I haven't got a wife, and I haven't got any children. Life's terrible. I haven't got anything. 3. Look at this man. His name's Terry Archer. He isn't from London. He's from Oxford. He's a factory worker. He's got a good job. He's got a car. He hasn't got a big house, he's got a flat. He's got a wife, but he hasn't got any children. Life's all right. ///. Listen to the conversations. Read them and act them out.
(At the bus-stop)

1. Freddy: Have you got your cigarettes? George: Yes, I've got them. Freddy: And have you got your matches? George: Yes, I've got my matches. Freddy: Have you got your newspaper? George: Yes, I've got that. Freddy: Have you got your money? George (feeling in his pocket): Oh! No! I haven't got my money. Freddy: Where is it? George: It's in my purse in the house. Freddy: The bus is coming. It's here. Look, George, I've got two shillings. Here, take it. George: Thank you, Freddy. Goodbye.
(On the bus)

2. Inspector: Have you got a ticket? George: Yes, I have. Inspector: Where is it? George: I've got it in my hand. Here it is. Inspector: This isn't the ticket for the bus. George: Isn't it? Oh, no, it isn't! This is the wrong ticket. Inspector: Well, where is the right ticket? George: I've got it in my hat. Inspector: Well, give it to me.
* * *

3. John: Have you got a match, George? George: Yes, Mr. Forest. I've got some matches in my jacket. John: I've got some cigarettes, but I haven't got any matches. George: Well, I've got some matches, but I haven't got any cigarettes. John: Take a cigarette, George. George: Thank you, Mr. Forest! Take a match. * * * 4. Stella: Father, have you got any sweets in your pocket? John: No, I haven't. Stella: Has Mother got any sweets in her handbag?

John: No, she hasn't. Stella: What have you got in your pocket? John- I've got a notebook and some pencils. Stella: Have you got any matches in your pocket? John: Yes, I have. 5. Stella: What have you got in your hand, Richard? Have you got any sweets? Richard: No, I haven't got any sweets. Stella: Yes, you have! Richard (laughing) Yes, I have a box of sweets. Take one! Stella: Thank you. IV. Ask your friend what he has in his pocket (bag, hand, briefcase, room). V. Using the verb have(got) ask your friend about his family, his flat, his native town or village.

Self check /. Translate into English:

1. ? , . 2. . . 3. . . 4. ? , . 5. . 6. ? , . 7. . 8. ? , . 9 . 10. . 11. . UNIT 5 GRAMMAR: THERE IS (ARE).SOME, ANY, NO TOPIC: FLAT

Illustrative Situations
/. Listen and imitate: 1. There is a cup on the table. The cup is clean. 2. There is a box on the floor. The box is large. 3. There is a glass in the sideboard. The glass is empty. 4. There is a knife on the plate. The knife is sharp. 5. There is a fork on the tin. The fork is dirty. 6. There is a bottle in the refrigerator. The bottle is full. 7. There is a pencil on the desk. The pencil is blunt. 8. There is a spoon in the . The spoon is small. //. Listen and imitate the following questions and answers: 1. Is there a cup on the table? Yes, there is. 2. Is there a box on the floor? Yes, there is. 3. Is there a cup in the sideboard? No, there isn't. 4. Is there a fork on the plate? No, there isn't 5. What's there in the refrigerator? There is a bottle there. 6. What's there in the cup? There is a spoon there. 7. What's there on the desk? There is a pencil there. 8. Is there a bottle or a cup in the fridge? There's a bottle. 9. Is there a fork or a knife on the tin? There's a fork. 10. Is there a pencil or a pen on the desk? There's a pencil. 11. There's a cup on the table, isn't there? Yes, there is. 12. There's no fork on the plate, is there? No, there isn't. 13. There isn't a spoon in the cup, is there? Yes, there is. ///. Listen and imitate: 1. There are some cigarettes on the dressing-table. They are near that box. 2. There are some plates on the cooker. They are clean. 3. There are some bottles in the refrigerator. They are empty. 4. There are some shoes on the floor. They are near the bed. 5. There are some knives on the table. They are in that box. 6. There are some forks on the shelf. They're near those spoons. IV. Listen and imitate the following questions and answers: 1. Are there any cigarettes on the dressing-table? Yes, there are. 2. Are there any plates on the cooker? Yes, there are (some). 3. Are there any cups in the refrigerator? No, there aren't. 4. Are there any knives on the shelf? No, there aren't (any). 5. What's there on the floor? There are some shoes on the floor. 6. What's there on the table? There are some knives on the

table.

7. Are there plates or glasses on the cooker? There are some plates there. 8. Are there cigarettes or pencils on the dressing-table? There are some cigarettes there. 9. There are some shoes on the floor, aren't there? Ye; there are. 10. There are some plates in the refrigerator, aren't there? No, there aren't. There are some bottles there 11. There are no cigarettes on the dressing-table, are there Yes, there are some. V. Listen and imitate: A. 1. There is some rice in the jar. 2. There's some milk in the bottle. 3. There's some sugar in the jar. 4. There's some oil in the bottle. 5. There's some water in the jug. 6. There's some wine in the bottle. B. 1. There isn't any butter in the fridge. 2. There isn't any cheese. 3. There isn't any beer. 4. There aren't any tomatoes. 5. There aren't any oranges. 6. There aren't any eggs. 7. The fridge is empty. C. 1. Is there any cheese in the fridge?Yes, there is. 2. Is there any butter in the fridge? No, there isn't. 3. Are there any eggs in the fridge? Yes, there are. 4. Are there any tomatoes in the fridge? No, there aren't.

Illustrative Texts
/. Listen to the text about Mrs. Smith's kitchen: Mrs. Smith's kitchen is small. There is a refrigerator in the kitchen. The refrigerator is white. It is on the right. There is an electric cooker in the kitchen. The cooker is blue. It is on the left. There is a table in the middle of the room. There is a bottle on the table. The bottle is empty. There is a cup on the table, too. The cup is clean.

//. Answer the questions: Is Mrs. Smith's kitchen large or small? There is a refrigerator in the kitchen, isn't there? What colour is the fridge? Is it on the right or on the left? Is there an electric or a gas cooker in the kitchen? The cooker is white, isn't it? Where is it? What's there in the middle of the room? Is there a bottle on the table? There is a cup on the table, too, isn't there? Is it clean or dirty? Is there a TVset in the kitchen? ///. Read the text and ask all types of questions on the text. IV. Tell about Mrs Smith's kitchen. V What is your kitchen like? What's there in the kitchen? VI. Listen to the text about Mrs. Smith's living-room: Mrs. Smith's living-room is large. There is a television in the room. The television is near the window. There are some magazines on the television. There is a table in the room. There are some newspapers on the table. There are some armchairs in the room. The armchairs are near the table. There is a radio in the room. The radio is near the door. There are some books on the radio. There are some pictures in the room. The pictures are on the wall. . VII. Answer the questions: Mrs. Smith's living-room is large, isn't it? Is there a TVset in the room? Where is it? What's there on the television? There is a table in the room, isn't there? Are there newspapers or magazines on the table? There are some armchairs in the room, aren't there? Where are the armchairs? Is there a radio in the room? Is it near the door or near the window? What's there on the radio? Are there any pictures in the room? Where are they? VIII. Read the text and ask all types of questions on the text. IX. Tell about Mrs Smith's living-room. X. What is your living-room like? What's there in your living-room? Practice /. Bring some pictures to class. Make up your own utterances using the construction "there is/are": a) affirmative and negative statements, both singular and plural; b) questions/general, special, alternative, disjunctive/. Use the illustrative situations as an example. //. Ask each other about your neighbourhood: e.g. A: Excuse me. Is there a laundromat in this neighbourhood? : Yes, there is. There is a laundromat on Main Street, next to the supermarket. Prompts: post-office, bank, library, bus station, cafeteria, supermarket, clinic, church. e.g. A: Is there a restaurant in your neighbourhood? B: No, there isn't. A: Is there a cafeteria in your neighbourhood? B: Yes, there is. A: Where is it?

B: It's on Central Avenue, near the bank. Prompts: bakery, hospital, supermarket, department store, school, park, police station.

///. Make up similar dialogues. e.g. I'm hungry. Is there any cold meat in the house? No, there isn't any cold meat, but there's some bread and cheese. Oh, good. Prompts: milk cream; ham sausage; cheese bacon e-g- Are there any apples in the house? No, there aren't, I'm afraid. Perhaps, there are some oranges. There aren't any oranges either. What a pity! Prompts: lemons bananas; sweets biscuits; pears plums IV. Read the dialogues and learn them: 1. Marian: Is there a cup on the table? Gwen: No, there isn't a cup. There aren't any cups in this room. All the cups are in the kitchen. Marian: Is there any tea in that pot? Gwen: No, there isn't any tea in the house. But there is some coffee. Marian: No, we haven't got any coffee or tea. * * * 2. Lucy: What's there in the cupboard? Bob: There's some chalk, but there aren't any pencils. There's some bread and there are some cakes. There are some potatoes, but there aren't any apples. V. Ask your partner what's there in his / her bag. VI. Ask your partner what's there in his / her fridge. Fluency /. Listen to the texts, ask and answer questions: 1. Look at this picture. This is a classroom. There are some desks in the classroom. There is a blackboard on the wall. Is there a clock on the wall? Yes, there is a clock on the wall. Is there a table in the classroom? Yes, there is. Where is it? It is near the blackboard. Are there any words on the blackboard? No, there are not. There are not any words on the blackboard. Is there a chair in the classroom? Yes, there is. Where is it? It is near the table. Are there any students in the classroom? No, there are no students in the classroom. 2. Look at this office. There are two desks and two chairs in this office. There are some papers on the desk. There is a shelf near the door and there are some books on the shelf. There are some files in the cabinet and there are some files on the shelf. There is a telephone on one of the desks. The walls and the windows in the office aren't very clean. There aren't any flowers in this office. There aren't any people. 3. Let's have a look at our sitting-room. It's large and comfortable. Opposite the door there's a big piano. There's a bookcase next to the piano. On the right there's a fireplace. There's an armchair on each side of the fireplace. Opposite the fireplace there's a small table with an ash-tray and some newspapers on' it. By the table there's a small chair. On the extreme right there's a radio-set. There's a comfortable sofa on the left. There are two red cushions on the sofa. There's a standard-lamp near the sofa. There are two pictures and a big oval mirror on the wall. On the floor there's a thick carpet. Our sitting-room is light because there are two large windows in it. There are nice white curtains at the windows. The room is very cosy. 4. Our flat is very nice. It's in Chelsea. It's got two rooms: a living-room and a bedroom. The living-room is very big but the bedroom is small. There's a kitchen and a bathroom. The bathroom is a beautiful room with a big window, but the kitchen is rather small. The flat's got central heating. It's 40 per week. The flat is near a park and it's near the shops. The underground station is five minutes' walk. We are very happy here. Our neighbours are very nice. They are Jane and Bill Robinson. They are in the flat downstairs. Jane is a nurse in a hospital and Bill is an engineer in a factory. *, 7 //. Describe: a) your classroom; b) your office; c) your flat; d) your neighbour's flat. ///. Listen to the conversation, ask and answer questions. Agent: This is a nice flat, Miss Wilkins. Here's a plan. Miss Wilkins: Mmm... Agent: There's a living-room. There's a kitchen, a bedroom and there's a toilet. Miss Wilkins: Is there a balcony? Agent: No, there isn't. Miss Wilkins: ...and a telephone? Agent: No, there isn't a telephone. Agent: Well, here's the kitchen. Miss Wilkins: Hmm...it's very small. Agent: Yes, it isn't very large, but there's a cooker and a

fridge. There are some cupboards under the sink. Miss Wilkins: Are there any plates? Agent: Yes, there are. Miss Wilkins: Good. Are there any chairs in here? Agent: No, there aren't, but there are some in the livingroom. Miss Wilkins: Hmm. There aren't any glasses! Agent: Yes, there are! They're in the cupboard. Miss Wilkins: ...and ... er ... where's the toilet? IV. Give a brief account of the conversation. Role-play the conversation. V. Here are some more questions you can ask when you are speaking to a house agent: Is there a stove in the kitchen? Is there a lift in the building? Is there a TV antenna on the roof? Is there a radiator in every room? Is there a mailbox near the building? Are there any pets in the building? Are there any children in the building? How many rooms are there in the flat? How many floors are there in the building? How many windows are there in the living-room? VI. Listen to another conversation: Jill (on the phone): Hello, Steve. Here's Jill. I've got a free afternoon. Have you got enough time for lunch with me? Steve: No, I'm sorry, Jill, I haven't. Why? Jill: Well, I've got a newspaper advertisement here. It's for a flat in Hampstead. It's got two bedrooms, a modern kitchen, central heating... Steve: And has it got a garage? Jill: Yes, it has. Steve: I'm sure it has, Jill, but we haven't got enough money. VII- Read and role-play the conversation. VIII. Act out the following situations: 1. A house agent is on the phone and is giving you some information about a flat. Take notes and then tell another student about the flat. 2. Your friend has got a new flat. At the moment you are speaking about his new flat.
Writing

1. Write about your flat. 2. Write about your office. 3. Write a phone conversation between a landlord and a tenant.

Self check
/. Fill in the gaps with "there is, there are, this, the": 1. ... a lot of trees in our street. ... trees are old and big. 2. ... an airport in our town. ... airport is not far from the centre. 3. ... is my brother. He is an engineer. 4. ... no cigarettes in the box. 5. Sorry, ... nobody in the office now. ... secretary is out and ... chief is at the meeting. 6. ... is my new flat. ... three rooms in it. 7. ... hospital is two blocks from here. 8. ... is Upping Street. ... a lot of offices in it. ... building at the far end of the street is my office. 9. Where is ... typewriter? //. Fill in the gaps with "some, any, no": 1. I'd like to buy ... flowers. We haven't got... in our garden now. 2. There's ... butter on the table, but there isn't ... milk there. 3. Is there .. paper on the desk? No, there isn't ... . 4. Are there ... pictures in this book? Yes, there are ... . 5. We haven't got ... sugar. Go and buy ... please. 6. There is ... carpet in our bedroom, but there is one in the sitting-room. 7. There is ... cheese on the table. Take ... cheese from the fridge. 8. I've got .. interesting books to read. 9. Have you got ... money? Yes, I have ... . 10. There are ... magazines here, but there are ... on that shelf. 11. Have you got ... new stamps? No, I haven't got ... .

///. Translate into English: 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . , . 2. ? , . 3. . . 4. ? . 5. , . 6. ? , . 7. , . 8. ? . 9. . ? 10. ? , . 11. . 12. ? . 13. ? , . 14. . ?

UNIT 6 GRAMMAR: IMPERATIVES. OBJECTIVE CASE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. PREPOSITIONS.

Illustrative Situations

/. Listen and learn the imperatives: 1. Please, take the textbook out of your bag, Mary. Open it to page 45 and read text 4. Thank you. Close the book. Go to the blackboard. Don't take the book with you. Put it on the desk. Take a piece of chalk and write the new English words on the blackboard. Thank you. Your mark is excellent. Sit down, please. 2. Don't copy out this text now. Do it at home, please. Write ten questions on the text, too. Listen to the text in the sound laboratory. Learn the text. 3. Jack, take that book and give it to Peter. Now take the pencils from him and put them into your bag. Take your exercise-book out of the bag and put it on the table in front of me. 4. Take this hat and show it to Ann, please. Now take it from her and give it to me. Here it is. Thank you. Now give us that blue tie, please. Here is the tie. Take it, please. Thanks. And give us that red one, too. Here you are.

Practice
/. Change the following sentences as in the example: e a. Give me that vase. Give that vase to me. I. Show me that picture. 2. Give her those flowers. 3. Send George that letter 4. Give Mrs. Jones these books. 5 Give the children these ice-creams. 6. Please, bring John that chair. 7. Take her these newspapers. 8. Pass him the salt, e g. Show that dictionary to him. Show him that dictionary. 1. Give that pen to her. 2. Bring that book to me. 3. Take this parcel to Mary. 4. Send that telegram to Peter. 5. Show your bicycle to them. 6. Pass the bread to Helen. 7. Give that pencil to her. 8. Show your album to us. 9. Take that newspaper to Bob. //. Put in me, him, her, us or them: e.g. Give Tim this shirt. Give ... this one, too. Give Tim this shirt. Give him this one, too. 1. Give Jane this watch. Give ... this one, too. 2. Give the children these ice-creams. Give ... these ones, too. 3. Give Tom this book. Give ... this one, too. 4. That is my passport. Give ... my passport please. 5. That is my coat. Give ... my coat please. 6. Those are our umbrellas. Give . . our umbrellas please. 7. That is Jane's dictionary. Give ... the dictionary please. ///. Respond to the following turning indirect orders and requests into direct ones: e.g. Tell John to come at 5. John, come at 5. 1. Tell Mary to wash the dishes. 2. Tell Fred to bring the record-player. 3 Tell your sister to phone me tonight. 4. Tell Lucy to type this letter. 5. Tell Kate to sweep the floor. 6. Tell Helen to dust the wardrobe. 7. Tell Mike to fix the bicycle. e.g. Tell Alec not to be late. Alec, don't be late. 1. Tell Mary not to close the window. 2. Tell Mike not to go out. 3. Tell Jack not to come in. 4. Tell Bob not to work so hard. 5. Tell Lucy not to miss the lecture. 6. Tell Roger not to make so much noise. 7. Tell Betty not to take the typewriter. 8. Tell Jack not to open the window. IV. Fill in the gaps with prepositions: 1. Take the books ... the table and put them ... your bag. 2. Show me this map. Show it... me. 3. Go ... the room ... the corridor. 4. Take that pencil ... the box and put it ... front ... you. 5. Come ..., please. 6. Give these notebooks .. Lucy.
7. Take the magazine ... her and show it ... us. 8. Go ... the blackboard.

Fluency
/. Listen to the conversations and learn them: 1. Steve: I've got a headache and a temperature. Jill: Oh, dear. Stay at home then. Perhaps you've got flue. Go back to bed and take some tablets. Steve: Yes, that's a good idea. Jill. Or phone Dr Ray. 2. Mrs. Jones: Come in, Bessie. Shut the door, please. This bedroom's very untidy. Bessie. What must I do, Mrs. Jones? Mrs. Jones: Open the window and air the room. Then put these clothes in the wardrobe. Then make the bed. Dust the dressing-table. Then sweep the floor. 3. Man: Give me a book please, Jane. Woman: Which book? This one? Man: No, not that one. The red one. Woman: This one? Man: Yes, please. Woman: Here you are. Man: Thank you. 4. Man: Give me some glasses please, Jane. Woman: Which glasses? These glasses? Man: No, not those. The ones on the shelf. Woman: These? Man: Yes, please. Woman: Here you are. Man: Thanks. //. Situation: You are asking your daughter to do some work about the house. Situation: You are the teacher. Give your students some instructions.

Self check /. Use the proper prepositions:

1. Please, take the cup ... Jane and put it ... the table. 2. Please

close your book and put it... your bag. 3. Please go ... the door and close it. 4. Send the telegram ... Mr. Smith. 5. Please take the cnalk ... the box.

//. Use the proper pronouns:

\. The children are hungry. Give ... something to eat. 2. We are students. This is ... classroom. 3 Take the book from the table and put ... into your bag. 4. Betty has a temperature. Give ... some tablets. 5. Ted is a schoolboy. . marks are good. 6. Those are our books. Give ... our books, please.

///. Translate into English:

1. , . ? , . 2. . 3. . . 4. . . 5. . . 6. . . 7. . .

UNIT 7
TOPIC. THE TIME. DAYS AND WEEKS. THE MONTHS. DATES. GRAMMAR: BE (PRESENT). NUMERALS. The Time This is a clock There are two hands on the face of the clock. One hand is long and the other hand is short. The long hand is the minute hand. The short hand is the hour hand. What time is it' It is twenty minutes to three. Look at the clock faces. What time is it? 1. It is three o'clock. (3.00) 2. It is six o'clock. (6.00) 3. It is nine o'clock (9.00) 4. It is ten minutes to seven. (6.50) 5. It is five minutes to six. (5.55) 6. It is twenty-five minutes to one. (12.35) 7. It is twenty minutes past nine. (9.20) 8. It is twenty-five minutes past twelve. (12.25) 9. It is ten minutes past ten. (10.10) From one o'clock to two o'clock is one hour.

From one o'clock to six o'clock is five hours. There are twenty-four hours in a day. How many minutes are there in an hour? There are sixty. Thirty is a half of sixty. (30='/260) Fifteen is a quarter of sixty. (15='/4 60) Look at the clock faces again. 10. It is half-past seven. (7.30) 11. It is half-past twelve. (12.30) 12 It is half-past nine. (9.30) 13. It is (a) quarter-past twelve. (12.15) 14. It is (a) quarter-past six. (6.15) 15. It is (a) quarter past eleven. (11.15) 16. It is (a) quarter to one. (12.45) 17. It is (a) quarter to five. (4.45) 18. It is (a) quarter to two. (1.45) Days and Weeks There are seven days in a week. The first day of the week is Sunday. The last day of the week is Saturday. The other days of the week between Sunday and Saturday, are Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday and Friday. Monday is the second day, Tuesday is the third day, Wednesday is the fourth day, Thursday is the fifth day, and Friday is the sixth day. Saturday is the seventh day, the last day. There are three hundred and sixty-five days in a year.
The Months

There are twelve months in a year. The names of the months are January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November and December. January is the first month and December is the twelfth or last month. What is May? May is the fifth month. What is August? August is the eighth month. What is November? November is the eleventh month In Great Britain March, April and May are the spring months; June, July and August are the summer months; September, October and November are the autumn months; December, January and February are the winter months. Spring, summer, autumn and winter are the four seasons Questions: How many months are there in a year? What are the names of the months? What is the first month? December is the last month, isn't it? Is May the fifth or the eleventh month? What are th spring (summer, autumn, winter) months? What are the four seasons? Dates Look at this picture. What is the date? Today is Wednesday, the seventeenth of January. What was yesterday? Yesterday was Tuesday, the sixteenth of January. And tomorrow? Tomorrow is Thursday, the eighteenth of January. I st. January 1915 ... the first of January (January^the first), nineteen (hundred and) fifteen. 22nd October 1911 ... the twenty-second of October (October the twenty-second), nineteen (hundred and) eleven.

Jan.-January; Feb.-February; Mar.-March; Apr.-April; Aug.-August; Sept.-September; Oct.-October; Nov.November; Dec.-December. Practice /. Read the following dates: 15 August 1432; 18 December 1683; 5 October 1156; 27 March 1745; 14 April 1832; 23 November 1935; 22 June 1937; 26 May 1567; 3 August 1432; 8 January 1965; 23 February 1918; 16 September 1667 //. Say what time it is: 9.35; 11.30; 12.44; 2.15; 4.20; 8.50; 6.10; 5.30; 3.25; 7.15; 9.55; 5.45; 4.30; 2.45; 3.17; 1.40; 7.12; 1040; 12.50; 11.27; 8.25; 2.15 ///. Read the numerals; 40; 60; 100; 90, 31; 57; 171; 365; 1583; 5 505; 75000; 13 407; 433; 45 672; 324 456; 95 655; 478 932; 1 342 458; 5 879 453; 432 258; 575; 48 260; 768 354; 7 245 672; 278; 439; 2 439; 66 769 IV. Name the days of the week. V. Name the months of the year. VI. Read the dialogues and make up similar dialogues. I. What day is it today? Today is Monday. ' What day was it yesterday? Yesterday was Sunday. What day is it tomorrow? Tomorrow is Tuesday.

What date is it today? Today is the eighth of October. What date was it yesterday? Yesterday was the seventh of October. What date is it tomorrow? Tomorrow is the ninth of October. 2. What time is it by your watch? It is twenty minutes to eleven. By my watch it is half past ten. The right time is twenty-five minutes to eleven. So my watch is five minutes fast and your watch is five minutes slow Self check /. Translate into English: 1. ? 10.45. (11.30; 12.15; 8.20; 5.40; 12.30; 4.10; 8.55; 9.05; 7.45). 2. ? 10.50. , . 3. ? , 25 . ( , 9 . , 12 . , 23 ). UNIT 8 GRAMMAR: PRESENT CONTINUOUS Illustrative Situations /. Listen and imitate: 1. Miss Grey is typing a letter. 2. Mrs. Ford is cooking. 3. Mike is playing chess with his father. 4. Jane and Mary are reading. 5. Peter and John are going to school. 6. The boys are watching television. //. Listen and imitate the following questions and answers: A. 1. Is Miss Grey typing a letter? Yes, she is. 2. Is Mrs. Ford eating? No, she isn't. She's cooking. 3. Are Jane and Mary reading? Yes, they are. 4. Are the boys sleeping? No, they aren't. B. I. What is Miss Grey doing? She's typing a letter. 2. What are Jane and Mary doing? They are reading. 3. Who is cooking? Mrs. Ford is. 4. Where are Peter and John going? They are going to schoo 5. Who is Mike playing chess with? He's playing chess wit his father. r i Is Miss Grey typing a letter or reading a magazine?She's typing a letter. 2. Are the boys watching television or reading? They ar watching television. P. 1. Mrs. Ford is cooking, isn't she? Yes, she is. 2. Jane and Mary are reading, aren't they? Yes, they

3. Peter and John are going to work, aren't they? No, the aren't. They are going to school. 4. Mike is not cooking, is he? No, he isn't. ///. Listen to the dialogues. Learn them. 1. A: What are you doing? B: I'm cooking. A: What are Mary and Fred doing? B: They're studying English. A: What's Tom doing? B: He's eating. A: What's Martha doing? B: She's watching TV. A: What's your dog doing? B: It's sleeping. 2. A: Is Jim very busy just now? B: Yes, he is. He is having breakfast. A: And Jack, is he having breakfast, too? B: No, he isn't, he is shaving. 3. A: What are you reading this week? B: "Lord Jim". A: Is it a good book? B: A very good one. 4. A: What is Jill doing just now? B: She is talking to Paul. A: And Kate? B: Oh, she is dreaming. 5. A: Jane and Helen are in the garden at the moment. B: They are working, aren't they? A: No, they aren't. They are playing cards. 6. A: Are you still typing? B: No, I am not. A: What are you doing? B: I'm listening to music. 7. A: Who is playing the piano? B: My sister is. A: She is a good pianist, isn't she? B: Yes, she is very talented. Illustrative Texts /. Listen to the texts and answer the questions: 1. There is a girl in this picture. What is she doing? She is sitting on a chair. She is reading a book. Where is the chair? It is near the table. There is a cat on the table. There is a dog under the table. The cat is sitting on the table. The dog is lying under the table on the floor. Questions: Who is there in the picture? Is the girl sitting or standing? What is she reading? Where is the cat sitting? Where is the dog lying? 2. This is Mary. She is sitting at the table. There is a piece of paper on the table. Mary has a pencil in her hand. What is she doing? She is drawing a picture of a dog. She is holding a pencil in her right hand. Her left hand is on the table. Mary is wearing a white dress. Questions: Who is this? What is Mary doing? What's there on the table? What has Mary got in her hand? What is Mary wearing? Practice / Express your agreement with the following statements. Give some additional information. Use the prompts. e.g. Lucy is reading, (a magazine) Yes, she is She is reading a magazine. 1. Dick is writing, (a letter) 2. Donald is working, (in the garden) 3. The girls are playing, (volley-ball) 4. Betty and Kate are typing, (the documents) 5. Jane is washing, (the floor) 6. The men are drinking, (beer) 7. Mary is drawing, (a picture of a house) //. Express your disagreement: e.g. John is reading the Times, (the Telegraph) No, he isn't. He's reading the Telegraph. 1. They are playing cricket, (basketball) 2. She's dancing with Paul. (Jack) 3. The Browns are travelling about Italy. (France) 4. Victor is listening to the news, (music) 5. John is sitting beside Ann. (Mary) 6. He is talking to Lucy. (Alice) 7. She is waiting for Jane. (Mary) ///. Make up general questions using the prompts: e.g. you/watch TV Are you watching TV at the moment? Yes, I am. or No, I am not. I'm fixing the sink. 1. the students/write a test. 2. Lucy/have an English class 3. Roger/swim 4. Peter/listen to the news 5. you/wait for Alice 6. Mary/do her homework 7. you/look for your gloves IV. Respond to the following using an alternative question: e.g. Helen is reading, (a newspaper or a magazine) Is she reading a newspaper or a magazine? 1. The children are playing, (volley-ball or tennis) 2. Mary is typing, (a letter or an article) 3. Mrs Jones is cooking,

(lunch or dinner) 5. The students are writing, (a test or a dictation) V. Respond to the following using a disjunctive question: e.g. Dick is writing, (a letter) He's writing a letter, isn't he? 1. The Baxters are travelling, (about France) 2. The boys are playing football, (in the yard) 3. Jane is reading, (an English book) 4. Judy is cooking, (meat) 5. Miss Green is typing, (documents) 6. The children are eating, (cheese) VI. Make up similar dialogues. Use the prompts: e.g. Is Nancy busy? Yes, she is washing her car. Prompts: you clean our yard; Bob fix his bicycle; Lucy and Dick wash their windows; Henry clean his garage; Mrs and Mr Jones paint their kitchen; Kate do her homework; you fix my TVset e.g. Is Mike still answering? Yes, he is. Prompts: Peter smoke; you translate the text; Lucy cook; the children sleep; Jack eat; Jane work; Kitty watch TV; Mary type; John draw e.g. Where is Walter? He's in the kitchen. What's he doing? He's eating breakfast. Prompts: Betty/in the park/ eat lunch; Mr and Mrs Smith/in the dining-room/ eat dinner; you/in the bedroom/ listen to the news; you/in the living-room/play cards; Tom and Mary/in the yard/play baseball; Miss Jackson/ at the bar/drink coffee; Mike/in the library/ study English; Gloria/at a discotheque/dance e.g. Who is calling? Peter is. Prompts: answer Mike; play the guitar my sister; sing Helen; speak to the deanJohn; cook dinner Gwen; danceAlice VII. Ask special questions with prepositional verbs: e.g. John is waiting for somebody, (who) Who is he waiting for? 1. They are talking about something, (what) 2. He is speaking to * somebody, (who) 3. She is listening to something, (what) 4. She is looking at something, (what) 5. They are waiting for somebody, (who) 6. She is looking for something, (what) 7. Peter is playing cards with somebody, (who) 8. I'm thinking about something, (what) VIII. Respond to the following questions. Do it as in the example: e.g. What is Mike doing here? I've no idea what he is doing here. 1. Who is he waiting for? 2. What are they talking about? 3. Where is he going? 4. What is she cooking? 5. Who are they speaking to? 6. What is she typing? 7. Where are they travelling? 8. What is he looking at? 9. What are they looking for? 10. What are they listening to? 11. What is he doing now? IX. Express solidarity: e.g. I am watching TV at the moment. (I) So am I. 1. We are cleaning our yard, (we) 2. Jane is washing the windows. (Dick) 3. Mike is fixing the TVset. (Roger) 4. The children are eating ice-cream, (their parents) 5. I am studying French. (Lucy) 6. We are playing cards, (we) 7. John is writing a test at the moment. (Bob and Mary) e.g. Mike is not watching TV. (I) Neither am I. 1. Kate is not eating her breakfast. (Alice) 2. George is not , working at the moment. (Harry) 3. Lucy is not dancing. (Mary) 4. Jane is not sleeping. (Helen) 5. Jack is not listening. (Peter) '6. Jane is not singing. (Kate)

Fluency
/. Listen to the texts, ask and answer questions. 1. It is 7.30. Frank is having breakfast and listening to some music on the radio. His wife Alice is carrying a tray with some coffee on it. It is 11.30. Alice and her friends are having morning coffee. They are talking about their husbands. One of them is wearing a very strange hat. It is 12 o'clock. Frank is eating in the factory canteen. A lot of men are standing in a queue. They are waiting for their lunch. jt is raining outside. Frank and his friends are still having a break. They are standing and talking about a football match this evening. It is 8 o'clock in the evening. Frank and Alice are at home. Frank is watching television but his wife and his daughter Susan are not. Susan is reading and her mother is writing. Frank is watching a football match. It is 11 o'clock. Susan is talking to Tom. He is phoning from Paris. "Are you having a good time? What's the weather like? Is it raining?" she wants to know. Frank and his wife are still watching television. "Who is she talking to?" Frank is asking. 2. It is a fine day today. There are some clouds in the sky, but the sun is shining. Mr. Jones is with his family. They

are walking over the bridge. There are some boats on the river. Mr. Jones and his wife are looking at them. Sally is looking at a big ship. The ship is going under the bridge. Tim is looking at an aeroplane. The aeroplane is flying over the river. //. Bring some pictures to class and describe them. III. Listen to a telephone conversation: Ann: Hello, Linda. It's me, Ann. Linda: Hello. How are you? Ann: Pretty good, thank you. And you? Linda: Fine, thanks. Ann: Is Jack at home? Linda: No, he isn't. Ann: Is he working today? Linda: No, he isn't working today. He's in the kitchen. Ann: What's he doing? Linda: He's cooking. Ann: What are you doing? Linda: I'm reading. Ann: Where are the children? Linda: They are playing tennis in the yard. IV. Role-play the conversation. V. Make up your own telephone conversation. First write it and then act it out. VI. Listen to the conversation, read and learn it. Jean: Where's Sally, Jack? Jack: She's in the garden, Jean. Jean: What is she doing? Jack: She's sitting under the tree. Jean: Is Tim in the garden, too? Jack: Yes, he is. He's climbing the tree. Jean: I beg your pardon? Who is climbing the tree? Jack: Tim is. Jean: What about the dog? Jack' The dog's in the garden, too. It's running across the grass. It's running after a cat. VII. Say what the people in the classroom are doing.
Writing

/. Here is part of a letter to a relation in which you are describing what various members of the family are doing at the moment: We are having a very nice day. At the moment mother and baby are watching TV. Tony and Liz are listening to a record. Timmie is with Ann. They're playing a game. Father and Auntie are talking and drinking coffee. Uncle Fred is with Lucy. They're reading a book and I'm writing to you! //. Write a paragraph in the same way about your family. III. Here is a postcard from Bordeaux: Dear Jill and Steve! We're spending a wonderful holiday in Bordeaux. The sun is shining brightly and I'm thinking about you at home. At the moment Pam's swimming in the pool, the children are playing and I'm drinking a lovely cool beer at the hotel bar. It's all very expensive, but it isn't raining. Love, Jeff, Pam, Mark and Kate IV. Write a letter in the same way about your holidays.
Games

1. What am I doing? A student mimes an action within a preselected situation (e.g. at home). Members of the class try to identify the acting. (You're...ing!) 2. The students try to guess what the people in the picture that is hidden are doing.

Self check /. Use the proper forms of the verbs: 1. Everybody at 149 (be) very busy today. Mr. Anderson (clean) his apartment. Mrs. Wilson (fix) her kitchen sink. Mr. and Mrs. Thomas (paint) their living-room. Mrs. Black (do) her exercises. Tommy Lee (feed) his dog. And Mr. and Mrs. Lane (wash) their car I (be) busy, too. I (wash) my windows .. and course, I (watch) all my neighbours. It's a very busy day at 149 River Street. 2. What you (do) now? I (type). What you (type) ? An article. Your husband (be) at home?

Yes, he (read) something in the living-room. Where (be) the children? They (play) in the garden. How (be) your Mother? What she (do)? She (visit) her friend. And how you (be), Betty? Fine, thanks. Your husband (be) still in France? Yes, he (be). Give my best regards to him.

//. Translate into English:

1. ? . ? . 2. ? . 3. ? . 4. ? 5. ? . 6. ? .
U N IT 9 GRAMMAR: PRESENT CONTINUOUS (FUTURE)

Illustrative Situations /. Listen and imitate. Study these example situations: 1. John and Mary are very busy today. They are giving a party tomorrow. 2. Jane is working hard. She is taking a test on Tuesday. 3. Tom is leaving for London tomorrow. 4. I am meeting Peter at the bus-stop at 6. 5. Are you busy tonight? Yes, I am. What are you doing? I'm going to the pictures.
The construction "to be going-f-to infinitive"

1. I'm going to write some letters tonight. 2. My father is going to repair his car tomorrow. 3. Jane is not going to take part in the picnic. She is taking her exam tomorrow. 4. What are your plans for tonight? I'm going to play bridge. 5. Are you going to watch television on Friday night? No, I am not. Why not? Because I'm very busy on Friday. 6. Is Tom going to visit Kate tonight? No, he isn't. What is he going to do? He is going to stay at home. 7. You are going to invite Lucy to the party, aren't you? Yes, I am.

Practice
/. Read the dialogues. Make up similar dialogues. Use the prompts. e.g. Are you doing anything on Saturday morning? I'm working in the garden. Prompts: on Monday evening meet my mother at the station; on Friday afternoon visit my parents; tomorrow clean the windows; tonight fix my radio-set; on Sunday write my report e.g. Are you going to the theatre on Sunday? No, I'm not. What are you doing? I'm visiting my friends. Prompts: cinema play football; library repair Ann's bicycle; Jane's party study my English; concert receive guests e.g. Where are you going after classes? To the cinema. Prompts: You theatre; Mary discotheque; John bar e.g. When is Lucy taking her test? On Tuesday. Prompts: Robert leave on Friday afternoon; Alice come in *wo days; they start tomorrow morning; she have her English class this evening; you see your parents on Friday evening I have something to tell you. ' What is it? I'm going to London next summer. Prompts: France; Italy; Germany; Rome; Warsaw; Washington

//. Answer the questions:

What are you doing tonight? What are you doing tomorrow? What are you doing this weekend? What are you doing after your English class today1 Are you going to the theatre tonight? Are you meeting your friend on Saturday? Are you having a meeting today? ///. Tomorrow is Saturday. This is John's daily programme for tomorrow: 1. 9 o'clock meet his cousin Lucy; 2. 10 o'clock go to the pictures together; 3. 12 o'clock have lunch; 4. 3 o'clock play volley-ball in the park; 5. 6 o'clock go to a discotheque IV. What is your daily programme for tomorrow? V. Read the dialogues. Learn them. Make up similar dialogues using the prompts: 1. Is Tom going to play chess this evening? No, he isn't. What is he going to do? He's going to watch TV. Prompts: you repair your car study English; Lucy play tennis cook; Kate type write her article; you cook read 2. Where are you going to have dinner? At the canteen. Prompts: spend your holidays in the mountains; rest at the seaside; have supper at home; spend the weekend in the country 3. When are they going to start? In three days. Prompts: Peter leave in a week; you come back on Friday; Helen take her exam next week; youtype the documents tomorrow morning :4. Who's going to wash the car? Me. When are you going to do it? Right away. Prompts: make dinner; type the article; wash up; fix the sink; send the letters; phone Lucy 5. How are you going to spend the weekend? I'm going to the country. Prompts: Jack go to a party; you visit my parents; Alice do some shopping; they receive guests. 6 I'd like to know whether Mary is going to take me to the pictures. Go and ask her. Prompts: Victor repair my bike; Lucy take part in the picnic; Bob and Mary come; she invite Peter 7. John is doing his homework. What is he going to do next? He's going to listen to the news. Prompts: Mike have a shower have supper, Helen study German now watch television; the children play football do their homework. 8. Is Mary drawing? No, she isn't. She is only going to. Prompts: you type; Victor repair the car; John do his exercises; Susan eat; Mary wash up 9. Is Steve going to be a pilot or a sailor? He's going to be a sailor. Prompts: your daughter a teacher or a doctor; your son a driver or a photographer; Philip an architect or an engineer; Jane a singer or a dancer 10. Tom is not going to play cards, is he? No, he isn't. Prompts: you be present; Kate come; Dick write the test; Betty play chess VI. Say what you or your group-mates are going to do: Victor, open your notebook; write an English sentence in your notebook; close your notebook; give the notebook to your friend; take it back; read text 5; translate the text; open your bag; take something out of your bag; put it on the desk VII. Answer the questions: What are you going to do after your English class? Where are you going to have supper? Are you going to watch TV tonight? You are not going to the pictures today, are you? What is your wife (sister, etc.) going to do tomorrow? Where are you going to rest in summer? When are you going to visit your friend? Are you going to MOSCOW this month? Where are you going to spend this weekend? What are you going to do on the weekend?

VIII. Say what you are going to do after the lesson/in the evening/'tomorrow/tonight/ on Sunday/ in summer. Say what your wife (husband, son, brother, etc.) is going to do today/ on Saturday/ next week. IX- Ask your friend about his (her) plans for tomorrow/tonight/this weekend/next week. Use the construction "to be

going + to infinitive". X. Miss Green is a typist. Say what she is going to do tomorrow. 1. 9 o'clock" come to the office 2. from 9 to 11 type some documents 3. 11 o'clock take the documents to her boss 4. 11.30 have lunch 5. 12 o'clock start typing again 6. 5 o'clock finish work 7. 6 o'clock play tennis in the park 8. from 8 to 9 write some letters to her friends 9. from 9 to 10 watch television 10. from 10 to 11 read an interesting book 11. 11 o'clock listen to the news

Fluency /. Listen to the text, ask and answer questions: Tom and Susan are going to give a party this evening. A lot of people are going to come. The party is going to start at 8.30 so the first guests are going to come any minute. "When are you going to take off that apron?" Tom wants to know. "In a minute", is Susan's answer. //. Listen to the conversations. Role-play the conversations. 1- Tom: Would you like to come to a party? Lucy: Well, I'd like to ... but when is it? Tom: On Saturday evening. Lucy: What a pity! I'm busy on Saturday. Tom: What are you doing? Lucy: I'm doing my homework. Tom: Really! ... Another time perhaps? Lucy: Yes, thanks anyway. 2- George: What are you doing this weekend?
Harry: I'm going away. George: Oh, where are you going? Harry: I'm going to London. George: How long for? Harry: Just for two days. 3. Fred: You're working hard, George. What are you doing? George: I'm making a bookcase. Give me that hammer please, Fred. Fred: Which hammer? This one? George: No, not that one. The big one. Fred: Here you are. George: Thanks, Fred. Fred: What are you going to do now, George? George: I'm going to paint it. Fred: What colour are you going to paint it? George: I'm going to paint it pink. Fred: Pink? George: This bookcase isn't for me. It's for my daughter, Susan. Pink's her favourite colour. 4. John: What are you going to do with that vase, Mary? Mary: I'm going to put it on the radio, John. John: Don't do that. Give it to me. Mary: What are you going to do with it? John: I'm going to put it here, in front of the window. Mary: Be careful! Don't drop it! Don't put it there, John. Put it here, on this shelf. John: There we are! It's a lovely vase. Mary: Those flowers are lovely, too. ///.. Situation I: Your friend is inviting you on a picnic for the weekend, but you can't. You've got some other arrangements. Situation 2: Tomorrow is Sunday. Your friend and you are discussing plans for your day off.
Review

/. Listen to the text "Getting Ready" and answer the questions: Mrs. Forest is having a tea-party today. A lot of women are coming to tea with her this afternoon. They are coming from Brim-stead. They are some of the members of the Brimstead Women's Institute. Marian is the Secretary of the Institute and a very good secretary, too. She is getting the house ready for them: cleaning the rooms, putting the chairs and tables in their right places, opening and shutting windows, moving mats and curtains, dusting cupboards and putting out vases. Richard is helping his mother. He is moving the heavy chairs, she is moving the light ones. "How many people are coming, Mot-her" "Oh, dozens and dozens. Look at the list. I have it here somewhere." Stella, Mrs. Forest's daughter, is in the kitchen. She is making a cake. The Forests are very busy at the moment. They are expecting guests for tea today. Questions: Why is Mrs. Forest so busy? Who is coming to Mrs. Forest's party? How is Mrs. Forest getting the house ready for the party? Who is helping Mrs. Forest in her preparations for the party? What is Richard doing? What is Stella doing? //. Tell about Mrs. Forest's preparations for the party. III. Listen to the text "The Tea-party", ask and answer questions. The Forests' sitting-room looks very nice. It is clean and tidy and there are bunches of pretty flowers in all the vases. The room is full of people. But some of the women on Marian's list are not coming to her tea-party. One of them is

not very well; the husband of another is ill; two or three are busy; some are going to London for the day. But there are a lot of women at Marian-'s sitting-room. There is a lot of noise. They are all talking and they are not talking quietly. The women are eating biscuits and cakes and drinking their tea. The cakes are tasty and all the guests are enjoying the meal. It is 8 o'clock. The guests are leaving the house. They are saying good-bye and thanking the hostess for a pleasant party. IV. Tell about Mrs. Forest's tea-party. " V. Listen to the text "Arthur is Very Angry". It's late at night. Arthur is sitting in his bed and he's looking at his clock. His neighbours are making a lot of noise and Arthur is very angry. The people in Apartment 2 are dancing. The man in Apartment 3 is vacuuming the carpet in his living-room. The woman in Apartment 4 is practising the violin. The teenagers in Apartment 5 are listening to loud rock music. The dog in apartment 6 is barking. And the people in apartment 7 are having a big argument. It's very late and Arthur is tired and angry. What a terrible night! VI. Ask and answer questions on the text. Retell the text. VII. Describe some pictures. Do it both in writing and orally.

Self check /. Use the proper forms of the verbs: Paul: Where (be) Kitty, Jane? Jane: She (be) in the kitchen Paul: What she (do) there? Jane: She (make) a cake. Paul: Johnny (be) still at school? Jane: No, he (be, not). He (be) in the park with some of his friends. Paul: What they (do) there? Jane: They (play) football. Paul: When he (come back)? Jane: At 4 o'clock. Paul: And what you (do)? Jane: I (write) a letter to my friend Lucy Grey. Paul: She (be going) to visit us this summer? Jane: No, she (be, not). Lucy and her husband (go) to Italy for their holidays this year. //. Ask all possible questions about the following sentences 1. The students are going to write a dictation. 2. She is going to send a letter to her mother. 3. The Browns are leaving on Monday 4. Betty is not coming to the party. 5. Mike is waiting for Lucy at the bus-stop. ///. Use the proper prepositions: 1. What are you looking ...? 2. Who is she talking ...? 3. You are waiting ... Kate, aren't you? 4. What are they talking ...? 5. Who is he writing ...? 6. What are you thinking ...? 7. What is she listening ...? 8. Who are they travelling ...? IV. Translate into English: 1. ?' . . 2. . 3. ? . ? . 4. ? . 5. ? . . 6. . . 7. . UNIT 10
GRAMMAR: Indefinite Pronouns SOMETHING, ANYTHING, NOTHING, SOMEBODY, ANYBODY, NOBODY, FEW, A FEW, LITTLE, A LITTLE, MANY, MUCH, A LOT OF

Illustrative Situations /. Listen and imitate: 1 There is something on the table. _ What is it? A bottle. There is something in the bottle. What is it? It's water. 2. I've got something in my hand. What is it? It's a packet. 3. There isn't anything in the cupboard. It's empty. 4. There isn't anything in this bottle. I'm thirsty. 5. What have you got in your hand5 I haven't got anything in my hand, or I've got nothing in my hand.

6. What is he doing? Nothing. He isn't doing anything. 7. What are they drinking? Nothing. They aren't drinking anything. 8. Richard: Are you doing anything this afternoon? His friend: No, nothing. Richard: Let's go to the football match. Have you got any money? His friend: Not much. 9. Somebody is talking in the corridor. 10. Is anybody talking? Nobody is talking. 11. Who is talking? Nobody. 12. I'm helping somebody. Are you helping anybody? 13. She isn't helping anybody. Who are you helping? Nobody. 14. Stella: There is somebody in the other room. Richard: No, there isn't anybody in that room. Stella: Yes, there is. Somebody is moving round the room. Go and see. (Richard goes out. Then he comes back again.) Stella: Well, who is it? Who is in the other room.'' Richard: The room's empty. There isn't anybody there. But the window is open, and the wind is blowing. 15. Freddy: Where's my screw-driver? It's somewhere in this room, I know. Marian: No, it isn't anywhere in here. Freddy: And is my hammer anywhere in the house? Marian: No, nowhere. 16. Has Mr. West many books' Yes, he has a lot of books. How many books has Mr. West? He has about two thousand books. 17. Has Mr. Green many books? No, he has not many books. He has only a few. How many books has Mr Green? He has about fifty books. 18. Has Tom much money' No, Tom has not much money. He has only a little money. How much money has Tom? He has about five shillings Has Tom's father much money? Yes, Tom's father has a lot of money. How much money has he? He has about five hundred pounds. (500) 19. Have we much sugar? Yes, we have a lot of sugar. We have about eleven pounds (II Ib). How much tea have we? We have not much tea. We have only a pound and a half (ly) 20. There are few flowers in my garden. There are a few flowers in my garden. 21. I have little time today. I have a little time today. 22. There are too many mistakes in your exercises. You have so much fruit in your garden.

Practice
/. Make up your own dialogues. Use the prompts: e.g. There is something on the plate, (cheese) I think it's cheese. Prompts: on the shelf tea; in the bookcase my dictionary; on the desk your umbrella; on the bed my book; under the bed Kitty's ball e.g Is there anything in the bag' Yes, there are some pencils there. Prompts: in the cupboard napkins; in the suitcase shirts; on the balcony chairs; on the desk newspapers; on the wall pictures e.g. There is nothing on the desk. That's right. There isn't anything here. Prompts: in the bag; in the cupboard; on the radio-set; in the bookcase; in the fridge; on the shelf; in the drawer e.g. There is somebody in the office. I think it's Mr. Hanson. Prompts: in the classroom Miss Black; in the corridor our teacher; in the library Mary, in room 24 Peter; in the dining-room Mrs. Baxter; in the garden Mike e g. Is there anybody in the classroom? No, there is nobody there. Prompts: in the English study; in the office; in the yard; in the corridor; in room 46; in the street; in the laboratory e.g. There is nobody in the room. That's right. There isn't anybody there. Prompts: in the laboratory; in the library; in the sitting-room; in room 34; in the dining-room; in the study; in the garden; in the kitchen; in the hall; in the bedroom e.g. Have you got anything in your bag? No, I have nothing there. Prompts: in your suitcase; in your hand; in your basket; in your fridge; on your balcony //. Extend the statements. Do it as in the example: e.g. There is something in the basket, (in the box) There is something in the basket, but there isn't anything in the box.

1. There is something in the bookcase, (in the cupboard). 2. There is something in the fridge, (on the table) 3. There is something in the bag. (in the suitcase) 4. There is something on the wall, (on the floor) 5. There is something in the bottle, (in the jar) e.g. There is somebody in the kitchen, (in the living-room) There is somebody in the kitchen, but there isn't anybody in the living-room. 1. There is somebody in the yard, (in the street) 2. There is somebody in room 12. (in room 13) 3. There is somebody in the laboratory (in the classroom) 4. There is somebody in the corridor, (in the study) 5. There is somebody in the garden, (in the yard) ///. Ask disjunctive questions. Do it as in the examples: e.g. There is something on the shelf, isn't there? Yes, there is a vase there. e.g. There isn't anything in the cupboard, is there? Yes, there is a cup there. e.g. There is somebody in the study, isn't there? No, there is nobody there. e.g. There isn't anybody in the laboratory, is there? Yes, there are some students there. e.g. You've got something in your hand, haven't you? No, I haven't got anything. IV. Make up dialogues as in the examples: e.g. Have you got many stamps? Yes, I've got a lot of stamps. Prompts: Dick books; you dictionaries; Mary mistakes; John records; she relatives; you friends; you cousins e.g. Is there much light in your study? Yes, there is a lot of light in it. Prompts: sugar/in the sugar-bowl; tea/in the tea-pot; water/in the well; wine/in the bottle; ice-cream/in the freezer; butter on the dish e.g. Are there many oranges in the box? Yes, there are a lot of oranges there. Prompts: fruit-trees/in the garden; cups/in the cupboard, books in the bookcase; notebooks/on the desk; newspapers/on the shelf; students/in your group; children/in the park; people/in the room; students/in the hall e.g. Have you got much money? Not much. (= I haven't got much.) Prompts: time; work; food; chocolate; wine; sugar; bread e.g. Are there many hotels in your town? Not many. (= There aren't many.) Prompts: shops; offices; bars; banks; schools; cinemas; parks; clubs e.g. There are some hamburgers in the fridge. How many are there? There are a lot. Prompts: eggs; apples; tomatoes; bananas; pears; lemons; oranges e.g. There is some butter in the fridge. How much is there? There's a lot. Prompts: meat; ice-cream; fish; butter; cheese; milk; sausage; cream e.g. Jack hasn't got many friends, has he? Yes, he has. He has very many friends. Prompts: Kate French books; they relatives; John stamps; Betty dresses; you notebooks; Lucy mistakes e.g. He hasn't got much money, has he? Yes, he's got very much money. Prompts: you coffee; she work; he free time; you bread V. Make questions with "How much" or "How many" (...have you got?) e.g. chocolate. How much chocolate have you got? Prompts: pieces of chocolate; bread; sandwiches; bacon; wine; , ^[es of beer; children; tobacco; cigars; glasses; butter; money; time yj. Make negative sentences with either "not much" or "not many"e e people/in the hall. There aren't many people in the hall. Prompts: trees in the garden; coffee in the box; books in the bookcase; eggs in the fridge; butter on the dish; children in the park; students in the room; pictures on the walls; sugar in the packet; cups in the cupboard; apples in the basket VII. Make up dialogues. Use "a little" or "a few": e.g. Are there many benches in the park?

 There are only a few. e.g. Is there much butter in the fridge? There is only a little. Prompts: people at the meeting; students in the classroom; children at the river; work in the garden; money in the purse; pictures in the book; fish in this lake; rice in the packet; sweets in the vase; ice in the fridge; tea in the tea-pot; books in the bookcase; water in the well; ink in your pen; cars in the streets; ice-cream in the freezer e.g. Can you give me some envelopes? Yes, certainly. I have a few. e.g. Can you lend me some butter? Certainly. I have a little. Prompts: stamps; notebooks; paper; matches; chalk; wineglasses; chocolate; sugar; cigarettes; coffee; records e -g. Can you give me some pencils? I'm sorry but I can't. I have very few (pencils). e-g- Can you lend me some money? Sorry but I can't. I have very little (money). Prompts: tea; envelopes; notebooks; butter; apples; flour; bread; sweets; cigarettes; oranges VIII. Respond. Use either "a few" or "a little": e -S- There are no sweets in that box. Why, there are a few sweets there. You may take some. 1- There are no apples in the basket. 2. There is no money in the Purse. 3. There are no cups in the cupboard. 4. There are no cigarettes in the box. 5. There's no bacon in the fridge. 6. There are no notebooks in the drawer. 7. There's no salt in the packet. 8. There are no records on the desk 9. There's no paper on the shelf. 10. There are no magazines in the bookcase. IX. Paraphrase the following sentences. Use either "little" or "few": e.g. There aren't many flowers in the park. There are few flowers in the park. 1. There aren't many apple trees in my garden. 2. There isn't much bread in the shop. 3. There isn't much water in the well 4. There aren't many books in the library. 5. There isn't much fish in the lake this season. 6. There isn't much money in the handbag. 7. There aren't many berries in the forest this summer 8. There isn't much tea in the packet. 9. There aren't many records in her collection. 10. There isn't much wine in the bottle.

Fluency
/. Listen to the text. This is Anna's letter about her new apartment to her friend Lily. Dear Lily! I've got a new apartment and I'm very busy. First I'm cleaning the apartment. Maria is helping me. She's very friendly, but she's not very hard-working. She's very talkative. We aren't doing much work. The apartment is small. There isn't much space, but there is a lot of noise. The neighbours are very loud. There are a few windows, so there is some light. But there is a little dirt on the windows We are going to clean them. There are some chairs and a few small tables. There's no sofa, there are a lot of books in the living-room and some books in the bedroom. There are even a few books in the kitchen. But there isn't much food. There aren't many plates or glasses. There are no knives or forks. I'm happy (pleased) with the apartment, but I'm very tired. Please, write. Love Anna Questions: What is Anna's news? Who is helping her to clean the apartment? What is Maria like? They aren't doing much work, are they? What is the apartment like? Are the neighbours quiet or loud? Is the room light? What's there on the windows? What furniture is there in the room? Are there many books in the apartment? What cutlery has the apartment got? Is Anna pleased with her new apartment? //. Tell about Maria's new apartment, (your own apartment) III. Listen to the text: There is a small demonstration in a London park. There are some demonstrators and some policemen in the park, but only a few. There are not any soldiers, but there are a few tourists. There are also some reporters there; in fact there are quite a few. There ~re also some birds in the trees, but they are not very interested in the demonstration. Questions: What's there in a London park? Are there many policemen in the park? Who else is there in the park? IV. Say what is going on in a London park. V. Listen to the text, ask and answer questions on the text: Susan is going to bake a cake. She has some eggs, butter, sugar and milk. She is going to use only a few eggs and a little butter. She is going to use a lot of sugar. She hasn't got any chocolate. She is going to buy some. It is going to be a chocolate cake. Questions: What is Susan going to bake? What has she got? What is she going to use to make a cake? Are you going to make a pie or a cake this weekend? What are you going to use? VI. Listen to the text: This is a shop. It is a baker's shop. This is bread. There is a lot of bread here. Some of the bread is white and some of it is brown. There is white bread and brown bread. The bread is on a large table. What is there on this tray? There is a plate. What is there on the plate? There is some bread. Is there a lot of bread on the plate? No, there is not much bread on the plate. There is a small dish on the tray, too. It is a butter dish. There is only a little butter on the dish. There is not a lot of butter on it. This is a purse. Is it full or empty? It is empty. Is there any money on the table? Yes, there is some money on the

table. Is there much money on the table? No, there is not much money on the table. There is only a little. Look at this picture. Is there a purse in this picture? No, there is not. Is there any money in this picture? Yes, there is a large amount of money in this picture. There is a lot of money. There is a large number of banknotes. This is a box. It is a square box. Is it empty? No, it is not empty; there is some chalk in it. Is there a lot of chalk in the box? No, there are only a few pieces of chalk in the box. There are five or six pieces of chalk in it. Here is another box of chalk. Is this box empty? No, this box is full There is a lot of chalk in this box. There are about seventy pieces of chalk in this box. Is all the chalk in the box? No, one piece is not in the box. These are glasses. One of the glasses has water in it. This glass is quite full. One of the glasses has beer in it. This glass is half empty. The third glass has some wine in it. There is not much wine in this glass. The glass is nearly empty. Look at this picture. Are there many books on these shelves? No, there are not many. There are only a few books. There are only six. VII. Read the text. Ask and answer questions. VIII. Listen to the conversation: Jill: How many eggs are there (in the fridge), Steve? Steve: A lot. But there aren't any apples and there are only a few tomatoes. Jill: And milk? How much is there? Steve: There's a lot of milk, but there isn't much butter. There isn't any cream and we've got too little ice-cream. There's a lot of orange juice but there isn't much beer. There are only a few bars of chocolate. And buy some biscuits, please and some more of that lovely chocolate cake. IX. Read and role-play the conversation. X. Situation: You and your husband (wife, mother, etc.) are making a shopping list. XI. Listen to the conversation: Steve: How many students are there in your class? Jill: There are fourteen altogether. Steve: Are there any students from Venezuella? Jill: No, there aren't from Venezuella. Not in my class. Steve: Oh, I'm surprised. There are usually students from Venezuella. Jill: There are some from Asia. There is a student from Japan. And there is a student from China, too. Steve: And is there a student from Thailand this time? Jill: No, there isn't. But there is one from Mexico. Steve: But I expect there are some Dutch students. Jill: No, there aren't. But there is one from Brazil. Steve: Is there a student from Sweden? Jill: Yes, there is. She's a very pretty girl! But she's married, Steve, and you are, too! XII. Ask and answer questions. Role-play the conversation. XIIL Imagine you are a teacher at a language school. Answer your friend's questions about your students.

Self check /. Fill in the gaps with proper indefinite pronouns: a) something, anything, nothing, somebody, anybody, nobody 1. There is ... in the bag. 2. There isn't... in the room. 3. Give me ... to read. 4. Has ... got a red pencil? 5. Is there ... new? 6. I can see at the window. Who is that? 7. ... can answer this question. It's too difficult. 8. Where is the book? It's on the table. But there is ... there. 9. Is ... absent today? b) a lot of, many, much, few, a few, little, a little 1. Hurry up! We have very ... time. 2. Don't make so ... noise. The child is sleeping. 3. There are ... tape-recorders in this lab. but very ... TVsets. 4. Is there...or ... snow in England in winter? 5. Are there ... mistakes in my dictation? No, your dictation is very good. 6. Are there ... or ... pictures in this book? Only... 7. There is still... sugar in my tea. May I ask you for some more sugar? 8. Can you describe the situation in ...words? 9. We haven't got ... pear-trees in our garden, but there are ... apple-trees there. 10. How ... water is there in the tea-pot? Very ... . 11. We haven't got... work today. We can go to the cinema. 12. Dick is a sociable man and he has ... friends. 13. Why are there so ... children in the street? It's very late. 14. How ... students are there in your group? //. Translate into English: 1. ? , , -. 2. ? , . . 3. . 4. - . 5. . 6. ? . . 7. . 8. - . 9. - ? 10. ? 11. . 12. . 13. . 14. ? , . 15. . 16. . 17. - . 18. . 19. . 20. . . 21 , . 22. . 23. . 24. . 25. .

26. ? 27 . 28. . .

U N IT 11
GRAMMAR: MODAL VERBS. CAN (ABILITY, POSSIBILITY, PERMISSION). MAY (PERMISSION). MUST (OBLIGATION)

Illustrative Situations /. Listen and imitate: 1. Dick and Peter are fond of sports. Dick can play tennis, volleyball and golf. Peter can't play golf, but he can play cricket, (can ability) Questions: General: Can Dick play volley-ball? Yes, he can. Can Peter play golf? No, he can't. Special: What games can the boys play? Which of the boys can play golf? Who can play cricket? Alternative: Can Peter play golf or cricket? Disjunctive; Dick can play golf, can't he? Yes, he can. Peter can't play golf, can he? No, he can't. Dick can't play tennis, can he? Yes, he can. 2. There is nobody in room 35. You can work there, (possibility) 3 It's too dark. I can't see anything. 4. Can I use your typewriter? Yes, certainly./Of course you can. (can permission) 5. Can I take your textbook? I'm afraid you can't. I'm going to do some exercises. 6. Can I park here? I'm not sure. 7. Can I stop here? Certainly not./Of course not. 8. May I ask you a question? Yes, you may. (may permission) 9. May I take your pen? Do, please. 10. May I come in? Yes, of course/certainly. 11. May I smoke here? I'm afraid not. 12. May I cross the street now? No, you mustn't. There is a red light shining. 13. Must I come on Monday morning? Yes, you must, (must obligation) 14. Must I do this exercise in writing? No, you needn't. You may do it orally. 15. I think Mary is a clever girl. __ Can she dance? __ Of course, she can and she can cook as well. And she is clever, I agree, jg __ Can you write short-hand? __ No, I can't. __ And can you ride a horse? No, I can't, but I can dance. 17 Is Harry going to play tennis this afternoon? I'm afraid not. Why not? Because he can't play tennis. jg. Are you going to watch television tonight? I'm sorry, I can't. I haven't the time. What are you going to do? I have some typing to do. 19. May I use your typewriter, please? Yes, you may. And can Jack borrow your bike? No, he can't. 20. I must say good-bye to you now. Can't you stay a little longer? I'm afraid I can't. I must do some work at home. What a pity, good-bye. 21. Peggy is coming to see us today. When? This afternoon. Then I must go and meet her at the station. 22. I am going fishing this afternoon. Can Susan come with me?

 No, she can't. Why not? Because she must stay at home and cook the dinner. 23. Bill is very athletic. He can swim very well. So can Jack. Yes, they are both very good at sports. 24. I can't play tennis. Neither can I, but I can play basketball. So can I.

Practice /. Express agreement. Do it as in the example: e -g- Helen is a good pianist. You are right. She can play the piano well. 1. Jack is a good jumper. 2. My brother is a good swimmer. 3. Robert is a good skater. 4. Mrs. Brown is a good singer. 5. Alec is a good dancer. 6. Mike is a good football player. 7. Mr. Smith is a good teacher. 8. He is a good chess player. 9. Mrs. Green is a good cook. 10. Miss Smith is a good typist. 11. Mr. Brown is a good painter. //. Respond to the following questions: e.g. Can you swim and dive? 1 can swim but I can't dive. 1. Can you knit and sew? 2. Can the baby walk and run? 3. Can she dance and sing? 4. Can he read and write? 5. Can you draw and paint? 6. Can you ski and skate? 7. Can you type and take shorthand? 8. Can you play tennis and cricket? 9. Can you understand and speak English? 10. Can you make biscuits and cakes? 11. Can you play cards and do card tricks? ///. Ask for additional information: e.g. I can't play cricket, (what games) What games can you play? 1. You can't take all these books, (which books) 2. She can't finish the work tonight, (when) 3. You can't keep the book long, (how long) 4.1 can't visit Peter tonight, (when) 5. We can't stay at this hotel, (where) 6. He can't help me. (why) 7. Betty can't speak Spanish, (who) IV. Give true answers to the following questions: 1. You can't play tennis, can you? 2. Can you ski? 3. You can skate, can't you? 4. Can you play the piano? 5. Can you visit me tomorrow? 6. Can you translate a French text for me? 7. Can you help me with my English? 8. You can dance well, can't you? 9. Can you type some letters for me? 10. Can you buy a ticket for me? 11. Can you speak Bulgarian? V. Respond expressing solidarity: e.g. Kate can type. (Betsy) So can Betsy. e.g. Alice can't type. (Lucy) Neither can Lucy. 1. Robert can dive. (Jack) 2. Alec can't dance. (Nick) 3. I can drive a car. (my brother) 4. Mike can't draw. (Jane) 5. We can ski (we) 6. She can't cook, (her husband) 7. I can swim well. (Peter) 8. Donald can speak Chinese. (Victor) 9. Dick can't play chess (his father) 10. She can't help me. (I) II. I can visit her today. (Ma ry) 12. Kitty can't read. (Johnny) 13. I can't play the piano. (I)
74

VI. Respond expressing surprise: e.g. I can't swim. Can't you? e.g. Mike can swim well. Can he? 1. I can play poker. 2. I can't dance. 3. I can take shorthand. 4. I can't cook. 5. I can do card tricks. 6. I can't sew. 7. I can drive. 8. I can stand on my head and walk on my hands. 9. I can dive. VII. Ask and give permission: e.g. May I go out for a moment, please? Yes, you may./Yes, please/Please, do/Certainly. Prompts: open the window; listen to the record; switch on the radio-set; go home; borrow your pen, talk with you; come in; ask you a question; use your phone; keep the book VIII. Ask and deny permission: e.g. May I smoke here? Please, don't/I'm afraid not/No, you mustn't. Prompts: use your car; close the door; borrow your umbrella; go out; switch on the TVset; take your dictionary; cross the street now; buy an ice-cream; leave now; take your exercise-book /". Respond using the modal verb "must" to express obligation: e.g. The suit is nice, (buy) You must buy it. 1. Bill is ill. (visit) 2. Jane is very busy, (help) 3. It's 8.40. (go to school) 4. It's 12 o'clock, (have lunch) 5. It's late, (go to bed) 6. You are tired, (have a rest) 7. The book is interesting, (read) 8. The train is leaving in half an hour, (take a taxi) 9. It's 7 o'clock already, (get up) e.g. You've got a temperature, (go out) You mustn't go out. 1. It's too cold, (stay out long) 2. He is very busy now. (speak to him). 3. There is a child in the room, (smoke) 4. It's

Peter's textbook, (take) 5. You have much homework for tomorrow, (watch TV) 6. Betty can do this work herself, (help) 7. You are tired, (work hard) X. Give short answers to the following questions: e.g. Must I help him? Yes, you must./No, you needn't. 1. Must I wait for you? 2. Must I copy the text? 3. Must we go there today? 4. Must I send them a telex? 5. Must I type the docu merits3 6. Must I come at 5 sharp? 7 Must 1 do this work myself5 8. Must I phone the manager? 9 Must we take a tent with us3 10 Must we start at once? 11. Must I be present at the meeting3 XI. Ask general questions: eg. Mary is coming tonight, (meet) Must I meet her? 1. It's 9o'clock. (start) 2. Jack is late, (wait) 3. There's no bread at home, (go to the baker's) 4 The windows are dirty, (wash) 5 The Browns are coming to dinner, (make a cake) 6. We've got too little food, (buy) 7. Alec is very busy, (help) XII. Ask special questions: e.g We must meet at 8. (where) Where must you meet? 1. 1 must take my test soon, (when) 2 He must work hard now. (why) 3. He must come to the plant (when) 4. I must get up early, (why) 5. We must do something about these letters (what). 6. You must go to work on Saturday, (why) 7. We must leave, (why) 8 We must finish the work soon, (when) 9. Somebody must help him with the car. (who) XIII. Make up dialogues: e.g. Let's visit Jane I'm afraid I can't. I must help mother about the house Prompts- Peter-fix the radio-set; Mary do my homework, Bob help my sister with maths; George translate an article, Mary cook dinner; Jack finish my work; Helen do some typing e.g. We must start at 6, mustn't we? No, we needn't. We may start at 9. Prompts: do this work today tomorrow; leave at 8 at 10; get up at 6 at 8; come at 10 at 11 e.g. Excuse me, Pat. Have you got a phone, please? Yes, I have. May I use it for a moment, please? Yes, of course/Not at the moment, I'm afraid. Prompts: a knife; a fork; a comb; a dictionary; a spoon; a tnap; a typewriter; a piece of chalk eg. Is there any coffee, please? Yes, there is. May I have some, please3 Here you are. Prompts: tea; butter; cheese; milk; peas; beans; apples; chips g You can speak Chinese, can't you? __ Yes, I can. __ You can't speak Spanish, can you? No, I can't. Prompts: play the piano play the violin; play draughts play chess; speak German speak French; type take shorthand e Excuse me, Chris. Have you got a pen, please? Yes, I have Can you lend it to me for a moment, please? Not at the moment, I'm afraid. Prompts: a pencil, a dictionary, a knife, a map, a cup e.g. Can I use your typewriter? I'm afraid not. Can I take your bike? Yes, you can. Prompts: your pen your pencil; textbook notebook; raincoat -umbrella

Fluency /. Listen to the conversations, ask and answer questions, role-play the conversations. 1. A (answering phone): 2907744. B: Hullo. May I speak to Steve, please? A: Who is it, please? B: It's his mother. A: Just a minute, please. (To C.): It's for you. C: Who is it?

A: It's your mother. 2. Jane: ... Oh, yes, my husband's wonderful! Sally: Really? Is he? Jane: Yes, he's big, strong and handsome! Sally: Well, my husband isn't very big, or very strong... but he's very intelligent. Jane: Intelligent? Sally: Yes, he can speak six languages. Jane: Can he? Which languages can he speak? Sally: He can speak French, Spanish, Italian, German, Arabic and Japanese. Jane: Oh! ... My husband's very athletic. Sally: Athletic3 Jane: Yes, he can swim, ski, play football, cricket and rugby... Sally: Can he cook? Jane: Pardon? Sally: Can your husband cook? My husband can't play sports... but he's an excellent cook. Jane: Is he? Sally: Yes, and he can sew and iron... he's a very good husband. Jane: Really? Is he English? Questions: What is Jane's husband like? What games can he play? Is Sally's husband athletic? Can he cook? What else can he do about the house? What is your husband (wife) like? What games can he/she play? Can he/she speak any foreign languages? Can he/she cook, sew and iron? 3. Helen: Can you swim? Alice: Yes, I can, but I can't dive. Helen: Can you ski? Alice: No, I can't, but Maria can Helen: Can you play tennis? Alice: I can't, but Jane can. Look, they are playing now. Perhaps, they can teach us. 4. Nurse: Good morning, Mr. Craft. Mr. Craft: Good morning, nurse. Can I see the dentist, please? Nurse: Have you an appointment? Mr. Craft: No, I haven't. Nurse: Is it urgent? Mr. Craft: Yes, it is It is very urgent. I have a terrible toothache. Nurse: Can you come at 10 a.m. on Monday April 24th? Mr. Craft: I must see the dentist now, nurse. Nurse: The dentist is very busy at the moment. Can you come at 2? Mr. Craft: That's very late. Can't the dentist see me now? Nurse:- I'm afraid, he can't, Mr. Craft. Can't you wait till this afternoon? Mr. Craft: I can wait, but my toothache can't. 5. Mary: Can you make the tea, John? John: Yes, of course, I can, Mary. John: Is there any water in this kettle? Mary: Yes, there is. John: Where's the tea, dear? Mary: It's over there, behind the tea-pot. Can you see it? John: I can see the tea-pot, but I can't see the tea. Mary: There it is! It's in front of you! John: Ah yes., I can see it now. Where are the tea-cups' Mary There are some in the cupboard. Can you find them? John: Yes. Here they are. Mary: Hurry up, John' The kettle's boiling! 6. Thomas is a student He's staying with the Taylors, an English family. Thomas: Hello, Mrs. Taylor. Can you help me? I'm doing my homework and I can't understand this word. Mrs. Taylor: Which one? Oh ... that's difficult. I can't help you now. I'm watching something... Thomas: Oh? What are you watching? Mrs. Taylor: I'm watching a cowboy film Thomas: Can Mr. Taylor help me? Mrs. Taylor: No, he can't now, Thomas. He's reading. Thomas: What's he reading? Mrs. Taylor: He's reading a magazine. Thomas: What about Kate? Mrs. Taylor: Oh, she can't help you now...she's phoning someone Thomas: Oh? Who's she phoning? Mrs. Taylor: She's phoning her boy-friend...you are asking a lot of questions tonight, Thomas! Thomas: Am I? ... Well, I'm practising my English! //. Act out the following situations: 1. Your friend and you are speaking about sports in your life. 2 Your daughter is doing her homework. She is having difficulty with maths, but neither you nor your husband can

help her at the moment.

Self check
/. Fill in the gaps with the proper modal verbs: 1. ... I have your type-writer for a week, please? I'm afraid not. I'm going to type my article. 2. ... I help you? No, you ... . The exercise is easy. 3. I ... type. I think you... learn typing. 4. ...I help Peter? Yes, you ... . He ... do the work himself. 5. .. I go out, Mum? No, you ... . It's too cold. 6. Jane ... skate. So ... Mary. 7. I ... visit Peter tonight. I'm too busy. 8. ... I use your bike? Certainly. //. Translate into English: 1. ? , . 2. . ? . 3 . . 4. ? . 5. ? , . 6. ? , . 7. . . 8. ? , . . 9. ? . U NIT 12 GRAMMAR: SIMPLE PRESENT

Illustrative Situations
7. Listen and imitate: 1. Jane's parents live in Moscow. She visits them every year. 2. I finish work early. As a rule I come home at 4. 3. We play tennis but we don't play golf. 4. Lucy speaks German but she doesn't speak French. 5. Every morning he cleans his teeth. He always cleans his teeth in the morning. 6. She gets up at 7 o'clock from Monday to Saturday, but on Sunday she gets up at II o'clock. She usually gets up at 7 o'clock. 7. They like films. They see all the new films. They often go to the cinema. 8. He's got a radio and a television. He sometimes listens to the radio, and he sometimes watches television. 9. Her brother lives in London. She doesn't. She sees him four or five times every year. She occasionally sees him. 10. He doesn't usually smoke, but at Christmas, after dinner, he has a cigar. He rarely smokes cigars. 11. She doesn't like whisky. She never drinks whisky. 12. Do you read much, Frank? Yes, I do. I'm very fond of reading. 13. Arthur is a keen footballer. Is he really? Does he play football every day? Yes, he does. 14. Do you like jazz? Not very much, I'm afraid. Do you? Yes, I do. 15. What are Jack and Judy doing this evening? They are going to the theatre. Do they go to the theatre every evening? No, they don't. 16. Do you play chess every day? No, I don't, but Jim does. Does he really? Yes, he does, he is very fond of it. 17. Where are you going to spend your summer holidays? In France. Do you usually spend your holidays in France? No,I don't. 18. What are you doing this evening, by the way? I'm going swimming. Really? Do you often go swimming? Oh, about once a week. 19. Does Susan like dancing? Yes, she does, but she prefers reading. Doesn't she find it rather boring, dull, uninteresting? I don't think so. 20. How do you usually spend your holidays? I go to Scotland. And how about your wife? Oh, she usually stays at home. 21. What time do you usually get up?

 About seven o'clock. And how about John? Oh, he never gets up before eight. 22. When do your classes begin? At nine. 23. Where do you work? At a plant. What do you do? I'm an engineer. 24. Why does Paul come home so late? He is very busy at his office. 25. Who cooks your meals? My daughter does. 26. Which of you speaks Italian? Helen does. 27. I am looking for Alice. Are you? Yes, I want to take her to a dance. I'm sorry, I don't know where she is. 28. What do you think of space travel? I think it's very exciting. So do I, but Mary doesn't. Doesn't she? No, she thinks it rather useless. 29. I don't play cricket. Neither do I. 30. Mike is a clever fellow. He knows several foreign languages.

He speaks French, doesn't he? Yes, he does. 31. Betty doesn't want to take part in the picnic, does she? No, she doesn't. She says she's too busy. 32. You don't know Mary Smith, do you? Yes, I do. She lives next door. 33. You like detectives, don't you? Yes, I do.
AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE SENTENCES

Illustrative Texts
/. Listen to the text about Jim Morgan: Jim Morgan is a football player. He plays for Arsenal. He is 25 years old and is married. His wife's name is Sandra and she is a typist. They live in a rented flat. He drives a Rolls Royce and in his spare time he plays table tennis and listens to pop music. At home he helps with the baby. He reads the Daily Mirror. Questions: What does Jim Morgan do? How old is he? What is his wife's name? What does Sandra do? They live in a rented flat, don't they? What car does Jim drive? What does Jim do in his spare time? Does Jim help his wife with the baby? What newspaper does he read? //. Tell about Jim Morgan. III. Imagine you are Jim Morgan. Tell about yourself. IV. Tell about David Pratt and John Evens: Age 23 22 Occupation doctor engineer Wife Betsy Kate Wife's job teacher clerk House own house own flat Car Volkswagen Fiat Interests swimming golf classical music jazz Help in the house shopping washing-up Newspaper Daily Express Daily Mail V. Listen to the text about Alan's working day. Alan's a lorry driver. He's twenty-eight years old. He works five days a week. He gets up at six o'clock every day. He eats a big breakfast. He drinks two cups of tea. He leaves for work at half past six. He has lunch in a transport cafe. He comes home at five o'clock. In the evening he goes to the pub. He goes to bed at ten o'clock.

Questions: What does Alan do? How old is he? How many days a week does he work? What time does he get up? How many cups of tea does he drink? When does he leave home for work? Does he come home at five or at seven? What does he do in the evening? What time does he go to bed? VI. Say what Alan usually does on week-days. VII. Tell about these people:

Judy Peter and Paul secretary schoolboys 18 12 the office/five days a week school/five days a week 7.30 eight o'clock nothing cornflakes orange juice milk the office/8.15 school/8.45 in the canteen at school home/5.30 home/four o'clock evening classes television eleven o'clock nine o'clock VIII. Tell about yourself: What do you do? Where do you work? How many days a week do you work? What time do you usually get up? Do you eat a big breakfast? Which do you prefer for breakfast: tea or coffee? What time do you leave home for work? How do you get to work? Where do you have lunch? What time do you come home from work? What do you do in the evening? Does your mother (brother) work? What does she (he) do? What is her (his) working day like? What does your mother (brother) like to do in her (his) spare time? IX. Listen to the text "Every Weekend is Important in the Franklin Family": Every weekend is important in the Franklin family. During the week they don't have very much time together, but they spend a lot of time together on the weekend. Mr Franklin works at the shoe department during the week, but he doesn't work there on the weekend. Mrs. Franklin works at the city hospital during the week, but she doesn't work there on the weekend. Bobby and Sally Franklin go to the elementary school during the week, but they don't go there on the weekend. And the Franklin dog Rover stays home alone during the week, but he doesn't stay home alone on the weekend. On Saturday and on Sunday the Franklins spend all their time together. On Saturday morning they clean the house together. On Saturday afternoon, they work in the garden together. And on Saturday evening they sit in the living-room and watch TV together. On Sunday morning they go to church together. On Sunday afternoon they have a big dinner together. And on Sunday evening they play their musical instruments together. Questions: The Franklins are very busy on week-days, aren't they? Where does Mr. Franklin work? Does he work on the weekend, too? What does Mrs. Franklin do? And what about the children? What do the Franklins do on Saturday morning (afternoon, evening)? Where do the Franklins go on Sunday morning? What do they do on Sunday afternoon? When do they play their musical instruments? X. Read the text. XI. Complete the utterances: I. Mr. Franklin works at the shoe department during the week but... 2. Mrs. Franklin works at the city hospital during the week, but ... 3. Bobby and Sally go to the elementary school during the week, but ... 4. On Saturday morning ... 5. On Saturday evening ... 6. On Sunday afternoon ... XII. Agree or disagree: e.g. Mrs Franklin doesn't work. Yes, she does. She works at the city hospital. 1. Mr Franklin works at a factory. 2. The children don't go to school on the weekend. 3. The Franklins' ddg Rover stays home alone during the week. 4. The Franklins don't spend much time together on the weekend. 5. On Saturday morning the Franklins go to church. XIII. Say what you know about the Franklins. XIV. Say a few words about yourself: Where do you work? What do you do? Do you go to work on Saturday? What do you do on Saturday evening? Are you married? What does your wife (husband) do? Do you have any children? What do they do? Do you spend much time with your family? Say what you (the members of your family) do and what you don't do on the weekend. Practice /. Respond to the following utterances. Use the prompt words: e.g. I read "The Times". And Tom? ("The Express") Tom reads "The Express". 1. I study English. And Mary? (German) 2. I spend very little And Jack? (much) 3. Mary teaches French. And her sister? (English) 4. We live on the top floor. And Peter? (on the ground floor) 5. I visit my parents every year. And

Mike? (every month) 6. They want to study English. And Helen? (German) 7. I finish work at 7. And your sister? (at 6) e.g. Victor goes to work by bus. And his parents? (by car) His parents go to work by car. 1. I like tea. And you? (coffee) 2. We begin our work at 8. And they? (at 9) 3. They leave home at 7. And you? (at 10) 4. They spend their holidays in the country. And your parents? (in town) 5. I collect records. And you? (stamps) e.g. Jack works hard. And his brother? His brother doesn't work hard. 1. My daughter reads much. And Peter? 2. Roger plays golf. And David? 3.1 come home late on Monday. And Helen? 4. As a rule I have dinner at home. And John? 5. I get up early. And your brother? 6. Mike swims well. And his friend? 7.1 make a lot of mistakes in my dictations. And Helen? e.g. Robert likes football. And his friends? His friends don't like football. 1. My children go to school. And Mr Brown's children? 2. We write much at our lessons. And they? 3. Alice studies French. And her sisters? 4. Jack gets up early. And his parents? 5. Tom works on Saturdays. And his co-workers? //. Paraphrase the following sentences: e.g. Tom is a good tennis player. Tom plays tennis very well. 1. Mrs Green is a very good typist. 2. My wife is a good cook. 3. Jack is a hard worker. 4. Helen is a slow reader. 5. The girls are good singers. 5. Mary is a fast runner. 6. Mr Robinson is a good speaker. 7. John and Tom are careful drivers. 8. Betty is a good student. 9. My friends are good swimmers. 10. Mr Jackson is a good writer. 11. Ann is a good skater. ///. Complete the utterances. Use the prompt words: e.g. Jack knows French ... (Italian) Jack knows French but he doesn't know Italian. 1. We write dictations ... (grammar tests). 2. They play ho- ckey ... (cricket). 3. She likes tea ... (coffee). 4. He skates well. (ski). 5. Mrs Smith teaches Spanish ... (French). 6. My friend speaks Italian ... (English). 7. We collect stamps ... (records). IV. Express your agreement with the following. Give additional information using the prompt words: e.g. You get up early, don't you? (at 7 a.m.) Yes, I do. 1 get up at 7 a.m. 1. Harry finishes work late, doesn't he? (at 9 p.m.) 2. Mr. Robinson lives in London, doesn't he? (in King Street) 3. Your brother teaches German, doesn't he? (at the University) 4. You go to work by bus, don't you? (by the 8 o'clock bus) 5. Your parents often visit you, don't they? (every week) 6. You often watch TV, don't you? (every evening) V. Express your disagreement: e.g. Mike finishes work at 5, doesn't he? (at 6) No, he doesn't. He finishes work at 6. 1. Betty likes tennis, doesn't she? (volley-ball) 2. Mrs Smith teaches Spanish, doesn't she? (Russian) 3. Mr Baxter works at a plant, doesn't he? (at an office) 4. Jack makes many mistakes in his dictations, doesn't he? (few) 5. You usually travel by air, don't you? (by train) e.g. Mary doesn't know Italian, does she? Yes, she does. She knows Italian very well. 1. Mike doesn't skate, does he? 2. Your friend doesn't drive, does he? 3. You don't work on Saturdays, do you? 4. Jack doesn't like hockey, does he? 5. They don't play cards, do they? 6. Victor doesn't smoke, does he? 7. Ann doesn't read much, does she? VI. Express solidarity with the following statements: e.g. I get up early. And Tom? Tom also gets up early, (or: Tom gets up early, too) 1. Jack works in London. And Mary?2.1 come home by bus. And Peter? 3. We start work at 9. And they? 4. I have a cold bath every morning. And you? 5. I read a lot. And Helen? 6. My brother smokes much. And you? e.g. I walk to my office. And you? So do I. 1. Ann likes pop-music. And Betty? 2. I know French. And your brother? 3. We go out in the evening. And you? 4. I spend very little. And Mary? 5. We watch football on television. And you? 6. They go away for weekends. And the Robinsons? 7. I often write to Peter. And Helen? 8. Tom collects stamps. And Jack? 9. My sister teaches English. And Lucy? 10. I sleep with the windows open. And you? 11. I want ice-cream. And you? 12. My son studies English. And your daughter? 13. The boys swim well. And what about the girls? e.g. Gemma doesn't speak French. And Lucy? Lucy doesn't speak French either. 1. I don't know him. And you? 2. Jack doesn't smoke. And his brother? 3. I don't type. And Mary? 4. Nick doesn't play cricket. And his father? 5. I don't see anything there. And you? 6. My sister doesn't read much. And your brother? e.g. I don't go to work on Saturday. And Helen? Neither does Helen. 1. I don't do morning exercises. And you? 2. Mike doesn't write to her. And Peter? 3. I don't like football. And you? 4. Henry doesn't know Italian. And Roger? 5. I never read in bed. And you? 6. Mr Green doesn't smoke. And Mr Smith? 7. Kate doesn't play the piano. And her sister? 8. The Browns don't travel much. And you? 9. I don't speak Chinese. And Alec?

VII. Give true answers to my questions: e.g. Teacher: I don't like coffee. And you? Student: I do. (in case you like coffee) Student: Neither do I. (in case you don't like coffee) Teacher: I like tea. And you? Student: I don't, (in case you don't like tea) Student: So do I. (in case you like tea). 1. My husband doesn't smoke. And yours? 2.1 walk to my office. And you? 3. I live on the top floor. And you? 4. I don't play tennis. And you? 5. I read a lot. And your wife? 6. I play the piano. And you? 7. My brother doesn't like chess. And you? 8. I don't know French. And you? 9. I collect records. And you? 10. I get up late. And you? 11. I go to work by the Underground. And you? 12. I have dinner at 3 p. m. And you? 13. My mother doesn't work. And yours? 14. My friend often phones me. And yours? 15. I don't smoke. And you? 16. I go to bed early. And you? 17. I don't dance. And you?

Fluency Steve at Work Steve Baxter: I am a journalist. I work for Daily News. The work is interesting and I enjoy it. I travel a lot. M> office is in Fleet Street. I share it with Barbara Robson. She's new and I help her. My boss is Mr Short. I like him. MrShort and my friend Harry Turner help me with difficult articles and I help them too. We are all very busy people. /. Listen to the text "Steve at Work" and answer the questions. What does Steve do? Is his work interesting? Steve travels a lot, doesn't he? Where is his office? Who does he share his office with? Who is Steve's boss? Does Steve like him? Do Steve and his colleagues help each other with difficult articles? They are all very busy people, aren't they? //. Retell the text III. a) Imagine you are Steve Baxter. Tell us about your work, b) Imagine you are Barbara Robson. Tell us about yourself and your colleagues. IV. Teacher (addressing one of the students): Mike, tell us a few words about your work: What do you do? Where do you work? Is your work interesting? Are you very busy at work? Do you often travel on business? Where is your office? Who do you share your office with5 Who is your boss? What is he like? How old is he? Do you and your colleagues help each other? V. Teacher (addressing another student): Helen, what do you know about Mike's work? And where do you work, Helen? What do you do? Do you like your work? Why/Why not?
A Very Outgoing Person

Alice is a very outgoing person. She spends a lot of time with her friends. She goes to parties. She goes to movies. And she goes to discotheques. (She is very popular). She also likes sports very much. She plays basket-ball. She plays baseball. And she plays volley-ball. (She is very athletic). Alice doesn't stay home alone very often. She doesn't read many books. She doesn't watch TV. And she doesn't listen to music. (She's very active). As you can see, Alice is a very outgoing person. /. Listen to the text "A Very Outgoing Person" and answer the questions: Is Alice a very outgoing person? Does she spend much time with her friends? Does she go out? She's popular, isn't she? Alice likes sports very much, doesn't she? What games does she play? Alice is very athletic, isn't she? She reads a lot, doesn't she? Does Alice like to watch TV? //. Tell about Alice, her likes and dislikes III. a) Imagine you are Alice's mother (father). Tell us about your daughter, b) Imagine you are Alice. Tell us about your hobbies, likes and dislikes. IV. Teacher (addressing one of the students): Helen, tell us some words about yourself. Are you outgoing? you shy? Do you like sports? What games do you play? Do you often go out? Are you fond of reading? Do you read a lot? Have you got any hobbies? V. Teacher: Mike, please, tell us some words about one of your friends: What is his/her name? What does he/she look like? Where is he/she from? What does he/she do? What is he(she) like? Is he /she shy (athletic, active, outgoing)? Does he/she play tennis? How does he/she spend his/her free time? etc.
A Naughty Boy

My son Pete is ten. He is not a diligent pupil. He doesn't like to go to school and to wake up early in the morning. He never knows his lessons and he doesn't open his books when he is at home. His books and notebooks are always dirty. Pete doesn't like to play chess. He only likes to play football. He likes to run in the streets and fight with other boys. I am very sorry that my son Pete is such a naughty boy. /. Listen to the text "A Naughty Boy" and answer the questions: What kind of boy is Pete? Is he a diligent pupil? What does he like to do and what doesn't he like to do? Have you got a son (a daughter)? How old is he (she)? Does he (she) do well at school? Has he (she) got any hobbies? What are his (her) likes and dislikes? //. 1) Say what you (your wife, children, etc) like to do and what you (your wife, children) don't like to do. 2) Say what you (your friend, etc) want to do and what you don't want to do.

3) Say what you (your son, sister, etc) do and what you don't do on Sunday.
ADVERBS OF FREQUENCY

Illustrative Text Frank and Helen Martin Go to Work Frank Martin works in a factory. Work starts at 7. Frank is never late for work. He always gets to the factory early. He is ten minutes early today. It is 6.50. Frank Martin usually drives to work. Frank's wife, Helen, works in an office. Work starts at 9 but she sometimes gets there late. The manager doesn't know about it because he is often late for work too. /. Listen to the text "Frank and Helen Martin Go to Work" and answer the questions: Where does Frank Martin work? Is he ever late for work? Frank usually walks to the factory, doesn't he? When does he get to the factory? Does Helen always come to work on time? Why doesn't her boss know she is sometimes late for work? //. Tell about Frank Martin and his wife Helen. III. Where do you work? When does work start? Are you ever late for work? And what about your colleagues? How do you get to work?

Practice
/. Respond to the following statements. Observe the position of adverbs: e.g. I sometimes dine at this cafe. And you? I always dine at this cafe. I. I sometimes do morning exercises. And you? 2. I sometimes invite Mary to my parties. And you? 3. I sometimes go out in the evening. And you? 4. I sometimes go to work on foot. And you? 5. I sometimes get up early. And you? e.g. Bill sometimes washes the dishes. No, he doesn't. He never washes the dishes. I. Mike sometimes plays golf. 2. Helen sometimes takes part in school concerts. 3. You sometimes go jogging in the park. 4. Harry sometimes smokes. 5. They usually spend their holidays in Spain. 6. Jack often visits them, e.g. Mr. Smith often drives to work, (walk) No, he doesn't. He rarely (seldom) drives to work He usually walks. I. Mrs. Baxter often drinks coffee, (tea) 2. Robert often comes home late, (early) 3. She often travels by air. (by train) 4. Peter often does his homework in the evening, (in the morning) 5. The Jacksons often go out on the weekend, (stay in) 6. They often go to the theatre, (to the cinema) e.g. Joe always walks to school. No, that's not true. Joe doesn't always walk to school Sometimes he drives. 1. Helen always gets up early, (late) 2. Betty always goes to work by bus. (by metro) 3. Harry always has dinner at a restaurant, (at a cafe) 4. They always visit her on Friday, (on Saturday) 5. You always travel by train, (by plane). e.g. Jane seldom has dinner at home. And Mary? Mary doesn't often have dinner at home either. 1. Harry seldom plays golf. And Robert? 2 We seldom watch TV. And you? 3. I seldom go out. And Jane? 4. We seldom go fishing. And Jack? 5. I seldom have dinner at home. And Mary? 6. Alice seldom stays at home on the weekend. And Lucy? //. Answer the questions. Do it as in the model. Use different adverbs of frequency: e.g. Teacher: Do you ever study in the library? Student: I . sometimes rarely , never often do always usually 1. Do you ever spend your holidays abroad? 2. Does your brother ever play tennis? 3. Does Mike ever go to the theatre? 4. Does Janet ever study at night? 5. Do you ever miss your English classes? 6. Do you ever go away on business? 7. Does your wife ever go shopping on Sunday? 8. Does your father ever go fishing? 9. Do you ever listen to the news in the morning? ///. Complete the sentences by using adverbs of frequency. Observe their position: e.g. Susan often plays chess ... (seldom, cards). Susan often plays chess but she seldom plays cards, e.g. Mike is often late ... (Peter, never). Mike is often late but Peter is never late. 1. Robert always speaks English ... (never, Italian). 2. My mother is usually at home in the evening ... (seldom, in the afternoon). 3. I don't often travel by air ... (usually, by train). 4. They are always at work at 5 ... (seldom, at 7). 5. I don't often have coffee in the evening ... (always, in the morning) 6. Betty always plays volley-ball ... (never, basketball). 7. Jill is never late for work .. (Steve, sometimes). 8. We always have our classes on week days ... (never, on the weekend). 9. It is often hot here in July ... (seldom, in September). 10. Peter is always on time ... (Tom, never). 11. He usually gets up at 7 . . (sometimes, at 9). 12. Marian often visits us... (her brother, seldom). 13. I never read in bed ... (my sister, always;. 14. She is usually in the country in summer (her parents, in town) 15 My father doesn't often dine at home (always, have breakfast) 16 This shop is always closed on Sunday (never, on Saturday) 17 We are usually free on Monday (busy, on Tuesday) 18 They are always at work at 5 (seldom, at 8)
Fluency Before Work

Jill usually gets up at a quarter to eight Steve doesn't often get up before 8 o'clock The alarm-clock wakes them They usually have coffee and toast for breakfast but they never have very much time Jill often runs for the bus, but she seldom arrives late for school Steve is sometimes late for work He often takes his toast with him to the office

Before work they are always in a hurry They don't usually say much at breakfast, they never have time1 / Listen to the text "Before Work" and answer the questions When does Jill usually get up' Steve doesn't often get up before 8 o'clock, does he' What do they usually have for breakfast' Is Steve ever late for work' And what about Jill Before work Jill and Steve are always in a hurry, aren't they' They never have much time, do they' // Read the text and say what Jill and Steve do in the morning on week days III What do you (your sister, brother, etc ) usually do in the morning (in the evening)'
After Work

Jill teaches five hours a day, twenty-five hours a week altogether She finishes work at about 4 o'clock in the afternoon Then she catches a bus home The buses are sometimes very full, so she takes the underground Twice a week, on Mondays and Fridays, she goes to a big supermarket She buys a lot of things there Steve leaves his office at about 6 o'clock Then he hurries home After supper Steve washes the dishes and then he reads or spends time on hobbies Jill relaxes with a book or a woman's magazine, or she sometimes watches a film on television / Listen to the text "After Work" and answer the questions How often does Jill teach' When does she finish work' How does she get home' Where does she go twice a week' When does Steve finish work' What do the Baxters do after supper' // Read the text and say what Jill and Steve do after work III Tell us some words about your daily routine When do you usually get up' What time do you have breakfast as a rule' Are you always in a hurry in the morning' When do you usually leave home for work' How do you get to work' You are never late for work, are you' Are you usually very busy at work' You don't often have dinner at home, do you' When do you usually finish work' Do you ever stay at work late' What do you do at home in the evening' IV Read the letter below and write a letter to your friend (parents, etc ) describing your daily routine Dear John, Well, this is my second week in Pans 1 like it very much I usually get up at ten o'clock and have breakfast in a street cafe French breakfasts are very small, but the coffee's not bad I always go to school by Metro I usually arrive at school at twelve o'clock I'm learning a lot of French School usually finishes at five o'clock In the evening I occasionally stay in the hotel, but I usually go out for dinner with a friend Life is very interesting here Next weekend I'm going to the coast Give my regards to everybody Love, Mary
Free Time

Steve: We don't go out during the week, but we do at the weekend We visit our friends or they visit us On Saturday evenings we go to our favourite pub On Sundays we visit our relatives in the country Jill Unfortunately we haven't got time for sports Steve Oh, yes, we have' We run for the bus every morning / Listen to the text and answer the questions Do the Baxters often go out during the week' How do they spend their weekends' Do they have much time for sports' How do you (the members of your family) spend your weekends'

Self check
/ Put the verbs into the correct forms Observe the position of adverbs A. I. Jack often (be) late. 2. Mary and John often (go) to the pictures. 3. Mike never (be) home at this time of the day. 4. Betty sometimes (phone) me. 5. They sometimes (be) at the seaside in summer. 6. Alice usually (be) at home at 9 p. m. 7. Paul often (come, not) to see us. 8. Jane always (visit) her parents in summer. 9. James often (watch, not) TV. 10. Donald (know, not) French, he (speak) Swedish. B. It (be) Saturday. It (be) 9 o'clock in the morning. Mary and James Wilson (be) home. James (be) an engineer. His wife (teach) History at school. The Wilsons (go, not) to work on the weekend. At the moment they (be) in their dining-room They (have) breakfast and (listen) to the BBC news. They always (listen) to the news at breakfast. Their son Peter (be, not) at home. He (be) at school. He (do) very well at school and his parents (be) proud of him. Peter's hobby (be) tennis. He often (play) tennis after school.

//. Translate into English: 1. . . 2. . 3. . 4. . . 5. . 6. . 7. . . 8. . 9. . 10. . , , . , . 11. . , . 12. . . 13. . . 15. - ? .

QUESTIONS

Illustrative Situations
/. Listen to the dialogues and learn them: 1. Do you often travel by air? No, I don't.

 Don't you like it? Yes, I do, but I can't afford it. 2. Is Pete a member of the Sports Club? No, he isn't. Doesn't he like sports and games? No, not particularly. 3. Miss Brown is interested in modern art. Does she go to art galleries regularly? No, she doesn't. She is too busy. 4. I need some sugar. How much do you need? Two pounds, please. 5. What kind of films do you like best? Westerns. And you? I like all sorts of films. 6. How do you come to school? By bus. How much does it cost? Only 20 p. How long does it take? About twenty minutes. 7. Is Maria Italian? Yes, I think so. Does she speak English well? No, I don't think so. Is she coming to the dance tonight? I hope so! 8. What's the matter? I've got a cold. Why don't you see a doctor? I don't know any doctors. Why don't you ask your landlady? Yes. That's a good idea. 9. Would you like to dance? Yes. Do you come here often? Sometimes. Do you live here? Yes, I do. Where do you work? In a bank. Do you like it? It's . . 0. Excuse me... Yes? Have you got any change? What do you need? I need some tens. Oh, how many do you want? Well, can you change a pound note? Yes, I think so. 11. Do you- like coffee, Mrs Price? Yes, I do. Do you want a cup? Yes, please, Mrs Young. Do you want any sugar? Yes, please. Do you want any milk? No, thank you. I don't like milk in my coffee. I like black coffee. Do you like biscuits? Yes, I do. Do you want one?

 Yes, please. Questions: What are Mrs Young and Price doing at the moment? Does Mrs Price like coffee? What coffee does she prefer? She likes biscuits, doesn't she?

Practice
/. Respond to the following statements asking for additional information. Use the prompt words: e.g. Peter knows French, (his sister) Does his sister know French? Yes, she does. (No, she doesn't) 1. Mrs. Robinson types well. (Miss Smith) 2. Mike enjoys pop-music, (you) 3. Jane watches television every day. (her husband) 4. He likes his work, (you) 5. My son goes to school, (your daughter) 6. Mary plays the piano. (Lucy) 7. I smoke much, (your father) 8. I like my tea strong, (you) 9. Alice works at an office, (her sister) 10. Peter teaches Spanish. (Victor) 11. The Browns travel a lot. (the Baxters) e.g. I speak English. (French) Do you speak French, too? Yes, I do. (No, I don't) 1. Steve listens to the radio every day. (watch television) 2. They like English tea. (English coffee) 3. Tom reads the Times, (the Guardian) 4. They speak English, (other languages) 5. I like English people, (the English weather) 6. Steve cooks Chinese tood. (Indian food) 7. We visit our friends at the weekend, (during the week) e.g. We speak English at our English lessons. (Russian) Do you ever speak Russian at the lessons? Sometimes we do. 1. Mrs Wilson often travels about the country, (abroad) 2. I often translate English texts. (French texts) 3. They usually go to the Institute in the morning, (in the evening) 4. He usually has dinner at 2. (at 4). 5. She often goes to the cinema, (theatre) 6. Mary usually spends her holiday in the country, (in town) e.g. Paul comes home late, (often) Does he often come home 4ate? Yes, he does. 1. They go for a walk in the evening, (often) 2. I go to the seaside for my holidays, (always) 3. He leaves home at 10. (always) 4. He sometimes visits me. (often) 5. They sometimes play golf, (often) e.g. Mike leaves home at 7. (you) When do you leave home? At 8 as a rule. 1. Ann usually finishes work at 5. (Fred) 2. My mother usually goes shopping on Tuesday, (you) 3. Lucy has dinner at 2. (Mary) 4. Donald comes home at 7. (his father) 5. Jane has her classes in the morning, (you) 6. My son goes to bed at 9. (your children) 7. Our classes begin at 10. (your classes) e.g. My sister lives in Moscow, (your brother) Where does your brother live? In Brest. 1. John works at a factory, (his wife) 2. Philip studies at the University, (his friend) 3. I have dinner at a restaurant (you) 4. We rest in the country, (the Browns) 5. I do my homework in the reading-room, (you) 6. Mike keeps his bicycle in the garage. (Peter) e.g. My sister studies art. (you) What do you study? Chemistry. 1. Donald collects coins, (his friend) 2. Betty likes comedies. (Helen) 3. Mrs Baxter teaches English. (Mrs Robinson) 4. I have toast and coffee for breakfast, (you) 5. I prefer fish to meat, (you) 6. Mr Smith writes poetry. (Mr Wilson) 7. Mrs Morgan types accounts. (Miss Green) e.g. Mike trains every day. (Steve) How often does Steve train? Twice a week. 1. Donald plays golf once a week, (his friend) 2. Jill phones her parents every week. (Mary) 3. I go to the pictures once a month, (you) 4. Betty has music lessons once a week. (Jane) 5. I go shopping twice a week, (your mother) 6. Victor works in the library every day. (Roger) e-g- I get to work by bus. (Mike) How does Mike get to work? By car as a rule. 1. Mrs Smith spends her weekends gardening, (your mother) 2. I pay by cheque, (you) 3. Donald does very well at school, (your son) 4. John drives carefully, (his friend) 5. Harry usually travels by air. (his wife) e.g. It usually takes me an hour to do my homework, (you) How long does it take you to do your homework? About an hour and a half. 1. It takes John half an hour to get to work, (his father) 2. Mike stays at work till 5. (Peter) 3. We walk in the park about an hour, (you) 4. We stay at the seaside for a month, (your parents) 5. My working day lasts eight hours, (your working day) e.g. It's too cold in the room, (close the window) Why don't you close the window? 1. It's 12 o'clock, (go to bed) 2. The working day is over, (go home) 3. I am free today, (go to the cinema) 4. Mary is very busy, (help her) 5. It's ten o'clock, (have breakfast) 6. Mike is absent, (phone him) e.g. I want to go to the cinema, (to the theatre)

 Who wants to go to the theatre? Peter does. 1. I like pop-music, (classical music) 2. I know Mr Smith. (Mr Brown) 3. We want to play volley-ball, (tennis) 4. Peter studies German. (French) 5. Mrs Smith teaches history, (maths) e.g. Someone phones Mary every day. Who phones her every day? e.g. She meets someone every day. Who(m) does she meet every day? 1. Someone sends her flowers every day. 2. Someone always waits for her every evening. 3. Betty goes out with someone every Saturday. 4. She loves someone. 5. Someone sends her parcels every month. 6. She talks to someone on the phone every day. 7. Someone visits her every week, e.g. I see Robert every day. (where) Where do you see him? In the library. 1. I come home late, (why) 2. Mike has supper at home, (when) 3. It doesn't take him long to get to work, (how long) 4. Mary often writes to her sister, (how often) 5. Betty usually invites a lot of guests to her parties, (whom) 6. Arthur earns a lot. (how much) 7. Jane studies at the University, (what subject) 8. We often play tennis in the evening, (where) 9. My brother smokes much, (how many cigarettes) 10. Harry doesn't come to our place.

98
/why) - I see Robert every day. (where) 12. I come here very often, (why) 13. Alec doesn't like tennis, (what games) 14. My sister studies foreign languages, (what foreign languages) 15. I want to take some books, (which books) 16. I sometimes see Mary. (how often) 17. We rest in the country, (how long) 18. This tape recorder costs a lot. (how much) 19. Victor works hard, (how many hours a day) 20. I go to the cinema. (how often) 21. I have dinner in the evening, (what time). e.g. I like tea. (strong or weak)? Do you like your tea strong or weak? I prefer my tea strong. 1. I go in for sports, (football or hockey) 2. Miss Smith delivers mail, (letters or telegrams) 3. Donald collects records, (old or modern) 4. Alice enjoys music, (pop music or classical music) 5. Henry plays tennis, (big tennis or table tennis) 6. Roger always goes to the seaside for a month, (in July or August) e.g. My sister teaches German, (at school) She teaches at school, doesn't she? Yes, she does. (No, she doesn't. She teaches at the Medical Institute.) 1. Mary often goes to the country, (on Sunday) 2. Alec lives in River Street, (with his parents) 3. John plays football, (well) 4. My son studies at the University, (maths) 5. Betty enjoys music, (jazz) 6. We usually walk in the evening, (in the park) //. Ask the speaker to repeat what he has just said: e.g. I rest in the south, (where) Pardon? (Sorry?) Where do you rest? In the south. 1. The lesson begins at 8. (when) 2. Helen speaks English well, (who) 3. Alec has dinner at two. (when) 4. I get to the office by bus. (how) 5. John works at a plant, (where) 6. I am very busy on Monday, (when) 7. Jane plays chess well, (who) 8. Robert lives in King Street, (where) 9. My sister is at the library at 9. (when) 10. I go to the pictures twice a month, (how often) 11. My son studies French, (what language) 12. Our lessons are over at-8-. (when) 13. It takes me an hour to get to work, (how long) 14. Peter earns 1000 dollars, (how much). 15. I want to use Jane's typewriter, (whose). 16. I need a dozen eggs, (how many) ///. Make questions to which the following prompts are possible answers: e.g. At the canteen. Where do you usually have dinner? At the canteen. 1. Twice a month. 2. At 7 a. m. 3. On Saturday. 4. French 5. Mary. 6. At a plant. 7. 50 pounds. 8. By bus. 9. At the seaside 10. Physics. 11. In River Street. 12. At 6 a. m. 13. At the University 14. Mary does. 15. On Sunday. 16. Every week. 17. About an hour 18. I am too busy now. 19. From 5 till 9. 20. Once a week. 20. Two pounds. IV. A. This is what Jack does every day: He gets up at 7 a. m. He eats breakfast at 7.30. He goes to work at 8. He finishes work at 5. He runs in the park at 5.30. He comes home at 7. He has supper at 7.30. He goes to bed at 11. Teacher: What does Jack do at 7? St. 1: He gets up at 7. .: When do you get up' St. 1: I get up at 8. T: Ask Helen when she gets up and then tell us what you found out. St. 1 What time do you get up, Helen? St. 2 I get up at 6.30. St. 1 She gets up at 6.30. The students take over the role of teacher and make dialogues of their own: e.g. St. 1: When does Jack eat breakfast? St. 2: He ... . B. Teacher: It takes me about an hour to get to work. Mike, how long does it take you to get to work? Mike: About half an hour.

Teacher: Ask Bob how long ... (etc.) The teacher starts giving some information about himself (herself) and the students continue like that. C. Teacher: What do you have for breakfast? Bacon and eggs? St. 1: Yes, I have bacon and eggs. What do you have? Teacher: Just a cup of coffee with toast. 1. Where do you eat? In the canteen? 2. What time do you start work? Nine? 3. What time do you finish? Six? 4. How do you come to the office? By bus? 5. What do you do in the evenings? Watch television? 6. Where do you go for your holidays? Scotland? 7 How many weeks holidays do you have? Three3 8. When do you do your homework? Just before the lesson? 9. What animals do you like best? Dogs? 10. How often do you write home? Every week? 11. How do you like your coffee? Strong? 12. What game do you play best? Tennis? 13. What do you drink? Gin? V. Respond to the following questions. Observe the direct word-order in complex sentences. e.g. Does Gemma speak French? I don't know. You ask her if (whether) she speaks French. 1. Does Ronald often see Mary? 2. Does Peter drive a car? 3. Does Ann type well? 4. Do Betty and Susan like pop music? 5. Do they work hard? 6. Does Mary often write to him? 7. Does Mike like tennis? e.g. Does Alice know Chinese? I don't know (I've no idea, I'm not sure) if (whether) she knows Chinese. Perhaps, she does. 1. Does Philip play chess? 2. Does Peter collect coins? 3. Do the Browns ever rest at the seaside? 4. Does Nick go in for sports? 5. Does Mary live in Moscow? 6. Do Helen and Ann study medicine? 7. Does Dick work at the art school? 8. Does Susan drive a car? 9. Does Miss Green type well? e.g. Where does Peter work? I don't know (I've no idea) where he works. 1. What games does Mary play? 2. When does Jack finish work? 3. Where does Helen study? 4. When does Lucy have her classes? 5. How does Jane get to work? 6. How much does John earn5 7. What subject does Mr. Robinson teach? 8. What sports does Mary go in for? 9. Where do the Whites live? 10. When does Mary see Peter? 11. What does Alec want to do? 12. How often do the boys train? 13. Who helps Lucy? 14. Why doesn't he come? 15. What sort of books does she like? e.g. Paul dines at 2. (where) I wonder (I'd like to know) where he dines. 1. Jack lives far. (where) 2. Mike comes early, (when) 3. Betty often visits her parents, (how often) 4. Roger wants to buy a dictionary, (what dictionary). 5. Lucy often misses her classes, (why) 6. Mr. Green earns a lot. (how much) 7. Mrs Baxter teaches foreign languages, (what foreign languages) VI. Make up dialogues using the prompt words. Do it as in the example: e.g. I wonder where Peter lives. I don't know I'm afraid. e.g. I'd like to know if Peter speaks Polish. I've no idea, I'm afraid. 1. Mary/know about the meeting. 2. Where/they spend their holidays. 3. How often/she/ visit her parents. 4. Dick/often/ write to her. 5. Helen /live/ far. 6. Jack /know/ Japanese. 7. Why /Lucy/ not phone us. 8. Betty/play tennis. 9. What films /Mike/ like. 10 Jane/read a lot. e.g. Do you know where Victor lives? I've no idea where he lives. 1. Where /the Browns/ rest. 2. Dick /play/ chess. 3. Mary-enjoy/detectives. 4. When /Dick/ have dinner. 5. Betty /like/ theatre. 6. Who/type her letters. 7. Who/clean the hall. 8. When /Paul/ start work. 9. Susan/listen to the 9 o'clock news 10. Roger/play cards. 11. Where/George/work. 12. When/Henry/ come home 13 Mike/smoke much. 14. Victor /speak/ Swedish Fluency Questions at Lunch Time Barbara: Do you and Jill eat at a restaurant at the weekend? Steve: Yes, we do. We know a very good Indian restaurant. We like Chinese food, too. Barbara: Do you cook at home? Steve: Yes, 1 do, but it isn't easy! Barbara: Do your friends like Chinese food? Steve: No, they don't like it very much, not my Chinese food. /. Listen to the dialogue "Questions at Lunch Time" and answer the Questions: Do Steve and Jill often eat out at the weekend? What food do they like? Is Steve a good cook? //. Role-play the dialogue. III. Teacher (addressing one of the students): Are you a good cook? What dishes do you cook best? Do you sometimes go out? What restaurant do you prefer? Is the cooking good there? What about the service? IV. Ask each other questions about your likes and dislike^ as far as food is concerned.
At the Butcher's

Butcher: Do you want any meat today, Mrs. Bird? Mrs. Bird: Yes, please. Butcher: Do you want beef or lamb? Mrs. Bird: Beef, please. Butcher: This lamb's very good. Mrs. Bird: I like Iamb, but my husband doesn't. Butcher: What about some steak? This is a nice piece.

Mrs. Bird. Give me that piece please. And a pound of mince, too Butcher: Do you want a chicken, Mrs. Bird? They're very nice. Mrs. Bird: No, thank you. My husband likes steak, but he doesn't like chicken. Butcher: To tell you the truth, Mrs. Bird, I don't like chicken, either! /. Listen to the dialogue "At the Butcher's" and answer the questions: What kind of meat does Mrs. Bird want? What else does she want? What does her husband like and dislike? //. Role-play the dialogue. 111. Act out the situation: You are having a party in a few days. At the moment you are at a shop buying the necessary things and talking to the shop-assistant.
An Interview with a Football Player

Steve: What time does your day start, Sam? Sam: Oh, that's an easy question! Never before 10 o'clock. Steve: And when do you train with the team? Sam: Five days a week. Not on Saturdays or Sundays. Steve: And how many hours do you train every week? Sam: About four hours a day. It's hard work. Steve: And how often do you travel abroad? Sam: Oh, once a month, sometimes twice a month. Steve: What do you do in your free time? Sam: I drive my sports car. I visit my girl-friends. Steve: Expensive hobbies! Er ... how much do you earn? Sam: A lot. Oh, in my free time 1 read all my fan letters of course. I get hundreds of letters a week. Steve: And do you answer all of them? Sam: I don't. I answer letters once a year at Christmas. Steve: Why do people like you? Sam: Er ... that's a difficult question. Read my fan letters. Here they are. /. Listen to the conversation "An Interview with a Football Player" and answer the questions: Does Sam get up early or late? How often does he train with the team? How many hours a day does he train? Does he often travel abroad? What are his hobbies? What does Sam do in his free time? //. Role-play the conversation. ///. Interview your friend. Ask him (her) about his (her) pastime and hobbies. Use different types of questions.
A Questionnaire

Desmond Philton works for a Market Research company. He's asking people about their free time. Desmond: Good evening, sir Mr Morns: Good evening. Desmond: I'm from Market Research Ltd. May 1 ask you some questions? Mr Norris: Yes, ... yes, all right. Desmond: Thank you ... Now, what time do you usually arrive home from work? Mr Norris: Hmm .. I usually arrive home at six o'clock Desmond: When do you usually have dinner? Mr Norris: Oh, 1 usually eat at seven o'clock, but 1 sometimes eat at eight o'clock or nine o'clock. My wife works too! Desmond. What do you usually do after dinner? Mr Norris: Well, 1 sometimes go out, but 1 usually stay at home and watch television. Desmond: How often do you go out? Mr Norris: Oh, not often .. once or twice a week. Desmond: Do you often visit your friends? Mr Norris: Yes, 1 do, quite often. I sometimes visit them, and they sometimes visit me. Desmond: Do you ever go to the cinema? Mr Norris: Oh, yes, .. yes, I do. Desmond: How often? Mr Norris: Well, I occasionally see a film ... I like horror films ... Frankestein or Dracula! Desmond: . . and the theatre? Do you ever go to the theatre? Mr Norris: Yes, I do ... but not often. I rarely go to the theatre. Desmond: Hmm ... Do you ever go to the ballet? Mr Norris: No, never I don't like ballet. Desmond: Well, thank you, Mr Norris. Mr Norris: May I ask you a question? Desmond: Yes? Mr Norris: What do you do in your free time? Desmond: I ask questions, Mr. Norris ... I never answer them. Mr Norris: Oh' /. Listen to the conversation "A Questionnaire" and ask questions about Mr Norriss daily routine // Read and then role-play the conversation. III. Act out a situation: Your friend and you are talking about your daily activities and pastime.

Self check / Put the verbs into the correct form: 1. The swimming bath (open) at 9.00 and (close) at 19.30 every day. 2. I have a car but I (use, not) it very often. 3. How many cigarettes you (smoke) a day? 4 "What you (do)?" "I'm an electrical engineer". 5 "Where your father (come) from?" "He (come) from Scotland" 6 If you need money why you (get, not) a job? 7 I (play) the piano, but I (play, not) very well 8 I (understand, not) the word "deceive". What "deceive" (mean)? 9. What time the banks

(close) in Britain? //. Translate into English: 1 ? . 2. 3. ? 4. ? 8 . 5. , . 6. ? , . 7. , . 8. , ? 9. , ?, . 10. . ? . 11. ? , . 12. ? . 13. -, ? , . 14. ? , . . 15 ? . .
SIMPLE PRESENT AND PRESENT CONTINUOUS COMPARED

Illustrative Text Chrissy Has Chicken Pox Chrissy usually goes to school on Tuesday but today is different She's staying home because she has chicken pox. She usually has breakfast at 7.00 and she walks to school with Timmy, but today she's sleeping late and she doesn't want breakfast. At 10.00 she is usually in school, but today she's watching television. She's going to the doctor at 11.00. At noontime she usually has lunch, but today she isn't hungry and doesn't want lunch. On a normal day she finishes school at 2.00 and she and Betty walk home together. Today at 2.00 she's drinking orange juice and watching TV. She almost always has her dinner at five, but today she's eating dinner at 4.00 because she's hungry. After she watches her favourite TV programme at 6.00, she sometimes does homework and then she goes to bed at 8.00. Today she's going to bed early because she's tired. /. Listen to the text "Chrissy Has Chicken Pox" and answer the questions: Why is Chrissy staying home today? When does Chrissy usually have breakfast? What is Chrissy doing at 7.00 today? Is Chrissy often at home at 10.00? When does Chrissy usually have lunch? She doesn't want lunch today, does she? When does Chrissy finish school on a normal day? What is she doing at 2 today? When does Chrissy usually have dinner? Why is she eating dinner at 4 today? What does Chrissy usually do in the evening? Why does Chrissy go to bed early today? //. Read the text and compare the use of the Simple Present and Present Continuous. III. Retell the text. Practice /. Answer the questions: 1. Do you speak French? Are you speaking French now? What language are you speaking? Does your wife (brother, etc.) speak English? 2. Do you play tennis? Are you playing tennis now? Does your friend play tennis? 3. You are answering my questions, aren't you? Do you always answer questions well? 4. Are you reading a newspaper now? Do you ever read newspapers at the lesson? 6. Are you listening to me? Do you always listen to me carefully? 7. What are you doing here? 8. Do you sing? Are you singing now? 9. Do you dance? You are not dancing now, are you? 10. Do you work hard at English? 11. Is Mike reading now? Does he read English texts well? 12. You are not doing your homework now, are you? When do you do your homework? 13. Do you smoke? Is your friend smoking now? 14. You aren't having dinner at the moment, are you? When do you have dinner? //. Respond as in the example: e.g. A: (in tones of great astonishment): Tom's making a lot of mistakes! B: But he doesn't usually make mistakes. 1. Steve's answering the telephone! 2. Paul's taking the children to school! 3. Mike's helping his wife! 4. Jack's looking after the baby! 5. Peter's walking the dog! 6. Steve's carrying his wife's basket! 7 John's cleaning the window! 8. The Baxters are spending their holidays at home! 9. They are working late! 10. The dog's sleeping on your bed! 11. Mary's driving her husband's car! e.g. A: Mike usually smokes Turkish cigarettes B: But today he's smoking French cigarettes. He usually ... 1. drives a German car; 2. travels by air; 3. lectures in Spanish; 4. reads a German paper; 5. plays Italian music; 6. drinks English beer; 7 uses an English dictionary; 8. has lunch in a Japanese restaurant; 9. listens to the news in English; 10. writes in Spanish; 11. speaks English; 12. goes to Indian films; 13. sits beside Margaret; 14. walks to his office // Make up short dialogues as in the examples: 1. - What's Kate doing at the moment? She is making lunch. Does she make lunch every day? No, she doesn't. 2. What is Mike going to do tonight? He is going to watch television. Does he watch television every night? Yes, he does. 3. Where are Jack and Mary?

 They are travelling about Italy. Do they often travel abroad? Yes, they often do. 4. Peter is playing tennis in the park. He often plays tennis, doesn't he? Yes, he does. 5. Mr. Jones doesn't usually smoke. Then why is he smoking today?

Fluency
The Sawyers (1)

The Sawyers live at 87 King Street. In the morning, Mr Sawyer goes to work and the children go to school. Their father takes them to school every day. Mrs Sawyer stays at home every day. She does the housework. She always eats her lunch at noon. In the afternoon, she usually sees her friends. They often drink tea together. In the evening, the children come home from school. They arrive home early. Mr Sawyer comes home from work. He arrives home late. At night, the children always do their homework. Then they go to bed. Mr Sawyer usually reads his newspaper but sometimes he and his wife watch television.

/. Listen to the text. Agree or disagree with the following statements based on the text: I. The Sawyers live in Queen Street. 2. Mr Sawyer doesn't go to work. 3. The children go to school. 4. Mrs Sawyer is a housewife. 5. In the afternoon Mrs Sawyer usually goes shopping. 6. Mr Sawyer doesn't come home late. 7. The children never do their homework at night. //. Listen to the text again and ask each other questions on the text. III. Imagine you are Mr (Mrs Sawyer). Tell about your daily routine. IV. Interview your friend. Ask him (her) about his/her daily routine. The Sawyers (2) It is eight o'clock. The children go to school by car every day, but today they are going to school on foot. It is ten o'clock. Mrs Sawyer usually stays at home in the morning, but this morning she is going to the shops. It is four o'clock. In the afternoon Mrs Sawyer usually drinks tea in the living-room. But this afternoon she is drinking tea in the garden. It is six o'clock. In the evening, the children usually do their homework, but this evening they are not doing their homework. At the moment they are playing in the garden. It is nine o'clock. Mr Sawyer usually reads his newspaper at night. But he's not reading his newspaper tonight. At the moment he's reading an interesting book. /. Listen to the text and ask each other questions on the text. II. Say what the Sawyers usually do and what they are doing at present. 108
A Bad Day at the Office

Mr Blaine is the president of the Acme Insurance Company. His company is very large and always very busy. Mr Blaine has a staff of energetic employees who work for him. Unfortunately all his employees are out today. Nobody is there. As a result, Mr Blaine is doing everybody's job and he's having a very bad day at the office. He's answering the telephone because the receptionist who usually answers the telephone is at the dentist's office. He's typing letters because the secretary who usually types letters is home in bed with the flue. He's operating the computer because the computer programmer who usually operates the computer is on vacation. He's even fixing the radiator because the custodian who usually fixes the radiator is on strike. Poor Mr Blaine! It's a very bad day at the Acme Insurance Company and nobody is there to help him. He's having a very bad day at the office.

/. Listen to the text "A Bad Day at the Office" and say why Mr Blaine is very busy today. II. Read the text. III. Tell about Mr Blaine's bad day at the office. Self check /. Put the verbs into the correct form: 1. Where (be) Mary? She (be) in the kitchen.What she (do) there? She (cook) dinner. She always (cook) it for the family? As a rule she (do) 2. What they (discuss) now? They (speak) about their exams. 3. What Mike (do)? He (translate) an article from Russian into English. He (know) English well? Yes, he (do). 4. He often (walk) to the plant? No, he usually (go) by bus. 5. Where's Peter? He (have) his English lesson. He always (have) it at this time? Twice a week. 6. Mike (speak, not) Spanish. He (know) Polish. 7. Don't go into the classroom! The students (write) a dictation there. 8. Shhh. The baby (sleep). The baby (sleep) for ten hours every night. 9. Right now I'm in class. I (sit) at my desk. I usually (sit) at the same desk in class every day. 10. Ali (speak) Arabic. Arabic is his native language, but right now he (speak) English. 11. Can you hear those people? What they (talk about)? 12. What your father (do)? He's a teacher. 13. My parents (live) in Bris tol. Where your parents (live)? 14. Where you (go)? To the library. You often (go) to the library? Twice a week. 15. Our teacher (stand, not) right now. She (sit) at her desk. 16. It's 6 p. m. Mary is at home. She (eat) dinner. She always (eat) dinner with her family around six o'clock. 17. Alice (take, not) the bus to school every day She usually

(walk) instead.

//. Translate into English.

1. , 8 . 2. . 3. ? . 4. . . . , . 5. ? . ? . > 6. ? - . 7. . . .- . 8. ? . 9. ? . 10. ? , . 11. ? . . 12. . . 13. , . , . -14. . . 15. 10 , . 16. ? , . , ? . 17. ? . 18. ? . . 19. , ? , . 19. ? . UNIT 13 TOPIC: FAMILY. FRIENDS. RELATIVES. PART A TEXT. AN ENGLISH FAMILY The Cornfords live in Rugby at 28 Coronation Street. John Cornford is a rich businessman of about fifty. He's tall and dark. He wears dark suits but at weekends he wears casual clothes. He usually gets up at six, does some exercises and goes to the office. He never gets back before ten o'clock at night, so he doesn't see much of his family. He is interested in collecting
110

pictures of horses. At the moment he is travelling on business in America because he's opening an office over there next year. Sarah, Mr Cornford's wife, is forty-five. She is an attractive woman with blond hair and soft blue eyes. She is kind and gentle, very practical and full of common sense. Sarah is a housewife. She looks after the house and the family. The Cornfords have two children: a son and a daughter. Their son's name is Steve. He is 22. He is a clever young man. He works at a design office. He is a very outdoor person he is a keen sailor and a member of the local yacht club. When he has a chance Steve and his friends get down to the coast for the weekend, camping there and sailing in competitions. He plays football sometimes for a Rugby team, but prefers watching the game, either on television or at the local ground where he goes with his father sometimes. Steve has a number of close friends and a beautiful girlfriend, Pauline, by name. Pauline studies at a teacher's training college. Steve and Pauline often go out for the evening to the cinema or else they go skating at the Rugby skating rink. Pauline is a very good skater and she is trying to teach Steve how to skate well. Both Steve and Pauline are very friendly and sociable. Sometimes Steve takes Pauline to a pub where they meet some of their friends and sit and chat for an hour or so and sometimes they go dancing at the Mecca Ballroom. Steve is very fond of Pauline. They are going to get married in a year. Steve's sister, Alice, is a lovely, quiet, serious girl. She goes to grammar school. She is a bright girl and does very well at school. Alice reads a lot, she is fond of music. She is good at drawing. She takes lessons in drawing at the local art school. Sarah's mother, Grandma, as the children call her, also lives with them. She is in her late sixties. Her kind face is wrinkled, her hair is grey, but she is still quite young in spirit. She likes reading and gardening and she often goes for long walks. She's a very active person. Either she's making something or mending something or doing something to entertain herself. She's extremely generous, but not very tolerant with the people who don't agree with her.
Comprehension

/. Listen to the text "An English Family" and answer the questions: Is the Cornford family large? How many are they? Where do they live? //. Listen to the text again and answer more detailed questions: What does Mr. Cornford do? What does he look like? What is he interested in? What is he doing in America at the moment? What is Mrs Cornford like? What does she do? How old is Steve? What's his job? Is Steve married? Do Steve and Pauline often go out? What is Alice like? What is she fond of? How old is Sarah's mother? What does she look like? What kind of woman is she? ///. Read the text and analyse the language peculiarities of the text. Do some exercises in the next section to remember them.

Special Difficulties /. Paraphrase using: a) be interested in e.g. Betty is fond of tennis. Betty is interested in tennis. 1. I am fond of classical music. 2. Roger is fond of fishing. 3. Are you fond of gardening? 4. Mike isn't fond ofchess. 5. Betty isn't fond of detectives. 6. Jack is fond of history. 7. Is your daughter fond of reading? 8. My father isn't fond of travelling. 9. Are you fond of collecting coins?

b) be good at e.g. Mike can skate well. Mike is good at skating. 1. Robert plays chess very well. 2. Mary can swim well. 3. Do you cook well? 4. Does Jane know Spanish well? 5. Mike can draw well. 6. Does Betty play tennis well? 7. Does Peter know maths well? 8. Can you ski well? c) full of e.g. There are a lot of books on Mr West's shelves. Mr West's shelves are full of books. 1. There is a lot of wine in the bottle. 2. There are a lot of apples in the basket. 3. There's a lot of milk in the jug. 4. There are a lot of oranges in the bag. 5. There's a lot of tea in the box. d) the gerund e.g. I like to play tennis. I like playing tennis. 1. Jane likes to shop. 2. Mary likes to knit. 3. I prefer to travel by train. 4. She likes to swim. 5. Jim likes to drive a car. 6. Victor prefers to rest in the south. 7. My brother likes to fish. 8. Helen prefers to collect stamps. 9. Jack likes to play cards. 10. John prefers to watch football on television. //. Respond to the following statements. Use: a) either or 112 e.g. When are you going to the country? Either on Saturday or on Sunday. 1. When are you going to have your English exam? 2. When does the meeting start? 3. Who is going to do this work? 4. Where are the Pavlovs going to spend their holidays? 5. Who is going to help her? 6. When does the shop open? b) the infinitive e.g. Will you please type this letter for me? I'm sorry but I don't know how do type. 1. Will you please repair the iron? 2. Will you please polish the floor? 3. Will you please start the engine? 4. Will you please drive the car? 5. Will you please switch on the TV set? c) a lot e.g. Betty doesn't read much. And Mike? Mike reads a lot. 1. Jane doesn't swim much. And her sister? 2. Helen doesn't skate much. And Alice? 3. John doesn't drive much. And his father? 4. We don't work hard. And you? 5. Mike doesn't earn much. And Nick? 6. Mr. Robinson doesn't travel much. And his son? ///. Change the position of "both" in the sentences: e.g. Both (of) the boys are going to swim. The boys are both going to swim. 1. Both the sisters are pretty. 2. Both the boys are fond of tennis. 3. The friends are both going to the country. 4. The brothers are both interested in fishing. 5. Both the bottles are empty. 6. The women are both wearing hats. 7. Both the glasses are full of wine. 8. The children are both in the country now. IV. Combine two sentences into one. Use: a) Both ... and e.g. Jack likes football. His brother also likes football. Both Jack and his brother like football. 1. Mary is going to come to the party. Her sister is also going to come. 2. Jack wants to go fishing. His father also wants to go fishing. 3. Mary travels a lot. Jane also travels much. 4. Jack speaks French. His friend also speaks French. 5. Mary plays tennis. Lucy also plays tennis. 6. Jane can dance well. Her sister is also good at dancing. 6. Jim plays tennis. He also plays golf. 8. Helen is fond of music. She is also fond of art. b) the infinitive e.g. I'm going to the library. I want to take some books. I'm going to the library to take some books. 1. Mr. Smith is flying to Moscow. He's going to take part in a conference. 2. Mike is going to the station. He is meeting his 113 mother. 3. Mary is hurrying to the bus stop. She's going to take the 5 o'clock bus to the University. 4. Mike is buying roses. He's going to give them to his wife for her birthday. 5. Lucy is phoning her friend. She wants to invite her to the party. 6. Mr. Black is buying a newspaper. He wants to read it in the tram.

V. Ask your friends questions. Use: a) "fond of, interested in". e.g. your brother/hockey Is your brother interested in (fond of) hockey? No, he isn't. (Yes, he is) 1. you/pop music; 2. Jack/fishing; 3. your friend/football; 4. you/collecting stamps; 5. your brother/boating; 6. you/reading; 7. your father/politics; 8. Jane/art; 9. Dick/medicine; 10. Jane/figure skating; 11. Mike/football; 12. Your brother/chess; 13. Jack/ foreign languages; 14. Betty/dancing; 15. John/detectives; 16. you/poetry

b) the word combinations with gerund: "go dancing" (swimming, boating, skating, skiing, fishing, shopping) e.g. Do you often go shopping? Twice a week. VI. Answer the questions. Use the preposition "for": e.g. How long do you stay at work? I stay at work for eight hours. 1. How long do you do your English homework? 2. How long do you usually watch TV? 3. How long do you stay in the country in summer? 4. How long do your English classes last? 5. How long are you going to stay abroad? VII. Read and reproduce the dialogue. Pay attention to the use of the word combination "look after": Where are you going to spend your holidays this year, Harry? We may go abroad but I'm not sure. My wife always worries too much. Who's going to look after the dog? Who's going to look after the garden? Who's going to look after the house? We have this problem every year. In the end we stay at home and look after everything. VIII. Translate into English (self check): 1. ? , , . 2. . , , . , . 3. ? 114 . 4. , . , . 5. , . 6. , . . 7. ? , , , . 8. 6 , , , , . . 9. , . , . Text Exercises /. Agree or disagree with the following statements. Give additional information to prove your agreement or disagreement. 1. John Cornford is a driver. 2. John Cornford is married. 3. Steve isn't a very outgoing person. 4. Steve is going to get married. 5. Steve is the only child in the family. 6. Sarah's mother lives with the Cornfords, too. //. Ask questions about: a) Mr Cornford (his age, appearance, daily routine, hobbies, present occupation); b) Mrs Cornford (her appearance, character, occupation); c) Steve (his age, job, character, hobbies, friends); d) Alice (her character, abilities); e) Sarah's mother (age, appearance, character, likes) ///. Speak on: a) the Cornfords, husband and wife; b) Steve, his friends and hobbies; c) Alice, her character and abilities; d) Sarah's mother. IV. a) Imagine you are Mrs Cornford. Tell about your family, b) Imagine you are Steve. Answer your friends' questions about your family.
PART CONVERSATION PRACTICE

My Family
What's your name? My name is Richard Fulton. Where are you from? I'm from New York.
115

How old are you?

I'm twenty-four. I was born on July 26, 1969. How many brothers do you have? I have two brothers. The elder one is twenty. He's at the University. The younger one is seventeen. He's in his last year of high school. How many sisters do you have? I have one sister. She's nine. She goes to grammar school. What does your father do? He's a doctor. Does your whole family live here? My whole family except my grandparents. They live on a farm near Milwaukee. Are you related to Mrs. Rayburn? She is my aunt. /. Listen to the conversation "My Family" and answer the questions: How old is Richard Fulton? Where is he from? Has he got any brothers? What do they do? Richard has a sister, hasn't he? What does Richard's father do? Where do his grandparents live? //. Listen to the conversation again and repeat special and general questions. Imitate the voice on the tape. III. Tell about Richard and his relatives. IV. Imagine you are Richard Fulton. Answer your friends' questions about your family.

A Proud Parent

Mrs Randal: Are all your children grown up, Ruth? Mrs Reed: Oh, yes. Laura is the cleverest one. She is a librarian in the public library. Mrs Randal: Very interesting. And what about Rita? Mrs Reed: She is a secretary at the railway station. Mrs Randal: And what about Rosemary? She was always a very pretty child. Mrs Reed: Rosemary is a waitress in a restaurant in Paris. She is married to an electrician. Mrs Randal: And what about Jerry and Ronald? Mrs Reed: Jerry drives a lorry. He drives everywhere in Europe. Mrs Randal: Really? Which countries does he drive to? Mrs Reed: France and Austria and Greece and Russia. Mrs Randal: And does Ronald drive a lorry, too? Mrs Reed: Oh, no. Ronald is a pilot. 116 Mrs Randal: Really? Which countries does he fly to? Mrs Reed: Austria and America. /. Listen to the conversation "A Proud Parent" and say what it is about. II. Listen to the conversation again and ask questions about Mrs Reed's children (Laura, Rita, Rosemary, Jerry, Ronald). III. Tell about Mrs Reed's family. IV. Imagine you are Mrs Reed. Answer your friends' questions about your family. V. Say some words about yourself and your family: How old are you? Are you married? Is your family large? What does your wife look like? What does she do? What is your wife's name? Has she a good character? What are her likes and dislikes? Have you got any children? What are their names? How old are they? What is your son like? Does he do well at school? Do you help him with his studies? What is he interested in? Is he fond of chess? What games does he play? Is your son sociable? Has he got many friends? Have you got any brothers or sisters? Will you tell us some words about them? Are your grandparents alive? How old are they? What do they do? What are they like? VI. Situation: Your partner and you are talking about your family and your relatives.

At an International Language School

Kunio: Good morning. My name's Kunio. Maria: My name's Maria. I'm glad to meet you. Kunio: So am I. Where do you come from? Maria: I come from Mexico. Where are you from? Kunio: I'm from Japan. Maria: Where are you living now? Kunio: On Fifth Avenue. And you? Maria: I'm living in a dorm. Kunio: What is your field of study? Maria: Business. After I study English I'm going to attend the School of Business Administration. How about you? What's your major? Kunio: Chemistry. Maria: What do you like to do in your free time? Do you have any hobbies? Kunio: I like to swim. How about you? 117 Maria: I read a lot and I collect stamps from all over the world. Kunio: Really? Would you like some stamps from Japan? Maria: Sure! That would be great. Thanks. Kunio: I have to write your full name on the board when I introduce you to the class. How do you spell your name? Maria: My first name is Maria. M-A-R-I-A. My last name is Lopez. L-O-P-E-Z. How do you spell your name? Kunio: My first name is Kunio. K-U-N-I-O. My family name is Akiwa. A-K-I-W-A. Maria: Kunio Akiwa. Is that right? Kunio: It is. /. Listen to the dialogue "At an International Language School" and answer the questions: Where are Kunio and Maria from? What are they doing in the USA? What is their field of study? What are their hobbies? //. Read the dialogue. III. Imagine you are Kunio. Stand up, write Maria's full name on the blackboard and introduce your new friend to the class. Begin like that: This is Maria Lopez. She is from Mexico, etc. ... IV. Next Maria introduces Kunio to the class. What is Maria going to say? V. Pair up with another student in the class, interview each other and then introduce each other to the rest of the class. In your conversation with the other person find out this person's name, origin, domicile, work, free time, activities and hobbies. Then tell your group-mates what you found out about your partner.
A New Flat Maggie is visiting her friend's new flat

Maggie: What a fantastic flat! Tessa: Do you like it? Maggie: Very much. I love the sitting-room. It's got atmosphere Tessa: Well, you see Jack's a designer. Maggie: Is he? Tessa: Yes. He's an interior designer. He designers in London. He's got Maggie: And you've got some lovely paintings, haven't you? Tessa: My brother paints in his free time. They're his paintings. Maggie: But there are no chairs. works for a firm of very good ideas. 18 Tessa: No, we haven't got a lot of furniture. Maggie: But where do you sit? Tessa: On the floor. Maggie: On the floor? Tessa: Yes, we sit on big Indian cushions on the floor.

/. Listen to the dialogue and answer the questions:

Does Maggie like Tessa's flat? Why has the sitting-room got atmosphere? Whose paintings are there in the room? Is there a lot of furniture in the flat?

//. Tell about Tessa's flat. III. Role-play the dialogue.

IV. Where do you live? Have you a good flat? What is it like? Has the flat got atmosphere? Is there a lot of furniture in the flat? Do you like your flat?

V. Compliment your friend on his new flat.

In the Street Lucy: Hallo, Jack. How are you? Jack: Fine, thanks, Lucy. And you? Lucy: Oh, very well thanks. How's the family? Jack: Well, Tom isn't very well, I'm afraid. Lucy: Oh! I'm sorry to hear that. What's the matter with him? Jack: He's got a cold. Lucy: I hope he is better soon. Does he stay away from school? Jack: Yes, and he is very happy about it. He doesn't like school. Lucy: And how is your sister getting on? Jack: Fine, thanks, she is taking her finals now and she's very. busy. Lucy: Please, give her my regards. Jack: Thank you. And give my regards to your family, too. Goodbye. Lucy: Goodbye. Nice to see you.

/. Listen to the dialogue and answer the questions:

How is Jack getting on? What's the matter with Tom? How is Jack's sister, Lucy? Why is she busy?

//. Role-play the dialogue.

III. Situation: You see your neighbour waiting at the bus-stop. You greet each other and ask about your families. 119

Listening Close Friends My husband and I are very lucky. We have many close friends in this city and they are all interesting people. Our friend Greta is an actress. We see her when she isn't making a movie in Hollywood. When we get together with her, she always tells us about her life in Hollywood as a movie star. Greta is a very close friend. We like her very much. Our friend Dan is a scientist. We see him when he isn't busy in his laboratory. When we get together with him, he always tells us about his new experiments. Dan is a very close friend. We like him very much. Our friends Bob and Carol are famous newspaper reporters. We see them when they are not travelling around the world. When we get together with them, they always tell us about their conversations with presidents and prime ministers. Bob and Carol are very close friends. We like them very much. Unfortunately, we don't see Greta, Dan, Bob and Carol very often. In fact, we rarely see them, because they are usually so busy. But we think about them all the time. /. Listen to the text "Close Friends" and answer the questions: Why do the Browns think they are lucky? What does Greta do? What does she tell her friends about when they get together? Dan is also a very close friend, isn't he? What's his job? What do Bob and Carol do? Is their life interesting? The Browns don't often see their friends, do they? //. Imagine you are Mr Brown. Tell about your friends. Give additional information about them. III. Have you got many friends? Who is your best friend? Will you tell us about him (her)? Mr and Mrs Di Carlo Mr and Mrs Di Carlo live in an old Italian neighbourhood in New York City. They speak Italian. They read the Italian newspaper. They listen to Italian radio programs. They shop at the Italian grocery store around the corner from their apartment building. And every day they visit their friends and neighbours and talk about life in the old country. Mr and Mrs Di Carlo are upset about their son Joe. He lives in a small suburb outside the city and speaks very little Italian. He

120

reads American newspapers. He listens to American programs. He shops at big suburban supermarkets. And when he visits his friends and neighbours he speaks only English. In fact, the only time Joe speaks Italian is when he calls Mr and Mrs Di Carlo on the telephone or when he visits them every weekend. Mr and Mrs Di Carlo are sad because their son Joe speaks so little Italian. They're afraid he's forgetting his language, his culture and his country. /. Listen to the text "Mr and Mrs Di Carlo", ask and answer questions on the text. 2. Tell about the Di Carlo family. Grammar Destroys Marriage The Morris family have a problem. Daniel, an unemployed salesman and father of four, studies eight hours a day in the bathroom. Every morning at 4.00 a. m. he goes into the bathroom, locks the door and turns on his stereo. Loud music blasts out until 12.00 midday. What does he do there? He studies French grammar. This is his fourteenth attempt to learn the language and this time, says Daniel "I'll do it!" His wife Annee Marie doesn't share his optimism. She says she wants a divorce. /. Listen to the text "Grammar Destroys Marriage" and answer the questions: What language is Daniel studying? How long does he study every day? Is it Daniel's first attempt to learn French? Does his wife share his optimism? //. Tell about Daniel's fourteenth attempt to learn French grammar.

Self check
/. Use the necessary tense forms: 1. It's 7.30 a. m. and the Wilsons are in their kitchen. Mrs Wilson (sit) at the breakfast table. She (read) the morning paper. She (read) the morning paper every morning. Mr Wilson (pour) a cup of coffee. He (drink) two cups of coffee every morning before he (go) to work. There is a cartoon on TV, but the children (watch, not) it. They (play) with their toys, instead. They usually (watch) cartoons in the morning, but this morning they (pay, not) any attention to the TV. Mrs Wilson (watch, not) TV either. She (like, not) to watch cartoons. 121 At 8.15 Mr Wilson (leave) home for work. Mrs Wilson (go, not) to work. She (stay) at home. She (do) the housework and (look) after the children. 2. Where Mr Jackson (be) from? He (be) from Glasgow. What he (do)? He (be) an engineer. What he (do) in our town? He (be) on business here. When he (leave)? Tomorrow morning. 3. Harry: Hello, Steve. This is Harry speaking. I (phone) from the office. I know it's late, but I (work) now. Steve: It's almost 10 o'clock. You never (stay) so late! What's wrong? Harry: I (have) difficulty with the article on the rail strike. Steve: But you seldom (have) difficulty with the articles. You always (finish) them quickly. Harry: Steve, what you (do) now? You (watch) television at the moment? Steve: No, but we are still up. Jill (prepare) lessons for tomorrow and 1 (get) ready for bed. But come over, Harry! //. Translate into English: 1. ? . 2. ? 5. 3. , . 4. ? . , ? . ? . 5. -? , -. ? , . 6. ? , . 7 , . 8. ? . 9. . . 10. ? . ? .

Fluency
/. Tell about yourself and your family. II. Write about yourself, your relatives and friends. III. You introduce two of your friends to each other. They have never met before. They want to find out something about 122 each other by asking questions to cover: spelling of name, work, domicile, address, telephone number, family.

IV. You meet a friend of yours in the street and ask each other questions about health, family, etc. Your friend has a guest staying with him and you want to find out about him (his name, origin, job, appearance, age, character, etc.). V You introduce yourself to a new next door neighbour. You both exchange information to cover: name, origin, job, etc. VI. You are going to get a new job. You are having a conversation with a clerk at the Personnel Department. VII. You are telling your group-mates about your relatives or friends showing their photographs. Your group-mates ask you questions about the people in the photographs. VIII. Look at the picture Say who these people are; what their age, occupation might be; what they look like; what they are wearing; what they are doing at the moment. IX. You lose your child at the railway-station. You are very worried, you want to make an announcement. You go to the information desk and the clerk asks you some questions about your child (his age, name, clothes, appearance). X. Game: A student comes to the front of the class and makes true or false statements about (him) self to cover: e.g name, initials, spelling, address, origin, nationality, telephone number, domicile, job, etc. Members of the class try to detect the lies and 7 j j ' * interrupt with "No, you don't (No, it isn't etc.)" If the student "gets away" with more than three lies he has another go. Otherwise someone else takes his place. XI. Game: Twenty Questions: I've lost my fnend'(s). A student writes down the name of one or two members of the class on a piece of paper which he hands to the teacher The name or names represent the lost friend (s). Members of the class (taking the part of a helpful policeman) try to discover the identity of the person or persons chosen in under 20 questions. Questions may cover: appearance (including articles of clothing), work, approximate age, height and weight, character, domicile, job or profession, but not name, initials or address Typical answers can include: Yes ..., No ..., Perhaps ..., I think .. , I don't know. One is ... and the other is ... (to describe two people).

123
U NIT 14 TOPIC: DAILY ROUTINE GRAMMAR: SIMPLE PRESENT. . PRESENT CONTINUOUS PA RT A TEXT. A BUSY DAY Every day at half past eight Mr Hanson leaves his house in Church Street and drives to work. It takes him about twenty minutes to get to his office. He usually arrives there at about ten to nine. His secretary, Mary Summers, is always at the office when Mr Hanson comes. She has a small office next door to Mr Hanson's, and there she types the letters Mr Hanson gives her to answer. Mr Hanson is the Managing Director of a large publishing company which publishes a lot of technical books and magazines and sells them all over the world. Mr Hanson's office is quite large and it is well furnished. His desk is in the middle of the room and underneath it is a new blue rug. The desk is very large and on it there is a photograph of Mr Hanson's wife, two metal boxes for letters and files, a round metal box for pencils and pens, a small tray for pins and paper fasteners. There is a comfortable armchair behind the desk and two chairs in front of it. There are some filing cabinets in^he corner near the door. The window is on the right of the desk. There are pale blue curtains at the window. Mr Hanson is fond of blue. Today Mr Hanson is rather angry. He is sitting at his desk and arguing with someone on the telephone. While Mr Hanson is on the telephone, Mary Summers brings him a cup of coffee. Mary is a good secretary. A good secretary has to learn a lot about her boss. She must know how to talk to customers on the telephone and in the office and must also arrange both business and social engagements. Today, for example, Mary knows that Mr. Hanson has to see a customer from Ghana at 11 o'clock and another customer from Hong Kong at midday. At one-fifteen Mr Hanson is to have lunch with two of the office managers from overseas branches of the company. Then at threethirty he has to finish writing a letter concerning the following year's publishing programme. It is Mary's job to remind Mr Hanson about the appointments at 1) o'clock and midday, to book a table at a restaurant in the town for the lunch engagement and to take notes from Mr Hanson for several business letters. By the time Mr Hanson leaves the office both he and Mary are feeling very tired. This evening Mary's friend, Roger, is taking 124 her to the cinema and she is looking forward to it. She likes Roger very much and she hopes that one day he will ask her to marry him. On the way home Mr Hanson thinks about the day at the office and makes a note in his diary about some of the business he has to do. He also thinks about his wife, Jane, and his house. Sometimes he takes his wife flowers and she is always glad to have them. The Hansons are very fond of each other and they never argue. Jane sometimes thinks that Mr Hanson spends too much time at the office and too little time with her but then she tells herself that she can't have everything.

Comprehension
/. Listen to the text "A Busy Day" and say what it is about. II. Listen to the text again and say which of the given statements is true to the text:

1. Mr Hanson comes to work at a) 9.00; b) 8.45; c) 8.50. 2. Mr Hanson's secretary comes to work a) later than he does; b) earlier than he does. 3. Mr Hanson is a) the manager of a large plant; b) the manager of a publishing company. 4. Mr Hanson's office is quite large. His desk is a) at the window; b) in the middle of the room. 5) Mr Hanson is very busy today. At 11 o'clock he has to a) take part in a conference; b) see a visitor. 6. Mr Hanson is a) happy; b) not happy in his married life. ///. Read the text and analyse the language peculiarities of the text. Do some exercises in the next section to remember them.

Special Difficulties
/. Paraphrase. Use the modal expression "be-\-to infinitive" to express a planned action: e.g. We are meeting at the Institute at 12. We are to meet at the Institute at 12. 1. Mary is coming by the 6 o'clock train. 2. The bus leaves at 5 a. m. 3. The conference begins on Friday. 4. The train starts at 6.30. 5. The boss is going to see some visitors from 10 to 12. //. Respond. Use the modal expression "'have -J- to infinitive": e.g. Mary is busy, (type several letters) Mary is busy. She has to type several letters. 1. My classes begin at 8. (get up early) 2. Jack is taking his exams now. (work hard) 3. I have no relatives in Moscow, (stay at a hotel) 4. The office is far from my house, (take a bus) 5. My mother is ill at the moment, (look after her) 6. I have no time left. 125 (be at work at 12 sharp) 7. John is ill. (stay in bed) 8.1 can't go out now. (finish the work) e.g. My classes begin at 2. p. m. (get up early) My classes begin at 2. p. m. 1 don't have to get up early. 1. My wife is a good cook. (I, dine out) 2. I'm on holiday now. (work hard) 3. The bus is never late, (we, wait) 4. Her brother knows English well, (she, help) 5. Mike lives not far from the office, (take a bus) 6. Betty feels much better, (go to the doctor) e.g. My wife is away on business, (take your son to the nursery) Do you have to take your son to the nursery? Yes, I do. (No, I don't. My mother looks after him) 1. Jack is taking his exams, (work hard) 2. Lavrov is chief engineer at our plant, (go away on business) 3. My classes begin at 8. (leave early) 4. I live rather far from my office, (go by bus) 5. I am very busy now. (miss your English classes) 6. 1 know English fairly well, (use a dictionary) ///. Interview your friend. Ask him if he has to get up early; why he has to spend his holidays in town; if he has to work hard at English; what kind of work he has to do; why he has to miss his English classes; if he often has to go on business; if he has to help his children with their homework. IV. Paraphrase. Use the verb "arrive": I. Mr Baxter comes to the office at 9. 2. The train gets to the town of Chacewood at 6 p. m. 3. Jane comes home late. 4. When does the plane get to London? 5. Many foreigners come to Moscow every year. 6. The coach gets to the airport at 9.00. V. Respond. Do it as in the example: e.g. I'm going to the beach. What about you? I don't know where to go. 1. I'm buying some sandwiches. And Harry? 2. I'm learning French. What about Helen? 3. I know how to do it. And you? 4. I'm driving to Scotland. And Jack? 5. We are going to the seaside. And what about you? 6. I'm eating in that Italian restaurant. And what about the Hunts? VI. Make up short dialogues using the prompt words: e.g. How long does it take you to get to work? It takes me about half an hour to get there, (do your English homework, discuss the work schedule, prepare lunch, get home from work, look through business papers, clean the flat) VII. Make up sentences using the table: 126 the New Year party I our picnic My friend am seeing the play The children is moving to our new flat All of us looking forward to a trip abroad Jane are the weekend meeting their grandmother VIII. Fill in the blanks with the verbs "come" or "go" (self check): 1. Where are you ...? To the library. 2. When is your friend ... back? On Friday morning. 3. I don't ... home after work on Monday. I ... to my English class. 4. Mr Robinson usually ... to the office at 9. 5. Does your daughter ... to school?Yes, she does. 6. My wife ... to work at 8 and ... home at 6. 7. Don't ... away, please. Sorry, but I have to. 8. We sometimes ... out of town on Sunday. 9. When are you ... to Moscow? In three days. 10. Does Mike sometimes ... to your place? He does, but not very often. IX. Translate into English (self check): 1. . . 2. , . . . 3. 6 . 4. ? ,

6 . 5. . ? , . 6. - ? , . . 7. 12.30. . 8. . .

Text Exercises
/. Ask questions about: a) Mr Hanson'e office; b) his work schedule for today; c) Mary's duties as a secretary; d) Mr Hanson's family. (live expanded answers to these questions. II. Situation 1: Mary Summers is speaking to Mr Hanson. She is reminding him what he has to do today. Situation 2: Mr Hanson is on the phone. He's talking to his wife. He's telling her about his work schedule for today. 127

/// This is Mr Hanson's work schedule for tomorrow Say what he is going to do 9001000 phone Mr Morgan 100011 00 dictate replies to business letters 11 001200 lunch at a restaurant 12001400 visit the BBC Television Centre 14001500 see a customer from Brazil 15001700 press conference at Heathrow Airport
*

IV Look at Mr Hanson's work schedule again and say what he has (is) to do tomorrow V Ask your partner different questions about Mr Hanson's work schedule for tomorrow Use the modal expressions "have -+- to infinitive", "be + to infinitive" and the construction "be going-{-to infinitive" to express a future action VI Tell about your plans for tomorrow (the weekend, etc ) Use the same expressions VII Tell about your usual daily routine
PART CONVERSATION PRACTICE

Morning and Evening

Mr Robinson What time do you get up as a rule' Mr Jackson Generally about half past seven Mr R Why so early' Mr J Because I usually catch an early train up to town Mr R When do you get to the office' Mr J Normally, about nine o'clock Mr R Do you stay in town all day' Mr J Sometimes I do, and sometimes I don't Mr R What do you usually do in the evenings' Mr J We generally stay at home Once or twice a week we go to a theatre or to the pictures Occasionally we go to a dance Mr R Do you like dancing' Mr J Yes, very much Do you dance' Mr R Not very often I'm getting too old Mr J Too old' Nonsense, you don't look more than fifty Mr R As a matter of fact I'm nearly sixty Mr J Really' You certainly don't look it Mr R I'm glad to hear it Are you doing anything special tonight' If not, what about coming with me to my club' Mr J Id love to. but today happens to be our wedding anniversary and we're going out to celebrate Mr R Well, my heartiest congratulations' Mr J Thank you very much I could come tomorrow if that would suit you Mr Yes R - excellent Let's make it round about eight o'clock Mr J Very well, thanks

/ Listen to the conversation "Morning and Evening" and answer the questions What is Mr Jackson's daily programme3 How does he spend his free time3 Where does Mr Robinson invite his friend3 Why can't Mr Jackson accept his invitation3 When do they arrange to meet3 // Read the conversation Analyse the language peculiarities of the text III Find the text appropriate English phrases for the following ' 8 , 3 3 3 , IV Insert the missing phrases from the dialogue ~ Too old' , you don't look more than fifty , I'm nearly sixty ' You certainly don't look it

 anything special tonight3 If not, to my club3 , but today happens to be our wedding anniversary Well, I

V Invite your friend to have dinner with you, come to the pictures tonight, go on a pic me with you, spend the weekend in the country, come to your party, play bridge with you, visit the new art gallery, etc Your friend will turn down the invitation eg What about going to the theatre3 I'd love to, but I have to finish writing my article VI. Respond using the phrases from the text: 1. Do you come home late? 2. You don't look more than ... 3. What about going to the cinema? 4. Betty is very beautiful. 5, Let's meet tomorrow at 7. 6. I'm nearly 40. VII. Ask questions about a) Mr Jackson's daily activities; b) Mr Robinson, his age, likes, dislikes. VIII. Act out the conversation. IX. Situation: Your friend and you are speaking about your daily activities/pastime. Your friend invites you to call on him on the weekend but you can't. You agree to meet some other time.
Making an Appointment

Secretary: Two-four-nine-six-eight-four. Mr Morgan: I'd like to make an appointment with Mr Hanson. This is Mr Morgan speaking. Secretary: Oh, yes, Mr Morgan Good morning. Just a moment. I'll get his schedule. Are you there? Mr Morgan: Yes. Secretary: When would you like to come, Mr Morgan? Mr Morgan: Tomorrow, if possible. Secretary: I'm afraid he's tied up tomorrow. Is it urgent? If it is, perhaps we could fit you in somewhere. Mr Morgan: No, it isn't that urgent. Is the day after tomorrow possible? Secretary: What time would you like to come? Mr Morgan: As late as possible in the afternoon. Secretary: I'm sorry, that afternoon's full too. How is Friday afternoon at five? Mr Morgan: Yes, that's perfect, thank you. Good-bye. /. Listen to the conversation "Making an Appointment" and answer the questions: Who is Mr Morgan calling? When does he want to see Mr Hanson? Is Mr Hanson free tomorrow? When is Mr Morgan going to see Mr Hanson? //. Read the conversation and analyse its language peculiarities. III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following: . ? . . 130 . , . ? , . ? , . IV. Act out the conversation. V. Situation. You are calling the head of the tractor plant, Mr Robinson. You want to make an appointment for Tuesday. Mr Robinson isn't available on that day. Make an appointment for some other day. '' ' In the Street Dick: Hello, Bob! Bob: Hi, Dick. How are you? Dick: I'm fine, thank you. And how are you? Bob: Pretty good, thanks. I'm on my way to class. Dick: What time is the class? Bob: The class begins at 9 o'clock. Dick: Is it an English class? Bob: Yes. Dick: Is Mr Tard the instructor? Bob: No, Mr Tard teaches Spanish. Mr Menning is the instructor. Dick: I see Mr Menning over there now. 1 want to meet him. Bob: All right. (Dick and Bob walk towards Mr Menning) Bob: Mr Menning, I want to introduce Mr Thomas. Mr Menning: How do you do, Mr Thomas? Dick: How do you do, Mr Menning? I'm glad to meet you. Mr Menning: Are you a student, Mr Thomas? Dick: .Yes, I study medicine. Mr Menning: Is medicine a difficult subject? Dick: Yes, 1 think so. I study hard. I have a class this mor-

ning. Mr Menning: Well, the English class begins soon. Mr Smith and I are late. Please, excuse us. Hope to see you again, Mr Thomas. Dick: So do I. Good-bye, Mr Menning. So long, Bob. /. Listen to the conversation "In the Street" and answer the questions: Where is Bob going? When does the class begin? Who is the instructor? What subject does Dick study? 131 //. Say what the characters in this conversation do. III. Act out the conversation.
The Time of the Day

Mr Menning: What time is it, Mr Tard? Mr Tard: It's just eleven o'clock. Mr Menning. My watch is slow. I have a quarter to eleven By the way, do you have a luncheon date? Mr .: Yes, my wife and 1 are meeting the Nelsons for lunch at 11.30. Mr. M.: Are they neighbours of yours? Mr .: Yes, they are. And, by the way, we are going to a lecture with them tomorrow night. Mr M.: What's the subject of the lecture? Mr .: It's about the United Nations and world peace. Mr M.: Who is the speaker? Mr .: The speaker is Mr Dallas. Do you want to go with us? Mr M.: Yes, let's go together. What time does the lecture start? Mr .: At seven o'clock. Let's meet in the lobby of the auditorium at a quarter to seven. Mr M.: . . How long is the lecture? Mr .: It lasts for about an hour and a half. Well, it's getting late. My wife is waiting for me. It's almost 11.30. Mr M.: Where is your wife, now? Mr .: She is waiting for me at the Mayflower Hotel I am late now. So good-bye, Mr Menning. Mr M.: So long, Mr Tard. See you tomorrow night. /. Listen to the conversation "The Time of the Day" and answer the questions: What time is it? Is Mr Menning's watch fast or slow? What are the Tards going to do in the evening? Does Mr Menning want to hear the lecture, too? When does the lecture begin? //. Find in the text appropriate tnglish phrases for the following: t . . . . ? , . . ? 132

///. Act out the conversation. IV. Situation: You are going to the library to write an article. On your way you meet your friend and his colleague who are going to a cafe for dinner. You greet each other, your friend introduces you to his colleague. You chat for a while Listening Daily Programme Jerry and Irene work in a car factory. Jerry has a wife and two children Irene lives alone She goes to night school. Jerry gets up at 6 a. m. every day. He takes a shower and starts the coffee. Then he calls his wife and the children. Breakfast is at 7.00, and it's noisy. The children are talking, the radio is on; and there are telephone calls. At 7.30 the children go to school and Jerry's wife goes to work. She's a clerk in a food store. At 7.45 Jerry goes to the factory. Irene's working day is different. She gets up at 7.30. She doesn't take a shower or have breakfast. She goes to a restaurant and buys coffee "to go". She drinks it in her car. Irene's tired every morning. She goes to school from 6.00 to 8.00 every night. Then she studies at home from 9.00 to midnight. Jerry and Irene work from 8.00 to 4.30. Then other men and women come to work. Jerry goes home. Irene goes to school. One working day ends and another starts. / Listen to the text "A Daily Programme", ask and answer questions on the text. II. Tell about Jerry's and Irene's working days. Night Work Joe's a maintenance worker in a big office building. He cleans the offices and halls. During the day there are a lot of people in the building, so Joe doesn't come to work in the morning. He starts work in the evening. He works at night Joe gets up at noon every day. He has breakfast and reads the paper. He doesn't watch television. TV isn't very good during the afternoon. At 3.00 his children come from school. He talks to them and plays with them. At 5.00 his wife comes home from work. She's tired so Joe makes dinner. Joe starts work at 8 p. m. He works from 8 p. m. to 4 a. m. He has lunch at midnight He brings coffee and a sandwich from home. At 4.00 Joe goes home. The streets are calm. Some quiet mu133

sic comes from an all-night restaurant. Joe's tired but he's happy. He goes to bed at 5 a. m. /. Listen to the text "Night Work". Ask and answer questions on the text. II. Tell about Joe's work.
A Very Energetic Woman

Martha is always busy with her job. She gets to the office before 8.30. She takes off her coat, puts on her reading glasses and sits down at her desk. Then she reads her mail and fills out the daily reports. If she has enough time, she has a cup of coffee. At 9.00 the other workers arrive. Some of them are too tired to smile. Sometimes Martha is too busy to talk, but she says hello to everyone. At 9.30 she goes into the boss's office. She gives him the daily reports. They always talk about them for a few minutes. She tells the boss her plans for the day. Then she goes back to her office and makes phone calls. The company does business in England and Japan, so sometimes she has to call these countries. At the end of the day she picks up the children at school. They are always happy to see her, and she is always energetic enough to play with them at home. Martha is important to the people at the office and to the people at home, and she does a good job both places. /. Listen to the text "A Very Energetic Woman". II. Read the text and observe the use of "too" and "enough". Fill in the gaps with either "too" or "enough" in the following exercise: 1. This exercise is easy ... . 2. She is clever ... to do this work herself. 3. Jack is ... young to get married. 4. I am ... busy to go to the cinema. 5.1 am not going to talk to him just now, he is ... angry. 6. She is ... old to work. 7. She lives ... far from the Institure. 8. It is ... late to go there now. 9. This room is ... small for our office. 10. She is sociable ... to have many friends. 11. Emily is a good typist. She types well ... . 12. She has ... time to help him. 13. It is ... cold to go out. ///. Tell about Martha's daily routine. IV. Is your wife a busy woman? Tell about her daily routine.

Self check /. Fill in the gaps with prepositions where necessary: My brother George is interested ... physics. He works ... an office. He works ... Monday ... Friday, but doesn't work ... Saturday and Sunday. George goes ... work .. bus. He's never late ... work. As a rule he arrives ... the office a few minutes ... 9 o'clock. He stays ... work ... 6 o'clock. ... 6 o'clock he leaves ... the office and goes ... home. When he comes ... home his wife and kids are waiting ... him. They all have supper together. ... supper they walk .. the park . . an hour or so. ... the evening George likes to listen ... the radio and watch ... television. He's fond ... reading and reads a lot. He always helps his children ... their homework. He's quite pleased ... their progress at school.... week days George is very tired ... the end of the day so he usually goes ... bed ... 11 o'clock. //. Use the proper tense forms: James (be) a serious student. He (work) hard. He (get) up early every day because he (like, not) to sleep late, and he (have) breakfast at 7 o'clock. He (get) to the University at 7.50.because he (like) to start his day early. He (study) physics and astronomy and he (have) a part-time job. He (teach) every day at noon, Monday through Friday. Every Wednesday and Friday morning he (have) a physics discussion section with his students. His physics lab (be) on Monday from 8 to 12 and he (do) lab work on Friday from 2 to 6. His astronomy classes (be) on Tuesday and Thursday in the afternoon. James (be, not) athletic, but he (want, not) to get fat, so he (jog) at the beach on Wednesday and Saturday in the late afternoon. He also (play) tennis with Bill on Sunday morning. He (be) always very busy. It is 12 o'clock on Sunday. James and Bill (talk). Bill: What you (do) this afternoon? James: I (go) to the library. Bill: You (work) hard! You often (go) to the library? James: Every day. You see I (take) my astronomy exam in two weeks. Bill: How long you (be going) to stay in the library? James: Till 7 o'clock. Bill: You (want) to go to the cinema with me tonight? James: I'd love to, but I've got an appointment for 7.30. ///. Ask questions to which the following statements are the answers: 1. Because he doesn't like to sleep late; 2. At 7; 3. At 7.50; 4. He studies physics and astronomy and has a part-time job; 5. Every day at noon; 6. On Monday from 8 to 12; 7. He jogs and plays tennis. 135
IV. Translate into English:

1. . . 2. ? . 3. , . . 4. ? . 5. . , . . 6. ? . . 7. ? . 8. , . , . 9. . . 10. . . 11. . . 12. 6 . , .

Fluency

/. a) This is Ann's day:

7.00 get up 7.007.30 have a shower 7.308.00 cook breakfast 8.008.30 have breakfast 8.309.00 take her son to school 9.0011.00 do the housework 11.0011.30 read the paper 11.3012.30 go to the shops 12301.30 cook lunch 1.302.00 have lunch 2.002.30 write letters 2.303.30 take the dog for a walk 3.304.00 collect her son from school 4.004.30 give her son his tea 4.305.30 help her son with his homework 5.306.00 pick up her husband at the station 6.00-^7.00 cook supper 7.007.30 have supper 7.308.00 wash up after supper 8.0011.00 talk (read, watch TV) b) Ask questions about Ann's day. Do it like that: e.g. 1. What time does Ann get up? At 7. e.g. 2. It's 7.10. What's Ann doing at the moment? She's having a shower. e.g 3. What does Ann have to do at 8.30? At 8.30 she has to take her son to school.
136

c) Make up statements on Ann's day. Your partner will respond. e.g. 1. Ann usually gets up at 7. Yes, she does. (No, she doesn't). e.g. 2. It's 7.20. Ann is reading the paper at the moment. No, she isn.t. She's having a shower. e.g. 3. It's 12.30. I wonder what Ann is doing now. I think she's cooking lunch.
d) It's 7 a. m. Ann is getting up. Tell what she's going to do during her working day. e) Imagine you are Ann. Tell what you intend to do today at: e.g. 8.30 At 8.30 I'm taking my son to school.

from 9.00 to 11.00, at 11.30, at 2.00, at 3.00, from 4.30 to 5.30, at 5.30. f) Tell about Ann's daily routine. II. Here is part of a letter to a friend in which Mary Smith describes how a move to a new house in the country has affected their lives. We're in our new house and John doesn't walk to work now: he goes by train. He gets up at 7, has breakfast at 7.30 and leaves home at 8. It takes him an hour to get to work and an hour to get home in the evening. He finishes work at 5 and is here at 6. Of course the train fare is expensive, but we like living in the country. We are very pleased with our new house. It's got four rooms and a small garden. It's a very pleasant house and we're going to enjoy living here. You must come and see it soon. Imagine you made a similar move. Adapt this paragraph to suit your own circumstances. III. You often miss your English classes. You always say you are very busy. What keeps you so busy? Work? Family affairs? IV. Say a few words about your work, your working conditions. Are you pleased with them? V. What are your boss and your colleagues like? What do you think of them? Are they good specialists? Are they pleasant to deal with? VI. Your friend and you are busy people. You are speaking about your daily routine. You are both free on the weekend and you agree to go to the country. VII. At an international conference you get acquainted with one of the participants. You ask each other some questions.
UNIT 15 GRAMMAR: SIMPLE PAST

Illustrative Situations: /. Listen to the dialogues and learn them: 1 Does the postman come every day? No, he doesn't. Did he come this morning? Yes, he brought some letters. 2. Did Henry go for a walk yesterday?

 Yes, he did. Does he go for a walk every day? No, he doesn't. 3 Helen didn't go to Jane's party yesterday. Did she stay at home? No, she didn't. She went to the pictures. 4. What did you do last night' I played cards. How about Fred' He watched television. 5. When did you last see Jack? On Sunday. Are you going to see him again soon? I don't think so. 6. Were you at Judy's yesterday? Yes, I was. Did you see Frank? No, I didn't. 7. How did Mr Wood spend last summer holidays? He went to the seaside. And how about Mrs Wood? She stayed at home. 8. Where did you spend last summer holidays? In the country. What did you do there' Lots of things. I used to go swimming, for instance. 9. Did you study German or French at school? German And what about your sister? She studied French. 10. You didn't go to see Miss Fisher yesterday, did you? No, I didn't. I went to the club instead. And Jack did the same, didn't he? Yes, he did. 138
REGULAR AND IRREGULAR VERBS IN SIMPLE PAST. AFFIRMATIVE AND NEGATIVE SENTENCES

Illustrative Texts Richard Wants a Change Richard West works in an office 5 days a week. He usually gets up at 7.30, has a shower and then has breakfast. He starts work at 9, lunch at I and then goes home at 5 30. In the evening he usually reads or watches television. Richard wants a change. He often says: "Every day I do exactly the same thing1 Yesterday I got up at 7 30, had a shower and then had breakfast. I started work at 9 and ate lunch at 1. Then I went home at 5.30. In the evening I read a book and then watched television". /. Listen to the text "Richard Wants a Change". II. Read the text and analyse the use of tense forms. III. Tell about Richard's daily routine on weekdays. IV. What did Richard do yesterday?
Julia Hurries to Work

. Julia often gets up late and she got up late this morning. She ate some cornflakes and drank some tea. She did not wash all the dishes. She washed only some of them. She did not have very much time this morning. /. Listen to the text "Julia Hurries to Work". II. Read the text and analyse the use of tense forms. III. Answer the questions: Did Julia get up early or late today? What did she have for breakfast? What did she do with the dishes and why? IV. Say what Julia did this morning. V What time did you get up today? Did you have a shower this morning? When did you have breakfast' What did you eat? Did you wash the dishes after breakfast? What did you do after breakfast? When did you come to work?
Mrs Mills Goes to London

Last week Mrs Mills went to London. She doesn't know London very well, and she lost her way. Suddenly she saw a man near a bus-stop. "I can ask him the way", she said to herself. "Excuse me", she said. "Can you tell me the way to King Street, please?" The man smiled pleasantly. He did not understand English! He spoke German. He was a tourist. Then he put his hand into his pocket and took out a phrase-book. He opened the book and found a phrase. He

read the phrase slowly. "I am sorry", he said. " I do not speak English". / Listen to the text "Mrs Mills Goes to London". II. Read the text and analyse the use of tense forms. HI. What happened to Mrs Mills in London? Why couldn't the man help Mrs Mills? IV. Tell about Mrs Mills's visit to London.

Practice
/. Listen and repeat: 1. I saw your brother in the library yesterday afternoon. 2. We invited Margaret to the party. 3. Some days ago my mother fell down and broke her arm. 4. We wrote a test at our lesson. 5. Mr Baxter's son became a journalist. 6. I knew almost all the people at the party. 7. We sent the telegram on Tuesday. 8. I told Peter the news yesterday. 9. The boss went away on business on Monday. 10. We painted the floor in the kitchen some days ago. 11. Fortunately I caught the 6 o'clock train and got to the office on time. 12.1 heard a very sweet melody yesterday. 13. 1 read an interesting article this morning. 14. John brought his tape-recorder to the party. 15. We sat in the first row. 16. Mr Robinson flew to Mexico last month. 17. He ate and drank too much. 18. I found my glasses in the laboratory. 19. Jack came home late on Monday. 20. 1 finished work at 8 p. m. 21. We paid a lot for the house. 22. Mary did her homework yesterday evening. 23. We stayed at the seaside for a month. 24. The lecture began at 10 a. m. 25. We sold our car a month ago. 26. Mary gave me her dictionary for some days and I forgot to give it back to her. 27. Helen lost her umbrella yesterday. 28. At the party Mike played the piano and Lucy sang beautifully. 29. I met Peter not long ago and had a talk with him. 30. I remember I put the book into the bookcase. 31. She said something about it at dinner. 32.1 ran for the bus this morning. 33. We swam much in 140 summer. 34. We spent the weekend in the country. 35. Helen bought a beautiful ring some days ago. 36. Victor came home late and slept till 11 today. 37. My mother taught chemistry at school for thirty years. 38. I made a lot of mistakes in my dictation. 39. I understood everything at once. 40. Mary stood up and went out of the classroom. 41. Somebody stole Peter's bicycle the day before yesterday. 42. I thought a lot about this problem. 43 Mr Short and Harry Turner spoke at the meeting. 44. The bell rang and the students left the room. 45. I drove 50 miles yesterday. //. Respond to the following utterances. Do it as in the examples: e.g. Did the lift stop? Of course, it stopped. 1. Did you watch the match? 2. Did she talk to the boss? 3. Did she type the letter? 4. Did they discuss the plan? 5. Did the news surprise him? 6. Did your scheme work? 7. Did she cook the steak? 8. Did you laugh? 9. Did he look for his passport? 10. Did they invite Mary? 11. Did you wait for her? 12. Did they like the programme? 13. Did you listen to the news? 14. Did you visit uncle Jack? e.g. Let's invite the Thompsons to supper on Sunday, (last Sunday) Oh, no! We invited them to supper last Sunday. 1. Let's visit Uncle Peter, (last month) 2. Let's wash the car. (last week) 3. Well, let's cook a Chinese meal again on Saturday night, (last Saturday night) 4. Well, let's watch boxing, (the day before yesterday) 5. Let's ask Harry and Pat to come over, (only a few days ago) 6. Let's help your father with the garden again, (last weekend) 7. Let's play cards with Mike and Jane again, (last Saturday evening) e.g. We usually rest at the seaside in summer. And last summer? Last summer we didn't rest at the seaside. 1. We watch TV in the evening. And yesterday evening? 2. On Sunday we usually go to the cinema. And this Sunday? 3. Mike usually stays late at work. And on Friday? 4. She usually types many letters. And yesterday? 5. We often visit our parents on the weekend. And last weekend? e.g. You watched TV yesterday, didn't you^ (in the evening) Yes, I did. I watched TV in the evening. 1. You studied German at school, didn't you? (for six years). 2. You translated the text, didn't you? (yesterday morning). 3. Jack finished the work yesterday, didn't he? (yesterday evening) 4. Jack stayed at a hotel, didn't he? (at the "Minsk Hotel") 5. You 141 passed your exam last week, didn't you? (on Monday) 6. Peter visited his parents last week, didn't he? (on Friday) 7. It rained yesterday, didn't it? (for two hours) 8. You started early, didn't you? (at 5 a. m.) 9. Mrs Brown walked in the park in the morning, didn't she? (for an hour) e.g. You didn't watch TV yesterday evening, did you? (listen to the radio. No, I didn't. I listened to the radio. 1. You didn't start early, did you? (late) 2. Jane invited a lot of people to her birthday party, (few) 3. You didn't finish work until 6, did you? (at 8). 4. The teacher didn't ask Mary, did he? (John) 5. Bob phoned you on Friday, didn't he? (on Tuesday) 6. Mike didn't collect coins in his youth, did he? (stamps) 7. You didn't play cards yesterday evening, did you? (chess) e.g. John didn't play football yesterday, did he? (for 2 hours) Yes, he did. He played football for 2 hours.

1. Harry didn't wait for you, did he? (for half an hour) 2. It didn't rain much last autumn, did it? (heavily) 3. The Smiths didn't travel last year, did they? (a lot) 4. Betty didn't invite her friends to her wedding, (all her friends) 5. Mike didn't receive any letters, (two letters) 6. You didn't start the work on time, did you? (at 9 sharp) 7. You didn't talk about Mary, (a lot) 8. She didn't ask for help. (Mary) 9. He didn't often change his job (very often) e.g. I got up at 7 today. And yesterday? (at 6) I got up at 6 yesterday. 1. I did my homework this morning. And Helen? (yesterday evening) 2. Robert became a doctor. And his brother? (a teacher). 3. Alec went to work by car And Bob? (by bus) 4. We had breakfast at 9 today. And yesterday? (at 7) 5. We wrote a dictation on Friday. And on Saturday? (a grammar test). 6. He left the office at 7 today. And last Tuesday? (at 9) 7. We swam in the sea before breakfast. And you? (after breakfast) 8. I woke up at 6 yesterday. And the day before yesterday? (At 7) 9 I made a lot of mistakes in my last dictation. And you? (few) 10. We ate fish for supper. And for breakfast? (meat) 11. We spent our day off in town. And you? (in the country) 12. He slept till 7 today. And yesterday? (till 9) 13. She took two books in the library last week. And this week? (five books). 14. The Browns bought a car last year. And you? (two years ago) 15. I heard this opera last year. And you? (in 1990) 16. Mr Smith came to the office at 9. And Mr White? (at 8) 17. We saw the Greens a month ago. And you? (on Friday morning) 18. Mr White taught us English two years ago. And Mrs Smith? (French) e.g. I met Peter yesterday. So did I, I also met him yesterday.
142

1. We began the work early. 2. Mary brought some records. 3. Helen came at 7. 4. She spo\e French at the reception 5. We went on a picnic at the weekend. 6. My father caugnt a lot of lish. 7. They sold their car last year. 8. I bought that dictionary. 9. I read much in summer. 10. We ate meat for dinner. 11.1 forgot Mary's address. 12. Mike made a lot of mistakes in his dictation. 13. We left at 9.00. 14. I had a big breakfast today. 14. We got home late. 15. Ann lost her umbrella yesterday. 16. Peter did well at maths at school. 16. We sat in the tenth row. 17. They sent him a letter. 18. We wrote a dictation. 18. I met Roger on Friday. 20. I woke up early today. 21. We flew to London. 22.1 gave Mary some books. 23.1 lost my gloves some days ago. 24. I read a lot during my holidays, e.g. We didn't go out last night. Neither did we. We didn't go out last night either. 1. John didn't speak at the meeting. 2. Mike didn't buy anything. 3. We didn't read this book at school. 4. Jack didn't say anything. 5. We didn't swim yesterday. 6. I didn't ring him up on Friday. 7. We didn't write to Peter. 8. I didn't meet Jack there. 9. I didn't listen to the news yesterday. 10. Jane didn't do well at school. e.g. You usually buy your vegetables at your local greengrocer's, don't you? (the market) Yes, but today I bought them at the market. You usually ..., don't you? 1. get out at Leicester Square (Piccadilly); 2. drink water (wine);3. buy apples (pears); 4. meet Paul at the office (at the club); 5. read the Daily Telegraph (The Times); 6. send the documents by post (by hand); 7. tell Peter first (Janet); 8. go with Peter (with Paul) 9. come by bus (by taxi); 10. say too little (too much); 11. sit downstairs (upstairs); 12. take two pieces of toast (three) 13. leave at eight (at nine); 14. write three lines (three pages); 15. ring her up at 7 (at 6); 16. spend a lot of money (little); 17. swim little (much); 18. do the housework in the evening (in the morning). e.g. Did Sheila sing at the party? (beautifully) Yes, she sang beautifully. 1. Did you find her house? (easily) 2. Did Peter speak Spanish? (fluently) 3. Did Mike drive the car? (carefully) 4. Did she do the work alone? (quickly) 5. Did it rain yesterday? (hard) 6. Did Betty learn the poem? (easily) 7. Did she send the telegram? (immediately) 8. Did John play the violin? (very well) 9. Did you enjoy the party? (very much) 10. Did it snow on Sunday? (hard) 11. Did Maradonna play? (very well) e.g. Who did you give the books to? (Peter) I gave the books to Peter. 143 1. Who did he lend the hammer to? (Mr Williams) 2. Who did you send the parcel to? (my parents) 3. Who did you write that letter to? (my cousin) 4. Who did you sell your house to? (Mr Robinson) 5. Who did you speak to? (the chief engineer) 6. Who did you read the letter to? (Peter) 7. Who did she give the typewriter to? (her brother) e.g. When did you go to France? (last year) I went to France last year. 1. When did he wear this tie? (a week ago) 2. When did you speak to the manager? (on Friday) 3. When did you see the Smiths? (last week) 4. When did Mike have a holiday? (in autumn) 5. When did it rain last? (on Tuesday) 6. When did they begin the experiment? (a week ago) 6. When did they buy the house? (two months ago) 7. When did you last go fishing? (on Saturday) 8. When did the train leave? (an hour ago) 9. When did Mike do the homework? (yesterday evening) 10. When did you drive to the country? (on Sunday) 11. When did you have dinner? (an hour ago) 12. When did you get the telegram? (last night) 13. When did you make that bookcase? (last month) 14. When did you lose your umbrella? (the day before yesterday) 15. When did you pay the bill (an hour ago) 16. When did he sell his car? (two months ago) 17. When did she send the parcel? (last week) 18. When did you wake up? (at 7) 18. When did you write the letter? (yesterday afternoon) e.g. Did you make an appointment for Friday afternoon? (Saturday morning) No, I didn't, but I made an appointment for Saturday morning.

1. Did Jeff drink all my whisky? (all your gin) 2. Did you take that big parcel to the post-office? (all the letters) 3. Did you speak to Mr Johnson on the phone? (his secretary) 4. Did Tom ring you up at school? (at home) 5. Did you go to the movies? (theatre) 6. Did Jeff eat all the cheese last night? (ham) 7. Did you buy any ice-cream from the supermarket? (yogurt) 8. Did you spend a lot of money at the supermarket? (at the new dress-shop). 9. Did you swim in the sea? (in the lake) 10. Did you meet any Germans during the holiday? (Spaniards) 11. Did you write any letters? (postcards) 12. Did you eat bananas? (oranges) 13. Did Jack see Mary? (her sister) e.g. Did Ann type the letter? (Mary) No, it was Mary who typed it. 1. Did you keep Bill? (Jack) 2. Did you send the telegram? (Mrs Smith) 3. Did Lucy complain? (Gemma) 4. Did Emma cook the cake? (Helen) 5. Did Robert bring the record-player1 (his brother) 6. Did Johnny break the vase? (his sister) 7. Did you phone
144

Paul? (Kate) 8. Did Tom help? (Dick) 9. Did Mike catch that fish? (Tom) 10. Did your father make that bookcase? (my brother) 11. Did John pay the bill? (Peter) 12 Did Mr Black teach you? (Mr Jackson) 13. Did you write that letter? (Betty) 14. Did Mike take the typewriter? (Victor) Fluency The Blacks Go to London The Blacks live in the suburbs of London Mr Black and his two sons Roger and David work in London and go to London five times a week Today they woke up a few minutes before seven o'clock. They got out of bed and went to the bathroom. They washed and shaved. David had a bath. Then they went to the bedroom and dressed At half past seven they went downstairs for breakfast. At breakfast Roger and David sat opposite each other. Mrs Black sat opposite her husband. After breakfast Mr Black smoked a cigarette and read the newspaper. At twenty-five past eight Mr Black and the boys left the house. Mrs Black went to the gate and said good-bye to them. They walked to the station. They arrived there a few minutes before twenty to nine. Their train got to London at a quarter past nine. /. Listen to the text "The Blacks Go to London" and answer the questions: Do the Blacks live far from London? What time did the Blacks get up today? What did they do in the morning? When did they leave home for work? How did they get to the station? // Say what the Blacks did Ms morning III. What time did you get up today? What time did you have breakfast? When did you leave home for work? How did you get to work? Jill's Old Diary Jill: Look, Steve, Yesterday I found this old diary. It's eight years old. 1983, the year before we got engaged. Steve: I remember. I paid a fortune for the engagement ring! It cost 200 I spent all my savings on it. Did you read the diary? Jill: Yes, I read it all. 1983 was a bad year for me. Listen! On the 2nd of January I fell down and broke my arm. Two months 145 later, in March, I caught flue and was ill for weeks. In June I had a meal at a restaurant and was sick for days. Then in July I drove to Scotland with my sister and a man stole our car. My parents gave me a watch for my birthday and I lost it two days later. I didn't have a good time that year. Steve: But in December you met me at a college party. Jill: Yes, Steve, 1983 was a very bad year for me. /. Listen to the text "Jill's Old Diary" and say whether 1983 was a happy year for Jill. II. Why does Jill think 1983 was a bad year for her? What happened to her in January? in March? in June? in July? in December? ///. Say why 1983 was a bad year for Jill. IV. Was last year a good year for you? And what about this
year.1'

Self check
/. Put the verbs into the correct forms: An Englishman (come) to New York. He (stop) at a hotel and (decide) to send a telegram to his wife. He (go) to the post-office and (do) so. In the telegram he (send) his wife his address. Then he (go) to the cinema. In the evening he (want) to get back to his hotel, but he (remember, not) the name and the address of the hotel. Nobody could help him. So he (send) another telegram to his wife, "Please, send me my address". //. Translate into English: 1. . . 2. . . 3. . . 4. . - . 5. . . 6. . . 7. . . 8. . . 9. . .
QUESTIONS

Illustrative Situations
/. Listen to the dialogues and learn them:

1. Did you ask Kate to go to the pictures with you tonight? Yes, I did, but she refused. Did she really, why? 146 She said she was very tired. 2. When did you last see Doris Dry? On the twenty-ninth of October as far as I remember. Are you going to see her again soon? No, I don't think so. 3. What did you do last weekend? I went to Oxford. Really' How did you go? I went by car. How long did it take? It took about two hours. 4. I had a very good time last night. Did you watch television? No, I didn't. I had a chat with Aunt Emily. 5. Jack is very fond of dancing. But why didn't he go to the dance last night? Because he went to the cinema. What a pity! 6. I saw a friend of yours yesterday. A friend of mine? Yes. Joe Green. Did he leave a message for me? No, he didn't. 7. I'm surprised at what Henry did last night. But what did he do? Don't you know? He gave up his job. Did he really? 8. Did Dennis go to the club yesterday? He wanted but he couldn't. Couldn't he? Why not? Because he had to baby sit (he had to look after the baby). 9. Excuse me ... I lost my handbag this morning. Where did you lose it? On the bus ... I left it on the number 28. Well, you are lucky. The conductor found it. Thank goodness! I was worried. Here it is. He gave it to me an hour ago. 10. Hello, John! I thought you were in Brighton! I was. I drove there on Friday. Yes? ... and I came back on Saturday morning. Oh, why did you come back? Well, I went to a casino and spent all my money. How did you do that? Well, I won a little at first ... and then I lost everything. 147

Practice
/. Ask questions: e.g. Jill often runs for the bus in the morning, (yesterday morning) Did she run for the bus yesterday morning? 1. Jack usually goes to work by car. (today) 2. Steve often stays in his office till 8 p.m. (last night) 3. Jill usually goes shopping on Fridays, (last Friday) 4. Mary usually comes home late on Monday, (last Monday) 5. Victor often takes a taxi to get to work, (today) 6. Mike often phones us. (yesterday) 7. He often visits his parents, (last week) e.g. Mary bought a lot of things, (what) What did she buy? 1. I paid a lot for the computer, (how much) 2. Mrs Robinson taught foreign languages at the University, (what foreign languages) 3. We often went to the cinema last month, (how often) 4. Mike chose several books, (which books) 5. We caught a lot of fish, (how much) 6. Jack said something about the accident, (what) 7. Mary made some spelling mistakes, (how many) 8. We had dinner early today, (what time) 9. I came early today, (when) 10. Mary took somebody's notebook by mistake, (whose) 11. We

heard this opera, (when) 12. I last met Peter in January, (where) 13. Mike left early, (what time) 14. This type-writer cost a lot. (how much) 15. I found my umbrella, (where) 16. I read several books in summer, (what books) 17. We began the work early (when). 18. John lent me some money, (how much) 19. Jack wrote this composition for a long time, (how long) 20. I told Kate about you. (what) 21. He did a lot of work, (how much), e.g. They went to the British Museum, (where). Where else did they go? 1. Mary bought some perfume, (what) 2. Alice and Tim went with Mike, (who) 3. Betty saw that film. (who). 4. I invited Janet to the party, (who) 5. John did the housework, (what). 6. We rested in Yalta several times, (where) 7. I met George at the library, (who) 8. She had coffee for breakfast, (what) e.g. Jane usually writes a lot of letters in the morning. She wrote a lot yesterday. Why didn't she write a lot today? 1. Peter usually catches the 8.30 bus. He caught it yesterday. 2. We usually see Jane on the bus. We saw her yesterday. 3. The boss usually reads all his letters in the morning. He read them yesterday morning. 4. The bell usually rings at 10. It rang at 10 yesterday. 5. The milkman usually brings the milk early. He brought it early yesterday. 6. Jane usually does a lot of work in the morning. She did a lot yesterday morning. 7. Peter usually reads the paper in the morning. He read it yesterday. 148
Questions with "How long ago?"

A. Arthur thought the London express left at 11.10. In fact it left at 11.05. It left before he got to the station. "How long ago did it leave?" he wants to know. "Five minutes ago, at 11.05" is the answer. Questions: What time is it now? What happened before Arthur got to the station? When did he think the train left? When did the train leave? How long ago did it leave? B. It is 10 o'clock in the morning. Richard West is at work. He got up at 6 this morning. He had breakfast at 7 and came to work at 8. Richard got up four hours ago, he had breakfast three hours ago and came to work two hours ago. Questions: What time is it' How long ago did Richard come to work? How long ago did he get up and have breakfast? /. Ask questions with "how long ago". Answer the questions. Prompts: Mike/get to the party; you/have lunch; Richard/return; she/send the letter; the boss/come to work; the ship/start; they/begin the experiment; the shop/close; Jack/leave; you/get home; she/get up; you/turn on the television. //. Study the situations. Make sentences with "only ... ago" for them: Situation: The lesson started at 9 and it is now 9.01. "You're late again" the teacher says. What does the student answer? Answer: But the lesson started only a minute ago! 1. Peter wants to leave the cinema. He and Jane came at 7, and it is 7.30 now. What does she say? 2. A friend invites you to lunch. You had lunch at 12 and it is 1 now. What do you say? 3. Mary's little boy is hungry again. He had a sandwich at 5. It is 5.15 now. What does she say? 4. The plane for Moscow left at I, and it is 1.05 now. Can you still catch it? Why not? 5. A customer telephoned the manager at 12. He was not there. At 12.35 he came back. What did his secretary say? 6. Your friend went out at 2. At 2.05 you got to his hotel. What does the hotel clerk say when you ask for him (your friend)? 7. Tony's shoes are worn out. He bought them in January and it is only February now. Why is he angry? 8. Jill met a soldier at a dance on Friday. Now it is Sunday, only 2 days later and she wants to marry him. What does her mother say? ///. Listen to the texts. Ask and answer questions. A. Julia and her boy-friend are in a hurry. The film started fifteen minutes ago. They do not want to miss too much of it. It is 149 one of Charles Kay's old horror films. It was made 10 years ago. Julia doesn't remember but she saw the film on television a few months ago. B. It is 6 o'clock now. The store closed half an hour ago. All the shoppers left the store half an hour ago. The detective watched them. Then the salespeople counted their money and went home, too. The last one left fifteen minutes ago. That was at 5.45. IV. Ask each other questions with "how long ago?" Questions with "When did you first (last) see him?" A. Yesterday Mike was at the theatre. He heard "Carmen". It wasn't the first time he heard it. Peter knows about it. He asks: "When did you first hear it?" "Three years ago", Mike answers. Questions: When was Mike at the theatre? What opera did he hear? When did he first hear it? B. Jane used to come to the library very often last month but she doesn't now. Mike asks Peter: "When did you last see her?" "A week ago", is Peter's answer. Questions: Did Jane often come to the library last month? What does Mike ask Peter? /. Make your own dialogues. Do it as in the example. e.g. see Peter/ on Sunday/yesterday I last saw Peter on Sunday. When did you last see him?

 Yesterday. 1. speak to the boss/a week ago/this morning; 2. phone Richard/yesterday/on Tuesday; 3. write to him/two weeks ago/the day before yesterday; 4. go to the cinema/a month ago/on Sunday; 5. meet Mary/on Tuesday/on Friday, e.g. go to Paris/in 1987/in 1990 1 first went to Paris in 1987. When did you first go to Paris? In 1990. 1. see this film/five years ago/in 1985; 2. read "War and Peace"/at school/at the Institute; 3. fly/at the age of 20/when I was 10; 4. hear this opera/in my childhood/5 years ago; 5. visit the art museum/last year/two years ago; 6. go to Rome/in 1986/in 1981. 150

//. Answer the questions: When did you last go to the theatre? When did you first fly? When did you last see your friend? When did your friend last write to you? When did you last miss your English class? When did you first travel by ship? "Who did that?" type questions A. Richard West is going to get a new job. He wants to keep it secret for a time but yesterday one of the secretaries told him she knew he was leaving. "Who told you?" he asked her. Questions: What is Richard going to do? What did one of the secretaries tell him? What was his question? B. Mary thinks sweets are very bad for children's teeth. She never gives her son any. Yesterday her son came home with some chocolate. "Where did you get that?" she asked. "Someone gave it to me", he answered."Who gave it to you?" She asked. Questions: Why doesn't Mary give her child sweets? What happened yesterday? What did Mary ask her son? /. Ask questions for these situations: 1. Someone said Peter and Mary got married yesterday. 2. Someone ate your sandwiches while you were out. 3. Someone gave Jill a beautiful diamond ring. 4. Someone got into your car a moment ago and drove it away. 5. Someone saw you at the theatre yesterday. 6. Someone phoned James. Questions "Who phoned Mary?" contrasted with "Who did Mary phone?" A. Some minutes ago a man phoned Mary. You ask: "Who phoned you?" B. Some minutes ago Mary phoned someone. You ask: "Who did you phone?" /. Ask questions for these situations: 1. She sent a lot of books to someone. 2. Someone sent her a lot of flowers. 3. She went out with someone last night. 4. He went to dinner with someone 5. Someone waited for her. 6. He waited for someone. 7. She talked to someone this evening. 8. Someone met her after work. 9. Someone saw her with a man. 10. Someone gave her a lot of money. 11. She gave her dictionary to someone. 12. Someone broke the window. 151
"What did you do that for?" questions

It was very hot in the office yesterday. One of the other secretaries got up and closed the window. Jane could not understand this. "What did you do that for?" she asked.

/. Make questions of this type: 1. You/go there. 2. Mike/say that. 3. Betty/bring them. 4. James/do that. 5 You/send that letter. 6. You/invite him. 7. He/buy that car. 8 They/kill him.
Alternative and Disjunctive Questions

/. Ask for additional information: e.g. I had dinner at 2. (at home or at the canteen) Did you have dinner at home or at the canteen? 1. Jack went to Moscow last Saturday, (by plane or by train). 2. He took some books from the library. (English or Russian). 3. Jane made several mistakes in the test, (spelling or grammar mistakes). 4. She spent her holidays in the Caucasus, (in Sochi or Sukhumi). 5. Mike took up tennis, (table tennis or big tennis). 6. Mrs Brown went shopping this morning, (after lunch or before lunch). e.g. Mary got a letter yesterday, (from her parents). She got a letter from her parents, didn't she? 1. My son took his exams in May. (four exams). 2. We met John last week (on Tuesday). 3. Mike got a letter yesterday, (from his parents). 4. We came home late, (after midnight). 5. Mr White taught me at school. (English). 6. Roger found his umbrella yesterday, (in the gym). e.g. There was a conference in London last month, (not, take part) But you didn't take part in it, did you?

 Yes, I did. (No, I didn't) 1. I had a party at my place on Saturday, (not, invite Mike). 2. I wrote a letter to him some days ago. (not, send). 3. I was at the Baltic Sea this summer, (not, swim much). 4.1 took my English exam on Friday, (not, pass). 5.1 saw Robert yesterday, (not, speak to him). 6. There was a picnic last weekend, (not, join it).
Interrogative-Negative Sentences

/. Express surprise. e.g. a) James sent me a parcel yesterday. 152 Did he? (? ?) b) Donald didn't come. Didn't he? (?) 1. Betty didn't phone me yesterday 2. Robert left the house at 4 a.m. 3. Mike didn't pass the exam. 4. Alice didn't invite Peter to her birthday party. 5. My husband didn't like the performance. 6. I spent all the money on books 7. Betty bought that expensive dress yesterday. e.g. I spoke to Mr Smith, (his wife). Didn't you speak to his wife, too? ( ?) 1. I got a ticket for Mary. (Jane) 2. I told Helen (Steve) 3. I kept a seat for Bob. (Jack) 4. I met Arthur. (George) 5. I asked James. (Mary) 6. I helped Bill. (Roger) 7. I invited Margaret. (Linda) 8. I wrote to Mike. (Donald) 9. I talked to Peter, (his wife) 10. I sent a card to Ann. (Kate)
Complex Sentences with Object Clauses

/. Respond to the following: e.g. Did Mike enjoy the film? I don't know if he enjoyed it. Perhaps, he did. 1. Did Mary go out last night' 2. Did Robert leave early? 3. Did Victor find his umbrella? 4. Did they buy the car? 5. Did the TV set cost a lot? 6. Did Mike send a telegram? 7. Did Lucy know him before? e.g. How much did they spend? I've no idea how much they spent. 1. Where did you put the vase? 2. Why did Helen miss the lecture? 3. What present did he choose? 4. When did he send the letter? 5. What language did Mr. Smith teach? 6. How much did Peter pay for the car? 7. When did Steve and Jill get married? 8. What did Jack tell Peter? 9. Who brought the tape recorder? 10. Where did they drive at the weekend? 11. Why didn't he invite Lucy? //. Make short dialogues using the prompt words: e.g. you/first/ hear "Carmen" When did you first hear "Carmen?" I don't remember when I first heard it. 1. See this film; 2. meet Mary; 3. hear "Aida"; 4. go to Moscow; 5. visit the art museum; 6. read this novel. 153 Fluency Ron Marston is Awful Jane: What's Ron Marston like, Pauline? Pauline: He's awful! He telephoned me four times yesterday and and three times the day before yesterday. He telephoned the office yesterday morning and yesterday afternoon. My boss answered the telephone. Jane: What did your boss say to him? Pauline: He said: "Miss White is typing letters. She can't speak to you now!" Then I arrived home at six o'clock yesterday evening. He telephoned again. But I didn't answer the phone! Jane: Did he telephone again last night? Pauline: Yes, he did. He telephoned at nine o'clock. Jane: What did you say to him? Pauline: I said "This is Pauline's mother. Please, don't telephone my daughter again". Jane: Did he telephone again? Pauline: No, he didn't. /. Listen to the conversation "Ron Marston is Awful" and say whether Pauline loves Ron Marston or not. Why do you think so? II. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the questions Jane asked her friend. III. Role-play the conversation. A Damaged Telephone Daisy: Dunston 238282. Donald: Hello, Daisy. This is Donald. Daisy: Oh, hello, darling. Donald: What did you do yesterday, Daisy? You forgot our date, didn't you? Daisy: Well, it rained all day, Donald, and I have a bad cold, so I decided to stay at home! Donald: Did you? I telephoned twenty times and nobody answered. Daisy: Oh, the telephone was damaged. They repaired it today. Donald: What did David do yesterday? Did he and Dotty go dancing? Daisy: No, they stayed at home and played cards with the children. Donald: And what did you do? Did you play cards, too? Daisy: No. Sidney and I listened to the radio and studied.

What did you do yesterday, Donald? 154 Donald: I've just told you, Daisy. I tried to phone you twenty times. /. Listen to the dialogue "A Damaged Telephone"and answer the questions: Why didn't Daisy keep her date yesterday? What did she do? What did David and Dotty do yesterday? How many times did Donald phone Daisy? //. Act out the dialogue. Shirley's Day Off Shirley enjoyed her day off yesterday. She got up late, went jogging in the park, came home, took a long shower and had a big breakfast. In the afternoon she went to the movies with her sister, and in the evening she had dinner with her parents. After dinner they sat in the living-room and talked. Shirley drove home at 10.00 and went to bed. She had a very pleasant day off yesterday. /. Listen to the text and ask your partner questions about Shirley's day off. Ask him (her) whether Shirley had a pleasant day off yesterday; what she did in the morning; whether she went to the movies yesterday; who she went to the movies with; if she visited her parents; how they spent the time together; what time she drove home. //. Tell about Shirley's day off. III. Situation: Imagine you are Shirley's triend. You phoned her several times yesterday but she was out. She had a pleasant day yesterday. Ask her where she was and what she did. IV. Tell about a day off you enjoyed. V. Ask your friend how he spent his day off. Self check /. Put the verbs into the correct forms: A. Mrs Brown's grandfather (live) with her and her husband. Every morning he (go) for a walk in the park and (come) home at half past twelve for his lunch.

155
But one morning a police car (stop) outside Mrs Brown's house at 12 o'clock, and two policemert (help) Mr Brown get out. One of them (say) to Mrs Brown "The poor old man (lose) his way in the park and (telephone) to us for help so we (send) a car to bring him home". Mrs Brown (be) very surprised but she (thank) the policemen and they (leave). "But, Grandfather", she then (say), "You have been to that park nearly every day for twenty years. How you (lose) your way?" The old man (smile), (close) one eye and (say), "I quite (lose, not) my way. I just (get) tired and I (want, not) to walk home!" Ask: who the grandfather lived with; where he went every day; what time he came home for lunch; what happened one day; what one of the policemen said; if the grandfather really ' lost his way; why the grandfather telephoned the police. B. Arthur (be) back from London. He (go) there this morning. Deborah (be) at the station to meet him. "You (have) a good time in London?" she wants to know. "Yes, I ... , and I (meet) an old friend on the train this morning." "The train (get) to London on time?" "No, it ... . It (be) late again." C. Jack (be) very fond of football. But why he (go, not) to the football match yesterday? He (be) away on business. He often (travel) on business? Once or twice a month. Where he (go) last month? I (know, not), I (be) afraid. //. Translate into English: 1. ? 3 . 2. ? , . . . ? 3. ? . 4. ? . ? . , . 5. ? , . 6. ? . ? . 7. ? . . 8. ? , . 9. ? , . 10. , ? , 10 . 11. ? 10000 . 12. ? , . 13. 156

, . , . 14. ? , .
BE: PAST

Illustrative Situations
/. Listen to the dialogues and learn them: 1. Jim was very busy last night. Was he really? Yes, he was. He had some typing to do. Were you busy, too? No, I wasn't. 2. You were at the cinema yesterday, weren't you? Yes, we were. Was the film interesting? No, it was boring. Was Steve at the cinema too? No, he was in the country. Were there many people at the cinema? Quite a lot. 3. A Mr Green called when you were out. A Mr Green? Was he short and fat? Yes, he was. Then he was Mr Robert Green. The Robert Green? Yes, Robert Green is a famous atomic scientist.

Practice /. Answer the questions.

e.g. Where is Joe? He was in the garden a minute ago. Perhaps he is still there. 1. Where is Mary? (dining-room) 2. Where is Sarah? (shop) 3. Where are Mr and Mrs Hunt? (hotel) 4. Where's Peter? (laboratory) 5. Where are Sheila and Jane' (newsagent's) 6. Where's Simon? (gym) 7. Where are the boys? (yard) 8. Where is Alice? (library) 9. Where are the children? (park)

//. Say what the weather was like last year. e.g. January/cold It was cold in January 157 1. February/wet; 2. March/dry; 3. April/nice, 4. May/warm; 5. June/sunny; 6. July/hot; 7. August/pleasant; 8. September/ /beautiful; 9. October/nice; 10 November/wet; 11. December/ /cold. /// Say that this wasn't true some time ago: e.g. Miss Black is at work today, (yesterday) But she wasn't at work yesterday. 1. Today I am late, (yesterday) 2. This summer my parents are at the seaside, (last summer) 3. Tonight the programme is good, (last night) 4. Today I am busy, (yesterday) 5. This summer is warm, (last summer) 6. They are at home this evening, (yesterday evening) 7. The children are at school today, (the day before yesterday) IV. Ask and answer questions, e.g. Where were you at one o'clock? I was at home. Prompts: five past two? school ten past three? work quarter past four? the pub half past five? the cinema six? the supermarket e.g. When were you in England? I was there in January. Prompts: Europe? Febrary Mexico? March London? April Spain? May Holland? August Italy? December e.g. Was your sister home on Tuesday morning? Yes, she was. (No, she wasn't) Prompts: you/there/four o'clock?

he/England/November? it/cold/January? she/at school/yesterday? they/at work/five thirty? it/hot/June> you/New York/February V. Teacher: I was in class yesterday. Were you, Mike? Student l:Yes, I was. .: Were you'in class. Peter? 158 St. 2.: Yes, I was. .; Helen, were Peter an ! Mike in class yesterday" St. 3.: Yes, they were. .: And you? Were you in class, too? St. 3.: No, I wasn't. I was ill. The students take over the role of teacher and make their own dialogues. Prompts: be late for the class/today be home/yesterday/at 9 p.m. at the dance/last Saturday at a concert/on Friday on holiday/in July free/on Friday evening busy/yesterday Teacher: I was on holiday in July. When were you on holiday, Alice? St.l: I was on holiday in August. .: And you? When were you on holiday, Jack? St.2.: I was on holiday in October. The students take over the role of teacher. Prompts: at the cinema/last; in Moscow/last; at the seaside; at the market; in the country. Teacher: Last night at 9 p.m. I was home. Where were you, Victor? St.l.: I was also at home. .: Where was your brother at that time? St.l.: He was at the theatre. The students take the role of teacher Prompts: at 8 a.m./today; at 6 p.m./yesterday; during the summer holidays; last weekend; on Friday evening; on Sunday. VI. Make up short dialogues. Use the prompts. ' e.g. you/home/yesterday afternoon. You were home yesterday afternoon, weren't you? Yes, I was. (No, I wasn't) You/at the lecture/in the morning your parents/in the country/on Sunday Jack/at school/in the afternoon Lucy/at the library/yesterday you/late for the lecture/today e.g. Jane/at school/on Monday Jane wasn't at school on Monday, was she? No, she wasn't. (Yes, she was) 1. You/at the movies/ yesterday; 2. Mike/at work/on Wednesday; 3. Betty/at your party/yesterday; 4. Peter/at the theatre/on Sunday; 5. Mary and Susan/at the skating-rink/on Saturday; 6. You/present at the meeting. VII. Express solidarity: e.g. I was busy yesterday. And you? So was I. Mary wasn't present. And Jack> Neither was Jack. 1. The Baxters weren't abroad this summer. And the Thompsons? 2. I was late today. And Victor? 3. We were at the theatre on Sunday. And you? 4. Jack wasn't interested in the exhibition. And Mary? 5. I was very tired after the lesson. And you? 6. We weren't in the country last weekend. And you? 7. I was at home yesterday evening. And Peter? 8 Susan wasn't at the seaside this summer. And Helen? 9. Jack wasn't at the meeting yesterday And Mike? 10. My children were at school this morning. And yours? VllI. Express surprise: e.g. Mary was upset. Was she really? e.g Betty wasn't in when I called. Wasn't she? 1. Steve was out. 2. The children weren't interested in the circus. 3. Mary and Steve weren't at work on Tuesday. 4. We were disappointed. 5. The children were happy. 6. Mary wasn't pleased with our work. 6. Roger was absent. 7. The train was full. 8. Mike was late. 9. Jane wasn't present. 10. My father was angry. IX. Respond to the following statements: e.g. Betty was on time. (Nick) I wonder whether Nick was on time. 1. Jane was in the south in summer, (her sister) 2. Mike was at the football match yesterday. (Victor) 3. Jack was at the lecture. (Mary) 4. I was pleased. (Helen) 5. Mr Smith was at the car race on Sunday, (his son) 6. Jane was

present. (Helen) What ... like? /. Listen to the text. Peter North is a journalist. He was in Mexico City last week, but he is in London now. He is talking to a friend. His friend wants to know about the city, the weather, the food, etc. These are the questions he asks. What was Mexico City like? 160 What was the weather like? What were the people like? What was the food like? Questions: What does Peter North do' Where was he last week? What questions does his friend ask him?

//. Think of questions for situations like this: Your friend went to the theatre last night. You ask: What was the play like5 1. July can be a very fine month in Ireland. Sometimes, however, there is a lot of rain. Your friend was in Ireland last July. 2. You want to know about Dublin. Was it beautiful, ugly or what? 3. You also want to hear about the traffic. Was it heavy, light, etc.? 4. Some people say the Irish are very friendly. Others say the opposite. You want to know your friend's impression. 5. You want to know about the hotel he was at. Was it good, bad, comfortable, etc? 6. You want to know about the prices. Were they high or low? 7. You want to know about the theatres. Were they good, bad or what? 8. You want to know about the girls. Were they beautiful, ugly or what? There was (were) ... There was a small demonstration in Hyde Park on Sunday. There were some demonstrators and some policemen in the park, but only a few. There were not any soldiers, but there were a few tourists. There were also some reporters there; in fact, there were quite a few. There were also some birds in the trees but they were not interested in the demonstration. Questions: Was there a demonstration or a meeting in Hyde Park on Sunday' Were there many demonstrators in the park5 There were a few policemen in the park, weren't there? There weren't any soldiers, were there? Who else was there in the park5 Were the birds interested in the demonstration? // Cover the questions and ask a) general b) special c) alternative d) disjunctive questions on the text. ///. Tell about the demonstration in Hyde Park. IV. Tell about a meeting (or) a demonstration you attended some time ago. V. Situations: 1. Your friend was at the cinema yesterday. At the moment you are asking him questions. Prompts: the film/interesting? a lot of people/at the cinema? where/your seats? a concert/before the film? 2. Your friend has come back from France. He has spent a year in Paris. You want to know about his trip. Prompts: Paris/ like? the weather/like/in summer? much rain/in summer? it/cold/in winter? much snow/in winter?
Fluency Where were you yesterday?

Detective: Now, Mr Briggs ... where were you yesterday? Briggs: Yesterday? What time? Detective: At two o'clock. Where were you at two o'clock? Briggs: I was at home. Detective: You weren't at home, you were in central London. Briggs: No, I wasn't! I was at home! Ask my girlfriend! She was with me! Detective: Well, we're going to speak to her later. Where is she now? Briggs: Oh ... I don't know ... Detective: O.K. ... now, where were you on January 12th? Briggs: January the 12th? Detective: Yes, it was Wednesday. Briggs: I can't remember. Detective: You were in Manchester. Briggs: Oh no, I wasn't. Detective: Oh yes, you were. Briggs: Oh no, I wasn't ... I was in prison in January. Detective: Oh! /. What questions did the detective ask Mr Briggs? What were Mr Brigg's answers? III. Act out the conversation. IV. Ask your friend where he was at 10 a.m., at 12 a.m., at ..., at 7 p.m. yesterday.
Shopping

Mrs. Johnson: Hello, Mrs Williams. Were you at the butcher's? Mrs Williams: butcher's, too? 162 Mrs Johnson: No, I wasn't. I was at the greengrocer's. How's

Yes, I was. Were you at the

Jimmy today? Mrs Williams: He's very well, thank you. Mrs Johnson: Was he absent from school last week? Mrs Williams: Yes, he was. He was absent on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday. How are you all keeping? Mrs Johnson: Very well, thank you. We're going to spend three days in the country. We're going to stay at my mother's for the weekend. Mrs Williams: Friday, Saturday and Sunday in the country! Aren't you lucky! /. Listen to the conversation between Mrs Williams and Mrs Johnson and ask: where Mrs Williams was; whether Mrs Johnson was also at the butcher's; how Mrs William's son Peter is; why and when he was absent from school; how the Johnsons are going to spend their weekend. //. Act out the conversation. III. Ask your friend where he was at a) 5 p.m. yesterday; b) on Sunday morning; c) last night. IV. Ask your friend when he was a) at the cinema; b) in the country; c) at his parents'. V. Situation: You are going home from the library. On your way you meet a friend of yours who was at the dentist's. You stop and have a chat.
Holidays

Donald: Hello, John! Where were you last month? John: Oh, I was on holiday. Donald: Oh, really? . . but you were on holiday in January. John: Yes, I was in Switzerland in January. Donald: Where were you last month? John: I was in Florida. Donald: Florida! What was it like? John: Fantastic! The weather was beautiful... the sea was warm. Donald: What was the hotel like? John: Excellent! There was a swimming-pool and private beach. There were three restaurants and two bars. Donald: What were the people like? John: They were very friendly. 163
Donald: John: Donald: John: Was your wife with you? No, she wasn't. She never comes with me on holiday. What about the children? Were they with you? No, they weren't. They were with their grandparents.

. / Listen to the conversation "Holidays" and say whether John enjoyed his holidays. II. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the questions Donald asked his friend.
III. Act out the conversation.

IV. Ask your friend for additional information about his last holiday:
I was at the seaside this summer. I stayed at a hotel. A Car Race There is a car race near our town every year. In 1991 there was a very big race. There were hundreds of people there. My wife and I were at the race. Our friends, Julia and Jack, were there, too. There were twenty cars in the race. There were English cars, French cars, German cars, Italian cars, American cars and Japanese cars. It was an exciting race. The winner was Billy Stewart. He was in car number fifteen. Five other cars were just behind him. On the way home my wife said to me: "Don't drive so quickly! You're not Billy Stewart!"

/. Listen to the text "A Car Race" and answer the questions:
Was there a big race in 1990 or in 1991? The Browns were at the race, weren't they? How many cars were there at the race? What cars were there? What was the race like? Who was the winner? In what car was he? //. Ask your own questions on the text.

III. Tell about the race.

IV. Interview your friend. Ask when he was at a race last; what kind of race it was; if there were a lot of people at the race; if he was alone or with his friends or relatives, if the race was exciting; who the winner was. Tom and Susan Get Married Tom and Susan got married this morning. They had a party this afternoon. Tom's parents were there and so were Susan's. Everybody ate cake, drank champagne and had a good time Only Tom's mother did not eat or drink very much. She was unhappy. Frank made a speech. /. Listen to the text. Ask and answer questions on the text. II. Retell the text. A Scary Night Lucy was home alone last night for the first time. Nobody was there, and she was frightened. Her brother Fred wasn't home. He was at a baseball game. Her brother Mike wasn't home. He was out on a date. Her parents weren't home either. They were at a meeting at her school. Lucy was afraid to be alone in the house. She decided to call her friends and invite them to come over and visit.

Unfortunately, her friends weren't home. Not one of them. She called her friend Patty, but Patty wasn't home. She was at the movies. She called her friend Melissa but Melissa wasn't home. She was at the library. She called her friends Jane and Susan but Jane and Susan weren't home either. They were at a concert. Lucy was very upset. Her family wasn't home. Her friends weren't home. Even her dog and her cat weren't home! They were across the street in the neighbour's yard. What a scary night!

/. Listen to the text "A Scary Night" and say why Lucy was frightened and upset last night. II. Listen to the text again and ask all types of questions on the text. Answer the questions.
Prompts: Fred baseball game Patty movies Mike date Melissa library parents meeting Jane, Susan concert

///. Say why Lucy was frightened and upset last night. IV. Say where you and the members of your family were
a) in the morning (at 8, at 10, at 11); b) in the afternoon (at 2, at 4, at 5); c) in the evening (at 6, at 8). 165

Self check /. Put the verbs into the correct forms: A. Mr Jones (be) very angry with his wife and she (be) angry with her husband. For several days they (speak, not) to each other at all. One evening Mr Jones (be) very tired when he (come) back from work, so he (go) to bed soon after dinner. Of course, he (say, not) anything to Mrs Jones before he (go) upstairs. Mrs Jones (wash) the dinner things and (do) some sewing. When she (go) up to bed much later than her husband, she (find) a piece of paper on the small table near the bed. On it (be) the words: "Mother. Wake me up at 7 a.m. Father". When Mr Jones (wake) up the next morning, it (be) nearly 8 a.m. On the small table near his bed he (see) another piece of paper. He (take) it and (read) these words, "Father. Wake up. It is 7 a.m. Mother". B. Julia (have) lunch with a friend. "You (be) late again this morning?" her friend wants to know. "Yes, I (be) and the manager (be) in the office, too!" "Oh, he (see) you?" "Yes, he ... . He (see) me when I (come) in." C. You (be) at home at 9 a.m. yesterday? No, I (be, not). Where you (be)? I (be) at the library. When you (be) back home? At 12 o'clock. I (ring) you up at about I o'clock but you (answer, not) the telephone. I (be) at the baker's. I (come) back soon. //. Translate into English; 1. ?, . 2. ? . 3. ? . 4. ? , . 5. , . 6. , ? , . 7. , . , . 8. . ? 9. . . 10. . . 11. , ? , . 166
USED TO + INFINITIVE Remembering with Regret

Two old men are talking about the days gone by. 1st old man: The beer's just like water. They don't make it as strong as they used to. 2nd old man: No, things aren't what they used to be, are they? 1st old man: The pubs aren't any good nowadays. 2nd old man: No, but they used to be good when we were young. 1st old man: Trouble is that the young people don't work hard. 2nd old man: No, but they used to work hard when we were young.
Remembering with Pleasure

Bernard Platt and Mabel Morrison are looking at an old photograph album and talking about old times. Platt: Here is a photo of us dancing together. Mabel: Oh, yes, I remember how we used to dance together. Platt: Oh, look! Do you remember that game of cricket? Mabel: Oh, yes, I remember how we used to play cricket. /. Listen to the conversations, read them and act them out. II. Remember something with regret (with pleasure). III. Answer the questions using the word combination "used to": e.g. Do you go to the theatre? (I was in London) Not now, but I used to go to the theatre when I was in London. 1. Is he nervous? (He was young) 2. Does she smoke? (She was at University) 3. Do you travel in Europe? (I

worked for an International company) 4. Has he got a lot of money? (He was a film actor) 5. Does he like concerts? (He was here last year) 6. Is she beautiful? (She was young) 7. Do you swim much? (I lived at the seaside) 8. Do you get up early? (I was a student) 9. Do you read a lot? (I was at school)
Family Affairs

Alice: Tom! You never talk to me nowadays. Tom: What did you say? Alice: And you never listen to me either. 167 Tom: Pardon? Alice: You used to take me out, you used to buy me presents, and you used to remember my birthday. Tom: But I always remember your birthday, darling. Alice: Do you? Well, it was yesterday. I'm going home to mother! Questions: Why is Alice angry with Tom? What did Tom use to do some time ago? At an Exhibition Maggie and Steve are at an exhibition of pictures of Victorian London. Maggie: Look at those beautiful dresses. The Victorians certainly knew how to dress. Steve: Maybe, but the poor didn't use to dress well. Maggie: I expect they had a marvellous banquet before the ball. The Victorians knew how to eat. Steve: Maybe, but the poor didn't use to eat well. Maggie: Even the men had beautiful clothes. Steve: Maybe, but the poor didn't use to dress well. Questions: Where are Maggie and Steve? What does Maggie say about the Victorians? What does Steve answer? Open dialogue Talk to Maggie about the things you used to do when you were younger. Maggie: I used to go to school in a little village in Sussex. Where did you first go to school? Student: ... . Maggie: Oh! What did you use to do in your free time? Anything interesting? Student:...... Maggie: Mmm. Did you? I used to go riding. Did you? Student:..... Maggie: Really? And I used to collect wild flowers. Did you use to collect anything when you were young? Student:..... Maggie: Oh! Where did you use to go for your holidays in the summer? Student:..... Maggie: We used to go camping in France. Did you use to go camping? Student:..... Maggie: What about the winter? What did you use to do then? Student:...... 168
SIMPLE PRESENT AND SIMPLE PAST

Habits Karen writes a lot. Right now she's writing a letter to her sister Doris in Seattle. Yesterday she wrote a letter to her friend Mary in Detroit. Tomorrow she's going to write a letter to her friend Miguel in Mexico City. People always ask Karen, "Why do you write so often?" She usually answers, "It's very simple. I like to write". /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: Karen writes a lot, doesn't she? What is she doing right now? Who did she write to yesterday? Who is she going to write to tomorrow? Why does Karen write so often? //. Make up your own stories. Begin like that: 1. My sister reads a lot ... 2. Victor travels a lot ... Very Good Friends: East or West Tom and Janet are very good friends. They grew together, they went to high school together, and they went to college together. Now Tom lives in San Diego and Janet lives in Philadelphia. Even though they live far apart, they're still very good friends. They write to each other very often. He writes her letters about life on the West Coast, and she writes him letters about life on the East Coast. They never forget each other's birthdays. Last year he sent her a silver bracelet and she sent him a silk necktie. Tom and Janet also help each other very often. Last year he lent her money when she was in the hospital, and she gave him advice when he lost his job. Tom and Janet like each other very much, they were always very good friends, and they still are. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions:

What is the life story of Tom and Janet? Where do they live? Do they still keep up their friendship? In what way? How did they help each other? //. Have you got a good friend? Do you often see each other? When did you last see your friend? How did you spend your time? Did your friend ever help you? And what about you?
169

Robbie and the Rebels ,, (ill: Good morning, Shirley ... Shirley: Hello, Jill. Jill: Oh, I'm tired this morning. Shirley: Are you? Why? Jill: Well, I went to a concert last night. Shirley: Which concert? Jill: The pop concert, the one at the Town Hall. Shirley: Oh, which group did you see? Jill: I saw "Robbie and the Rebels" ... they're a new group. Shirley: Are they good? Jill: Hmm ... they usually play well but last night they played badly. Shirley: Is Robbie a good singer? Jill: Oh, yes, he usually sings well. Shirley: Did he sing well last night? Jill: No, he didn't ... he sang very badly. Shirley: What about the group? Jill: Oh, the guitarist played beautifully ... but the drummer was loud. Shirley: Yes, pop drummers always play loudly. Jill: I know! I had a headache after the concert. Shirley: Hmm ... I never go to pop concerts. I prefer classical music. /. Listen to the conversation "Robbie and the Rebels" and answer the questions: Why is Jill tired? Which concert did she go to? Which group did she see? How do they usually play? How did they play last night? How does Robbie usually sing? How did he sing last night? How did the guitarist play? Do pop drummers always play loudly? Did Jill have a headache before the concert? Does Shirley prefer pop music or classical music? //. Role-play the conversation. III. Say a few words about the concert you heard last. What do you think of it? Did you enjoy it?

Self check
/. Use the necessary tense forms: A. It (be) two weeks before Christmas and Mrs Smith (be) very busy. She (buy) a lot of Christmas cards to send to her friends and to her husband's friends and (put) them on the table 170 in the living-room. Then, when her husband (come) from work, she (say) to him, "Here (be) the Christmas cards for our friends, here (be) some stamps, a pen and our book of addresses. Will you please write the cards while I am cooking? Mr Smith (say, not) anything, but (walk) out of the living-room and (go) to his study. Mrs Smith (be) very angry with him but (say, not) anything either. Then a minute later he (come) back with a box full of Christmas cards. All of them (have) addresses and stamps on them. "These (be) from last year", he (say). "I (forget) to post them". B. I (get) home at 6 o'clock in the evening. My wife (open) the door for me. "Good evening, Ted", she (say). "Good evening, my dear!" I (answer). "You (be) tired?" she (ask). "No," I (answer), "I (be, not) tired, but I (be) very hungry". "Dinner (be) ready", she (say). I (take) off my coat and (sit) down. My wife (sit) beside me. "You (catch) your train this morning?" she (ask). "No", I (answer). "I (miss) it. I (run) all the way to the station and (get) there four minutes past nine". "Which train you (catch)?" "The 9.15" "What time you (get) to the office?" she (ask). "At 10 o'clock!" I (answer). "At ten o'clock?" my wife (exclaim), "the boss (be, not) angry?" "No, he (be, not) at the office", I (say). "He (arrive) at 10.30. He (miss) his train, too".

//. Translate into English: 1. . . . 2. 5 , . 3. ? . 4. ? , . 5. ? 3 . 6. ? . 7. ? 1988 . 8. . 9. ? . 10. ? . 11. ? . 12. 7 . , . 8 , , . . . 8 . 13. ? . . 14. . . 15. ? . 16. ? ,

171

17. . . 18. , . . 19. . . 20. . . 21. ? 6 . 22. ? , . 23. . UNIT 16 TOPIC: WORKING DAY. BIOGRAPHY GRAMMAR: SIMPLE PAST, REVIEW OF TENSES
PA RT A TEXT. JEFF FULLER GOES TO CHICAGO

Jeff Fuller is a salesman. He has a wife and three children and lives in San Francisco. He travels a lot. Every week he goes to New York or Washington or Chicago. He brings home presents for his wife and children. Last week he had to go to Chicago on business. He left San Francisco on Monday morning. He got to Chicago at noon. He went to the Park Hotel and had lunch. In the afternoon he talked to some businessmen. That evening he called his friend, Carlos, and they had dinner at the hotel. On Tuesday he worked all morning. In the afternoon he went shopping. He bought toy cars for the children. He got a present for his wife, too. Tuesday evening he was alone. At 7.30 he called his wife. He talked to the children, too. Then he was happy. On Wednesday morning he got up at 6.00. He took the 8.00 plane to San Francisco. He didn't want breakfast on the plane, but he drank some coffee and read the paper. He got to San Francisco at 9.30. He took a taxi and went home. His wife and daughter were at home. They were glad to see him and get their presents. After breakfast Mr Fuller went to his office. When he entered the office he found a number of business letters on his desk. Mr Fuller sat down and began to look through the letters. Suddenly the telephone rang. Mr Fuller took up the receiver and heard the voice of his chief. The chief asked Mr Fuller to come over to his office and discuss the results of the trip. 172 After the talk with the chief Mr Fuller came back to his office and continued his work. At 1 o'clock he went out for lunch. In the afternoon he had several visitors. At 5 o'clock he took part in a meeting and made a report on his trip to Chicago. Mr Fuller came home later than usual that day. His wife and children were waiting for him They all had dinner together. After dinner Mr Fuller told his wife and children about his business trip and his friends in Chicago. Then he looked through the papers and watched television. At half past ten he switched off the TV set and went to bed.

Comprehension
/. Listen to the text "Jeff Fuller Goes to Chicago" and answer the questions: Where did Jeff Fuller go and why? On what day did Mr Fuller come back to San Francisco? //. Listen to the text again and say which of the two statements is true to the text: 1. Jeff Fuller is a busy man. a) He is an engineer; b) He is a salesman. 2. Jeff left for Chicago a) on Monday; b) on Tuesday. 3. Jeff got to Chicago a) in the morning; b) at noon. 4. In the afternoon Jeff a) talked to some businessmen; b) met his friend Carlos. 5. On Tuesday morning Jeff a) went shopping; b) worked hard. 6. On Wednesday Jeff got up early a) at 6.00 a.m. b) at 7.00 a.m. 7. When Jeff got to San Francisco he went straight a) home; b) to work. 8. When Mr Fuller came to work a) his wife rang him up; b) his boss called him. 9. At 5 o'clock Mr Fuller a) went home; b) went to a meeting. 10. On Wednesday Jeff returned home a) later than usual; b) earlier than usual. ///. Read the text and analyse the language peculiarities of the text Do some exercises in the next section to remember them. Special Difficulties /. Use "have-}-to infinitive" to express necessity: e.g. My secretary was out. (I, type the letter myself) I had to type the letter myself. 1. It was 7 already, (we, leave) 2. Mike was busy, (he, finish the work by 7 o'clock) 3. The chief was out. (I, wait) 4. His wife was away, (he, take the children to school) 5. She lost her dictionary, (she, buy a new one) 6. Peter had a cold, (he, stay home) 173 7. Lucy didn't go to the movies yesterday, (she, help her mother about the house) e.g. The bus was on time, (wait) We didn't have to wait. 1. The text was easy (I, use a dictionary) 2. Mr Smith knew about the meeting (she, phone him) 3. There was a lot of time left. (we, hurry) 4. The train started at 11 a.m. (she, get up early) 5 The station wasn't far from the hotel, (we, take a taxi) e. g. 1 took two exams in January (work hard) Did you have to work hard? 1. Mike didn't know about the party, (ring him up) 2. I was busy with my thesis in summer, (stay in town) 3.1 was ill last week. (miss many lectures) 4. We rented a flat, (pay much) 5. Jane had a difficulty with maths, (help her)

//. Say what you (the members of your family) had to do and what you didn't have to do some time ago. III. Ask for additional information. e. g. She had to stay in yesterday evening, (why) Why did she have to stay in yesterday evening? She didn't feel well. 1. I had to wait for Helen, (how long). 2. I had to send a telegram, (why) 3. He had to go on business, (when) 4. I had to help Peter, (why) 5. We had to leave early, (when) 6.1 had to go to work on Saturday, (why). 7. I had to do a lot of work yesterday, (what) IV. Paraphrase the following sentences: a) use the verb "leave" (some place or for some place): e. g. They went to Moscow last night. They left for Moscow last night. 1. Mr Watson is going to Liverpool tonight. 2. The secretary went to Leeds on business. 3. My wife went to work at 8 15 yesterday. 4. Dick is going to Prague next Monday 5. Robert went away from the plant at 8 p. m. 6. When is Frank going to Paris? 7. When did you go to the plant yesterday? 8. She quickly went out of the room. 9. Don't go away, please. I want to talk to you. b) use the word combination "ask smb. for smth.": e.g. Betty asked me to give back her textbook. Betty asked me for her textbook. 1. Jack asked his father to give him some money. 2. 1 asked William to give me his telephone number. 3. Mr Hanson asked his secretary to give him the incoming letters. 4. I'm going to ask physicists to help me with this work. 5. I want to ask Dick to give me his taperecorder. 6. He asked me to give him a match. 174

V. Make progressive substitutions: e.g. She asked him to phone later. come = She asked him to come later. I =1 asked him to come later, next week = I asked him to come next week, told = I told him to come next week. 1. She asked him to phone later. 1. tomorrow 5. them 9. do it 2. after dinner 6. next week 10. immediately 3. told 7. write 11. leave 4. I 8. him 12. soon 2. He told me not to take his car. 1. us 3. her 5. use 7. his computer 2. records 4. typewriter 6. ask 8. be late
<>-

VI. Answer the questions. Observe the use of the verbs "listen" and "hear": 1. Do you like to listen to classical music? 2. When did you last hear an opera? 3. Are you fond of listening to pop music? 4. Do you always listen to the news in the evening? 5. Did you listen to the 10 o'clock news last night? 6. When were you at a concert last? 7. Did you hear any sweet songs there? 8. Who is your favourite singer? 9. When did you last hear the singer? VII. Fill in the gaps with either "to do" or "to make" (self check): 1. What is Mary ... now? She is ... supper. 2. Does your son ... well at the University? 3. What are you going ... on Sunday? I'm going ... a bookshelf. 4. What did you ... yesterday evening? I was at a concert. 5. Are you going ... a report at the meeting? 6. At our English lesson we ... some grammar exercises. 7. I ... a lot of mistakes in my test paper.

VIII. Translate into English (self check): 1. , . 2. ? , . 3. , . 4. , 6 . 5. , . 6. , . 7. , . 8. , . 9. , . 10.

175

. 11. . . 12. . .

Text Exercises /. Ask questions about: a) Mr Fuller's business trip to Chicago; b) his busy day at the office on Wednesday //. Speak on: a) Mr Fuller's business trip to Chicago; b) Mr Fuller's working day on Wednesday. ///. Were you very busy at work yesterday? What did you do? When did you last have a meeting? What problems did you discuss? Did you speak at the meeting? IV. Do you often travel on business? When did you last go away on business? Where did you go? How did you get there? How long did you stay in ...? What did you do there? Did you call your family? Did you bring them any presents? V. Speak on: a) a busy day at your office; b) your last business trip.
PART

CONVERSATION PRACTICE Tell me a Little about Yourself

Mr Smith: So, tell me a little about yourself. Mr Jackson: Gee uh... I don't know where to begin. What do you want to know? Mr Smith: Well, let's see ... What do you do? Mr Jackson: I'm a civil engineer. Mr Smith: Hmm. That's interesting. Do you enjoy your work? Mr Jackson: Yes, I like it a lot. Mr Smith: Tell me, what exactly do you do as a civil engineer? Mr Jackson: Well, I design roads and bridges for the city. Mr Smith: Oh, that sounds like a very exciting job. Mr Jackson: It is. /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: What does Mr Jackson do? Does he enjoy his work? What exactly does he do as a civil engineer? //. Act out the conversation. ///. Ask each other about your jobs. 176
In the Office

Secretary: Good afternoon, Mr Smith. Mr Smith: Good afternoon, Miss Wild. Did you finish those letters? Secretary: Yes, sir. I typed them and signed them for you. Mr Smith: Did you photo-copy them? Secretary: Yes, sir. 1 photo-copied them and posted them. Mr Smith: Did Mr Jackson arrive? Secretary: About two o'clock, sir... but he didn't stay. He didn't have time. Mr Smith: What did he want? Secretary: Oh ... I didn't ask, sir. Mr Smith: Er ... Did you telephone Mrs Smith? Secretary: Yes, I did ... but she wasn't in. Mr Smith: Hmm ... And the table at "Mario's" for tonight? Secretary: Yes, sir, I reserved a table for two, at eight o'clock. Mr Smith: Good! Did Lulu telephone? Secretary: Yes, sir. /. Listen to the conversation "In the Office" and say what kind of work the secretary did while Mr Smith was out. II. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the questions Mr Smith asked his secretary. III. Act out the conversation. IV. Situation: When you were leaving for work you asked your daughter to do some work about the house. At the moment you are asking her whether she did what you asked her to do. Prompts: dust the carpet, wash the floor, post the letter, buy potatoes, water the flowers, walk the dog.
It Wasn't Your Fault

Arthur Tigers went out to lunch at 12 o'clock. It's now 2.30 and he's just walking into his office. His secretary is typing. Before Arthur went to lunch, he told his secretary, Miss Bradley, to ring him at the restaurant if a man called Mr Powell came to see him. Arthur came back from lunch only a second ago. Miss Bradley: (nervously) Good afternoon, Mr Tigers. Did you have a good lunch? Arthur: Yes, thank you, Miss Bradley. It was very good. Did anyone phone while I was out? Miss Bradley: No. Nobody phoned, but ... er ... Mr Powell came. Arthur: What? But he's the man I told you about? 177 Miss Bradley: Yes, I know, but ... Arthur: Well, if you know, why didn't you phone me? Mr Powell has some very important information. I wanted to talk to him as soon as possible I told you all that before I left. Didn't you understand me? Miss Bradley: Yes, of course, I understood you, Mr Tigers, but... Arthur: I even gave you a card with the name and phone number of the restaurant! I put it on your desk. Miss Bradley: But that's just it! You didn't give me the card. You didn't put it on my desk! Arthur: What do you mean? Of course 1 did. I took the card out of my wallet just before 1 went to lunch! Look! It isn't in my wallet now' (suddenly) Oh! Miss Bradley: Mr Tigers, what's that card on the floor? It fell out of your wallet a second ago. Arthur: That card? It's ... er ... it's the card I thought I gave you. Miss Bradley: You see! You forgot! That's why I didn't phone. I didn't know where you were. Arthur: No. I'm very sorry, Miss Bradley. It wasn't your fault. I apologise. Miss Bradley: That's all right. Please forget it. / Listen to the conversation "It Wasn't Your Fault" and answer the questions: When did Mr Powell come? Why is Arthur angry when Miss Bradley tells him this? What does Arthur think he did before he left? Why didn't Miss Bradley phone Arthur? What are Arthur's exact words when he apologises? What is

one thing we can say in English when someone apologises to us? //. Listen to the conversation again and imitate the voice on the tape. III. Read the conversation and analyse its language peculiarities. IV Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following: ? - , ? , ' ! . ? ? , . ? ? . . 178 , . . , . , . . . . , . V Reproduce the phrases from the conversation where the following verbs are used: know, tell, understand, go, take, forget, come, fall, want, leave, give, put, think. VI. Reproduce the questions used by the speakers. VII. Act out the conversation. VIII. Imagine you are Miss Bradley. Tell what happened at the office today.
Hard-working Students

Hans: Hello, Miguel. What time do you start classes in your school? We don't start until 9.30. Miguel: You're lucky! We start at 8.45 and the teacher doesn't like it if we are even a minute late. I don't think you do much work in your school. Hans: Nonsense! We do work! I didn't come to England to waste my time. I even did an hour's homework on Saturday before I went to the party. /. Listen to the conversation "Hard-working Students" and answer the questions: When do Miguel's classes start? What doesn't his teacher like? Does Hans work hard? //. Read the dialogue and analyse its language peculiarities. III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following: ! 1 . 9 30. , . , ? , . IV. Respond using the emphatic present or past. e.g. Don't you like swimming? (only/July/when/hot) Yes, I do like swimming, but only in July when it's hot. 1. Doesn't he ever go to the theatre? (only/rarely) 2. Didn't

179 she eat any potatoes? (only/few) 3. Don't they understand French? (not speak/very well) 4. Doesn't Peter want to see Mary? (not want/see John) 5. Didn't they enjoy the party? (be/very tired) 6. Don't you want to learn French? (not have/time) 7. Doesn't Mary like Peter? (not want/marry him) 8. Didn't the children do the exercise? (not understand/it) e.g. Doesn't he like football or tennis? He doesn't like football, but he does like tennis, e.g. She only goes to England occasionally. She does go to England, but only occasionally. 1. Didn't they want to see Peter or Mary? 2. He only takes a holiday in winter when he isn't busy. 3. Doesn't your husband drink wine or beer? 4. Don't you like my new shirt and tie? 5. Don't you like dogs or cats? V. Act out the conversation "Hard-forking Students". VI. Ask your friend questions about his English classes. VII. Tell your friend about your English classes, your progress in studying English. Listening Victor's Boss is Angry Victor usually gets up at 7 a. m. He does his morning exercises for twenty minutes, takes a long shower, has a big breakfast and leaves for work at 8 o'clock. He usually drives his car to work and gets there at 8.30. This morning, however, he didn't get up at 7 a. m. He got up at 6 a. m. He didn't do his morning exercises for 20 minutes. He did them for only 5 minutes. He didn't take a long shower. He took a very quick shower. He didn't have a big breakfast. He had only a cup of coffee. He didn't leave for work at 8 o'clock. He left for work at 7. Victor rushed out of the house an hour earlier this morning because his car is at the repair shop and he had to take the bus. He walked a mile from his house to the centre of the town. He waited 15 minutes for the bus. And after he got off the bus, he walked half a mile to his factory. Even though Victor got up early today and rushed out of the house this morning, he didn't get to work on time. He was 45 minutes late and his boss got angry and shouted at him. /. Listen to the text and say why Victor's boss was angry with him. II. Listen to the text again. Agree or disagree with the following 180 statements. Give additional information to prove your agreement or disagreement.

1. Victor usually gets up at 7 a.m. 2. Today Victor got up at 7 as usual. 3. He wasn't in a hurry this morning. 4. Victor got to work by car today. 5. Victor came to work 45 minutes early today.

///. Make substitutions:

e.g. Mary was 10 minutes late for work. Jack/5 minutes Jack was 5 minutes late for work. 1. Lucy/half an hour; 2. The boss/an hour; 3. We/20 minutes; 4. Mr Turner/a quarter of an hour; 5. Miss Green/25 minutes; 6. they/five minutes, e.g. I was half an hour early for work today. I. The secretary/an hour; 2. The boss/half an hour; 3. Mr Robinson/20 minutes; Victor/40 minutes; 4. The typist/half an hour; 5. I/a quarter of an hour. IV. Imagine you are Victor. Explain to your boss why you are late. V. What time did you get up today? Were you in a hurry this morning? Did you do morning exercises? When did you leave home for work? How did you get to work? Did you have to wait for the bus long? How long did it take you to get to work? You weren't late for work, were you? Are you sometimes idte for work?
A Busy Day

Bill had a busy day yesterday, because his parents came from San Diego. He got up early and ate breakfast. In the kitchen he saw Darlene and Meg and he told them about his parents. He did the breakfast dishes and began to clean up the house. He even made his bed. His parents came late in the morning and he met them at the door. They left for lunch together but Bill forgot his keys and had to return to the house. Then they went to a restaurant. After lunch Bill's parents left for San Francisco. /. Listen to the text "A Busy Day" and say why Bill was busy yesterday. II. Listen to the text and pick out irregular verbs. Name both the infinitive and the form used in the text. III. How did Bill prepare for his parents' visit? When did his parents come? Where did Bill and his parents have lunch? What did Bill's parents do after lunch? IV. Tell about Bill's busy day yesterday. 181 V. a) Read the list of Bill's parents' activities yesterday; b) Write a paragraph describing their activities. Bill's parents' activities yesterday get up; leave San Diego; forget their sunglasses; go back home; take the coast highway to Los Angelos; find Bill's house with no difficulty; meet Bill's roommates; take Bill to lunch; eat at a "~ restaurant; tell Bill about the family, have a good time at the restaurant; go back to Bill's house; say good-bye to Bill and his roommates; leave for San Francisco.
After Work

Harry Evans is a young factory worker. Every evening at 5 o'clock exactly the same thing happens. A bell rings at 5. The men stop work, turn off their machines, run out, put their overcoats on, and hurry home. It is now 7 o'clock; and the factory is empty. Two hours ago a bell rang. The men stopped work, turned off their machines, ran out, put their overcoats on and hurried home. At 5 o'clock Harry always buys an evening paper when he leaves the factory and then goes home on his motorbike. He gets home at 5.30 and always washes his hands and face, takes off his work clothes and puts on a good shirt. He eats quickly. He leaves home at 6.30 and meets his friends in town. It is 7 now. Two hours ago Harry bought a paper when he left the factory and went home on his motorbike. An hour and a half ago he got home, washed, took off his work clothes and put on a sports shirt. He ate quickly. Half an hour ago he left home and met his friends in town. /. Listen to the text "After Work", ask and answer questions^ on the text. II. Say what Harry usually does when his working day is over and what he did today, too. III. Say what you usually do on week-days and what you did today, too. IV. Ask your friends what they usually do on week-days and whether they did it today.
Jack Martin

My name is Jack Martin. 1 work in an office near here. I work from about nine o'clock in the morning until six o'clock each day. Actually, I only work five days a week. I don't go to work on Saturdays or Sundays. 182 Usually I have breakfast and dinner at home. I have lunch in a restaurant near my office. In the evening I sometimes listen to the radio or watch television. I never go to the cinema. Occasionally I go to a party at somebody's house. Every night I go to bed early and go to sleep immediately. I usually sleep soundly all night. Last year I used to get to work at eight o'clock every day. I used to set the alarm clock for six in the morning. At 6.00, I used to get up immediately and get dressed quickly. I used to have breakfast at 6.30 every morning. For breakfast I used to have porridge, toast and coffee. Then I used to leave the house at about a quarter to eight. I used to get to the office at eight o'clock and start working immediately. Every day I used to work until seven o'clock in the evening. Sometimes I didn't get home until nearly 8.30 at night. I used to have dinner quite late. There wasn't time to listen to the radio or watch television last year. /. Listen to the text "Jack Martin" and answer the questions: What is Jack's daily routine on week days this year? What did Jack use to do last year? //, Tell about Jack Martin. III. Say what you don't do now but what you used to do some time ago.
Robert Can't Concentrate

Robert felt bad this morning. He got up, washed and shaved and dressed very slowly and then got himself some breakfast. He usually has a large breakfast but this morning he did not feel hungry at all, so he had only a piece of toast and a cup of coffee. Robert has an important examination in a few weeks and he wanted to prepare for it. He sat down after breakfast and looked at his books, but he could not concentrate. After a while he looked at himself in the mirror. What he saw was not very nice. His eyes were red and he was also very pale. Just then his sister knocked on the door. "What you need is fresh air", she said. "You study too much". They went for a walk in the park and sat in the warm spring sun for a while. Afterwards Robert felt much better and found he could concentrate on his books. /. Listen to the text "Robert Can't Concentrate". 183 //. What did Robert do in the morning? Why couldn't he concentrate? What made Robert feel better?

/// Retell the text.

Our New Secretary

The telephone rang and our new secretary Miss Simpson answered it. "May I speak to Mr Calder, please?" a voice said. "Who is speaking, please?" Miss Simpson asked. "Mr Alan Bright", the voice said. Miss Simpson put her hand over the mouthpiece and spoke to Mr Calder. "It's Mr Alan Bright, sir", she said. "He wants to speak to you" "What, again!" Mr Calder exclaimed. "He wants to sell us those new typewriters, doesn't he?" "Yes, sir1" Miss Simpson said. "He called yesterday!" "And he rang me five times last week. We don't need new typewriters. I told him that yesterday", Mr Calder said. "What shall I say, sir?" Miss Simpson asked. "Say that I'm not in the office", Mr Calder said crossly. Miss Simpson spoke into the receiver. "Mr Bright", she said, "I am afraid you can't speak to Mr Calder now. Mr Calder says that he's not in the office".

/. Listen to the text "Our New Secretary" and answer the questions: Who called Mr Calder? What did the man want? Why didn't Mr Calder want to talk to him? What did Mr Calder till Miss Simpson to do? What did Miss Simpson say to the caller? //. Retell the text.
Maria Gomez

Maria Gomez was born in Peru. She grew up in a small village. She began school when she was six years old. She went to elementary school, but she didn't go to high school. Her family was very poor, and she had to go to work when she was 13 years old. She worked on an assembly line in a shoe factory. When Maria was 17 years old, her family moved to the United States. First they lived in Los Angelos and then they moved to San Francisco. When Maria arrived in the United States she was unhappy She missed her friends back in Peru, and she didn't speak one word of English. She began to study English at night, and she worked in a factory during the day. 184 Maria studied very hard and now she speaks English well. She's still studying at night, but now she's studying typing. She wants to be a secretary. Maria still misses her friends back home. But she's very happy now and she's looking forward to her future in her new country.

/ Listen to the text "Maria Gomez" and answer the questions' Where is Maria Gomez from? Where does she live now' //. Listen to the text again and answer the questions. Where was Maria borr.5 Where did she grow up? At what age did she go to school? When did she have to start work? When did Maria's family move to the United States? Why did Maria feel unhappy when they arrived in the United States? What did Maria have to do5 How is Maria getting on now? ///. Tell about Maria's life. IV. Imagine you are Maria Gomez Your new friends want to know about the main events in your life. You are answering their questions. V Tell about the main events in your life: When and where were you born? Where did you grow up? At what age did you go to school? Did you do well at school? What subjects did you like best? When did you finish school? What did you do after school? What Institute did you graduate from? When did you graduate from the Institute? What did you do upon graduation? Where do you work now? Are you a candidate of science? When did you defend your thesis? VI. Interview your friend about the most important events in his/her life. VII. Write your biography. Self check /. Fill in the gaps with prepositions where necessary: Miss Green is a typist. She works .. an office. She goes ... the office ... five mornings every week. Yesterday she arrived .. the office a few minutes nine o'clock. She looked ... the clock .. the wall. She was not late ... work. She took ... her hat and coat and put them ... a hook . the wall. Then she went . . her desk, took the cover . the typewriter, 185

sat down and put a sheet ... paper ... the machine. She began to type. She sat ... her desk and typed all morning. ... half-past twelve Miss Green stopped work. She put ... her hat and coat and went ...... lunch. She had lunch ... a restaurant ... a friend. ... lunch she went ...... her office and worked ... five o'clock. ... five o'clock she put the cover......the typewriter, put ... her hat and coat, left ... the office and went ... home.

//. Ask questions to which the following statements are the answers: 1. On five mornings every week. 2. At nine o'clock. 3. No, she wasn't. 4. All morning. 5. At a rest,' rant. 6. With her friend. 7. She went back to her office. 8. At 5 o'clock. ///. Translate into English: 1. , . , . 2. ? , . 3. . . 4. . . . 5. 8.20 15 . 6. . . 7. , , . Fluency /. a) As you know Steve Baxter is a journalist. He's a very busy man. Look at Steve's diary and see what he did last week. Monday 21st 9.00 visit the BBC Television Centre 14.00 opening the art museum Tuesday 22nd 10.15 interview Lord Harley 14.15 press conference at the British Museum Wednesday 23rd 9.30 discuss new project with Mr Short 15.00 meet reporters from Canada Thursday 24th 11.00 interview Sam Jones 14.00 press conference at Hilton Hotel Friday 25th 10.00 phone Scotland Yard (Chief Inspector Marks) b) Ask all types of questions on Steve's daily activities last week. c) Imagine you are Steve Baxter. You had a busy week from Monday 21st to Friday 25th. Tell your friends what you did during the week. 186 //. Look at Ann's diary on page 136 and say what Ann usually does and what she did yesterday. ///. Read the text "A Busy Day" on page 124 and tell about one of Mr Hanson's busy days at the office. IV. What was yesterday's working day at your office like? Was there anything particular about iP V. Were you busy last week? And what about the members of your family? VI. Do you sometimes travel abroad on business? When did you last go abroad? What did you do there? UNIT 17 GRAMMAR: PAST CONTINUOUS REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS Illustrative Situations 1. Yesterday evening John was at home. He was watching television. One of the programmes was interesting but the phone rang in the middle of it. It was his friend. Questions: What was John doing yesterday evening? What happened in the middle of the programme? Who was it' 2. Mr Collins got to the airport early. He sat in the lounge for a while. Then they called out his flight and he went to the plane. He was sitting in the lounge when they called out his flight. Questions: What did Mr Collins do when he got to the airport? What was he doing when they called out his flight? 3. What were you doing between 5 and 6 o'clock yesterday evening? I was watching television. Was Jack watching television, too? No, he was writing letters. 4. Betty was doing her French homework when Bob came to see her last Saturday. Did he help her? Yes, he did, but he didn't enjoy it. 5. I was very busy last night. Were you? Yes, I was studying English. Really? 6. David came to see me unexpectedly last night. Oh, did he? What were you doing when he came? I was having dinner. How inconvenient!
187

Practice /. Say what you or other people were doing some time ago. Use the prompts. e.g. The whole day yesterday I was busy, (write an article) I was writing an article. 1. On Sunday I was in the library, (prepare for one's exam) 2. At 11 a.m. on Saturday I was at the University, (write a test) 3. We were in the country on the weekend, (fish) 4. All day long yesterday I was out. (work in the garden) 5. At 7 o'clock yesterday evening we were still at the office, (have a meeting) 6. From 10 till 12 on Sunday Victor was busy, (repair the TV set) 7. At 10 a.m. yesterday I was at home, (clean the flat) 8. Yesterday afternoon we were at the stadium, (play football) 9. On Friday morning I was at work, (make an experiment) //. Teacher: At 10 p.m. yesterday I was watching TV. Were you also watching TV at that time, Mary? Student: Yes, I was. (or No, I wasn't, I was doing my homework) The students take over the role of teacher. Teacher: At 7 p.m. yesterday I was playing volley-ball. What were you doing, Mary? Student: I was writing letters. Teacher: What was your husband (son, etc) doing at that time? Student: He was cleaning the car. /// Teacher: a) Guess what I was doing from 5 to 6 yesterday evening by asking me questions: e.g. You were reading, weren't you? You weren't cleaning the flat, were you? b) Guess what my husband was doing at the same time: e.g. He was writing a letter, wasn't he? He wasn't watching TV, was he? c.) Guess what my son was doing at the same time: e.g. Was he playing tennis? IV. Ask your partner what he (she) was doing at 8 p.m. yesterday; who he (she) was talking to when you saw him (her), where he (she) was travelling in summer, if he (she) was working at his (her) thesis on the weekend; what problem he (she) was discussing with his (her) co-workers; what he (she) was doing in the laboratory when you saw him (her); where he (she) was hurrying when you met him (her); who he (she) was waiting for when you saw him (her); if he (she) was watching TV last night. V. a) Here is a list of some things that Mary did yesterday (and the times at which she did them): 188 8.459.15 have breakfast 16.0018.00-watch television 9.1510.00 read a newspaper 19.0020.30cook 10.0012.00 clean her flat 21.0022.00listen tome news 12.4513.30 have lunch 22.0024.00type 14.3015.30 wash some clothes b) Now ask all types of questions about what Mary was doing at these times yesterday. VI. Make sentences with "when" for these situations: Situation: We had a lecture on art yesterday and the rector of the University came in the middle of it. We were having a lecture on art when the rector of the University came in. 1. Mr Robinson turned the radio on and listened to the first part of the concert. Then the phone rang. 2. We were at a dance last night. In the middle of it someone shouted: "Fire!". 3. Robert drove to London yesterday. Halfway there the car broke down 4. The television programme was interesting yesterday but my friends called on me in the middle of it. 5. We had a dictation yesterday. The bell rang in the middle of it. 6. The Browns were at the dinner table when the telegram arrived. 7. Robert went to the bus-stop and waited. At that time it began to rain. VII. Make up complex sentences using the prompts: e.g play/talk to smb While the children were playing Mrs Smith was talking to her neighbour. Prompts: 1. have a bath/wash the dishes; 2. make tea/clean the car; 3. listen to the news/read the papers; 4. have a holiday/work hard; 5. write an article/do one's homework; 6. repair the tape-recoder/do the housework; 7. look through business papers/type e.g. to work this morning/an accident I was walking (riding) to work this morning when I saw an accident Prompts: \. breakfast/the telephone; 2. tennis/rain; 3. TV/my cousin; 4. lesson/bell; 5. the guitar/string; 6. newspaper/bus; 7. in the park/a friend; 8. homework/noise outside; 9. golf/a telegram VIII. Complete these sentences using Past Continuous or Simple Past. 1. When we went out... 2. Who were you talking to ...? 3. It was raining ... 4. When I got to the lesson ... 5. I was ringing the doorbell when ... 6. When I opened the door ... 7. While Mary was playing the piano ... 8. ... his father was sleeping. 9. When I arrived home ... 189 10. All day long yesterday ... 11. On Sunday morning ... 12. ... 1 was resting. 13. While John was swimming ... 14. This afternoon ... 15. From 5 till 6 on Friday ... 16. When I got up ... 17. While I was talking to my friend ... 18. The whole month ... 19. ... yesterday morning 20. I was having tea ... IX. Use the prompt verbs both in Past Continuous and in Simple Past:

e.g. do exercises At our English lesson we were doing exercises. We did 6 exercises (write letters; make telephone calls; do lectures; take exams; type articles; learn poems; read fan letters; translate articles)

X. Ask questions: e.g. Jill went out with someone yesterday. Who did she go out with? 1 When I saw Harry he was waiting for someone. 2. When James came Mary was looking for something. 3. Mike was writing to someone when I entered the room. 4. He wanted to talk to someone at the police station. 5. When I saw Gemma she was talking to someone. 6. He wanted to talk about something very important. 7. Betty went out with someone. 8. When I came Roger was listening to something over the radio. 9. He went there for something. XI. Say what you (your friends, relatives) wanted to do once but didn't do: e.g. We were going to travel by train but then we decided to go by car. 1. Tom wanted to invite Peter but then he changed his mind. 2. Mary intended to become a teacher but then she changed her mind 3. My mother wanted to go shopping but then she decided not to. 4. My sister wanted to go to the cinema at first but then she decided to go shopping. 5. James intended to play cricket on Saturday but then he decided to play golf. 6. We planned to leave at 5 a.m. but left at 8 a.m. 7. They intended to boating but then decided to stay home because of the weather. XII. Make up short dialogues. Do it as in the example: e.g. Did she get married? No, she was going to get married but then she changed her mind. XIII. Ask and answer questions: e.g. Who was he talking to? 190 I've no idea who he was talking to. Prompts: Betty/dance with; Jack/wait for; they/listen to; Mary/look for; they/talk about; the boss/speak to XIV. Travel Schedule Thursday 7.30 Arrive at NBC studios. 7.459.00 Have breakfast with the producer of Musical Box 9.15 Leave the studio. 9.1510.30 Drive to the Concert Hall in Pasadena. 11.0012.30 Interview jazz singer Dee Dee Bridgewater. 12.30 Return to the motel. 13.0013.45 Have lunch with Dee Dee's manager. 14.0017.00 Take photographs of Dee Dee's Bridgewater. 18.00 Leave the concert hall to return to the motel. 19.30midnight Attend a party in Hollywood. Practice 1. Sue Barnes is a young Scottish music journalist on her first visit to California. Look at the travel notes above for the last day of her visit. In pairs, ask and say what Sue did: 1. before lunch; 2. after lunch; 3. in the evening. Fluency In a Park This is what happened in a park yesterday when it began to rain. An old lady was feeding some pigeons. Two old men were sitting on a park bench and talking A young man was looking at the flowers. A young couple was walking hand in hand. Some children were playing volley-ball. When it began to rain the two old men got up and stood under a tree. The old woman put a newspaper over her head and the young man put his umbrella up. The young couple and the children began to run as fast as they could. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What was the old lady doing when it began to rain? What were the two old men doing? What was the young man looking at? What were the young couple and the children doing? What did the people in the park do when it began to rain? 191 //. Say what was going on in the park yesterday.
What was it like?

Maggie is asking Stephen about the time he spent in Amsterdam. Stephen: I really enjoyed Amsterdam. I was living in a flat in the centre of the town. Maggie: What sort of flat were you living in? Stephen: It was very old and very dark, but it had atmosphere. I was sharing with some other people actually. Maggie: What sort of people were you sharing with? Stephen: Oh, just students. I was working in an office at the time. Maggie: What sort of office were you working in? /. Listen to the conversation between Maggie and Stephen and say what Maggie wants to know. What are her exact words? II. Act out the conversation. III. Situation: Maggie spent a year in France. Stephen wants to know what it was like.
A Visit from Jeff

Jill: Hello, Jeff. You're back. Jeff: Yes, I phoned you last night but you didn't answer. Jill: But we didn't go out. Jeff: Then what were you doing at 7.30 last night? Jill: I don't know. At 8.30 I was watching television. Steve: I heard the phone, but I was cleaning my shoes when it rang. I had shoe polish on my hands, so I didn't answer it. I called Jill but she was drying her hair, so she didn't hear it Then I was walking to the phone when it stopped. Jeff: Ah, I see. .Well, we arrived back yesterday afternoon. We left at 3.30. When we left France the sun was shining and when we landed in London, it was raining. Jill: What did you do in Bordeaux? Jeff: Oh, several things. Pam lay in the sun and swam in the sea. We went on excursions and saw a lot of interesting places. Pam bought some souvenirs, we wrote postcards, took photographs and the children made new friends. Pam spoke French to the waiters. Steve- Did you like it there then? Jeff: I thought it was wonderful. I ate a lot, I drank wine, I slept until 10 every morning and I spent all my money! 192 /. Listen to the conversation "A Visit from Jeff" and say where Jeff and his family spent their holidays. II. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases with the irregular verbs in Simple Past. III. Say how Jeff and his family spent their holidays. IV. Act out the conversation. V. Situation: Yesterday you phoned your friend several times during the day but he was out. You want to know where he was and what he was doing
A Quiet Evening

Mr Jones was at home at 8.30 that evening. His wife and children were at home, too. Mrs Jones was in the kitchen. She was making tea. Jane was laying the table. David was in the sitting-room. He was reading a book. All this was quite normal but Mr Jones knew there was something wrong about the house. He was going to ask his wife about it when he saw that the television-set was not working. When the family sat at the table Jane told Mr Jones that the TV set was out of order, and the programme that evening was interesting. "Then let's talk about something", said Mrs Jones. But there was nothing to talk about. So the children went to bed. Mrs Jones went to sleep, too. Only Mr Jones was glad. He sat down in a comfortable armchair, took his pipe and began to read an interesting book. /. Listen to the text "A Quiet Evening", ask and answer questions on the text. II. Retell the text. III. Say a) what the members of your family were doing when you came home yesterday; b) what your colleagues were doing when you came to your office this morning.
An Accident

Two cars were going along Cambridge Street. An Englishman was driving a Rolls-Royce, and a foreign student was driving a V. W, The Englishman was driving slowly arid carefully. The student wasn't driving carefully... he was looking at a girl. She was walking along the street. She was wearing a short skirt, and she was carrying a handbag. The traffic-lights were green.

193
A dog was sitting beside the traffic lights. A cat was sitting on the opposite corner. Suddenly the dog saw the cat. It ran across the road. The English driver saw the dog. He braked quickly. The V. W. crashed into the Rolls-Royce. The girl saw the accident. She ran to a telephone box. The police came immediately. /. Listen to the text "Accident" and answer the questions: Where did the accident happen? Who was driving a Rolls-Royce? a V. W.? How did the accident happen? Who saw the accident7* What did she do? //. Say how the accident happened. III. Did you ever see an accident? How did it happen?
A Robbery

There was a robbery at 151 River Street yesterday afternoon. Burglars broke into every apartment in the building while all the tenants were out. The man in apartment 1 wasn't home. He was washing his clothes in the laundry. The woman in apartment 2 wasn't home either. She was visiting a friend in the hospital. The people in apartment 3 were gone. They were having a picnic at the beach. The man in apartment 4 was out. He was playing tennis in the park. The college students in apartment 5 were away. They were attending a football game. And the elderly lady in apartment 6 was out of town. She was visiting her friend in New Jersey. Yesterday was an unfortunate day for the people at 151 River Street. They had no idea that while they were away burglars broke into every apartment in the building.

/. Listen to the text "A Robbery" and say what happened yesterday afternoon at 151 River Street. II. Listen to the text again. Say what the people in different apartments were doing. 1. The man in apartment 1 wasn't home. He ... 2. The woman in apartment 2 wasn't home either. She ... 3. The people in apartment 3 were gone. They ... 4. The man in apartment 4 was out. He ... 5 The college students in apartment 5 were away They ... . 6 The elderly lady in apartment 6 was out of town. She ... . /// Ask all types of questions on the text. IV. Retell the text. 194 V. I called on you yesterday afternoon but none of the members of your family was at home. Where were you and your family?
Friday the 13th

Yesterday was Friday the 13th. Many people believe that Friday the 13th is a very unlucky day. I, myself, didn't think so ... until yesterday. Yesterday I cut myself while I was shaving. My wife hurt herself while she was making breakfast. My son poked himself in the eyes while he was putting on his glasses. Our daughter spilled soup over herself while she was eating dinner. Both our children hurt themselves while they were playing outside. And we all got wet paint all over ourselves while we were sitting in the park across the street. Yesterday was a very unlucky day. /. Listen to the text "Friday the 13th" and say whether Friday the 13th was a lucky day for the writer. II. Answer the questions. What day was yesterday? What happened to the writer (his wife, his children) yesterday? Where did the family get wet paint all over themselves?

///. Retell the text. IV. Was yesterday a lucky day for you? V. Make up sentences with reflexive pronouns. Use the prompts. e.g. We/all this work. We did all this work ourselves. 1. little girl/all that ice-cream; 2. Arthur/all that wine; 3. Tom/ the car; 4. I/this difficult exercise; 5. Susan/all the dishes; 6. the children/the room; 1. Tom and Peter/all that work; 8. We/all these books; 9. Mary/dinner; 10. I/the text; 11. The boys/the table; 12. We/the homework. Self check /. Choose the correct verb tense. 1. While I was having/had breakfast this morning my sister phoned from Mexico. 2. When I was seeing/saw his face I was realising/ realised my mistake. 3. I was writing /wrote a letter to my penfriend last night. 4. I was taking/took an umbrella because it was raining/rained. 5. It was a cold winter night. 195 It was snowing/ snowed hard and I was wanting/wanted to get back home quickly. //. Put the verbs into the correct forms. A. 1. What you (read) when I (come)? A very interesting detective. I (take) the book from the library yesterday. 2. Ann still (wait) for me when I (arrive). She (get) angry because I (be) late again. 3. Where you (hurry) when 1 (meet) you? I (go) to the station to meet my mother. 4. I (drive, not) fast when the accident (happen). 5. I (come) to the station an hour before the train's departure. While I (wait) for the train I (read) a newspaper. 6. The telephone (ring) when we (have) dinner. My wife (answer) the phone. B. The students (talk) excitedly when the teacher (come) in, but they (stop) at once when the teacher (speak). He (walk) across the room and (begin) to write questions on the blackboard. While he (write), the students (sit) down, (take) out their pens and (prepare) themselves for the test. The teacher (finish) writing, (sit) down in front of the class and (open) a book. He (read) his book the whole time while the students (answer) the questions. When the bell (ring) at four o'clock, most of them (still, write). The teacher (tell) them to stop working and he (collect) their answer papers. When they (leave) the room he (begin) to correct the papers. ///. Translate into English: 1. , . 2. 8 10 ? . 3. , ? , . . . 4. , ? . 5. . . , . 6. ? . 7. ? . 8. . 9. ? . 10. . . 11. . 12. . UNIT 18 GRAMMAR: SIMPLE FUTURE

Illustrative Situations
1. Peter's wife has a terrible headache. She hasn't any aspirin. Peter says: "I'll go and get you some". Questions: What is wrong with Peter's wife? Why doesn't she take an aspirin? What does Peter say? 2. Susan is at a friend's house. The telephone is ringing and Susan's friend cannot answer it because she's busy with a baby upstairs. Susan says: "I'll go and answer it". Questions: Where is Susan? Why can't Susan's friend answer the telephone? What does Susan say? 3. Paula (the language student) has a sports car. It has a flat tyre. The car is in front of school now and her friend David is looking at it. "I'll change it for you", he says. Questions: What's wrong with Paula's car? Where is it? What is David doing? What does he say? 4. Brenda: Oh, darling, I feel terribly tired. George: Well, sit down. I'll do the washing up. Brenda: Oh, thank you, darling ... and I'm thirsty. George: All right, I'll make you a cup of tea. 5. Mary: Jill is leaving school tomorrow. John: I wonder what she will do then Mary: I think she'll try to find a job. John: That's not very likely. 6. Robert: I wonder if I shall get a rise next month. Mike: I don't expect so. Robert: 1 suppose I shall soon know. Mike: All in good time. 7. Robert: Where can I find Peter? Mike: You'll probably find him in the laboratory. Robert: Are you sure I'll find him there? Mike: Oh, yes. I'm quite positive about it. I saw him there just a moment ago.

Practice
/. Agree and promise to do things: e.g. Can you clean the windows? Sure, I'll clean them this afternoon. Do you promise? Yes, I promise. I'll clean them this afternoon. 196 197 1. Can you phone me later? Sure, ... tonight. Do you promise? Yes, ... 2. Can you repair the clock? Okay, ... tomorrow. 3. Please, don't tell anyone. All right, ... . 4 Please, don't hurt me. Don't worry, ... . 5. Can you photo-copy this book for me? Sure, ... tomorrow. 6. Can you type this article for me? Sure, ... today

//. Answer the questions: e.g. What are you going to do tomorrow? (go to the country) I'll probably go to the country. 1. Where is John going to spend his summer holidays? (go to the mountains) 2. What are you going to do? (phone him) 3. What are your plans for tomorrow morning? (go shopping) 4. What is your sister going to do tomorrow evening? (play basketball) 5. What is she going to do? (send a telegram) 6. Do you think they'll come on time? (be late) 7. What are you doing this weekend? (visit our friends) ///. Read the situations. Respond to these situations. Begin the sentences with I think I'll ... or I don't think I'll ... e.g. It's cold. You decide to close the window. I think I'll close the window. 1. You feel tired. You decide to go to bed. I ... 2. A friend of yours offers you a lift in his car but you decide to walk. Thank you but ... 3. You arranged to play tennis. Now you decide you don't want to play... . 4. You were going to go swimming. Now you decide that you don't want to go. 5. You were going to buy a car. Now you decide that you don't want to. 6. A friend of yours invites you to the theatre but you decide to go to the library. IV. Answer the questions. Use the prompts. e.g. When do you think he'll arrive? (expect/tonight) I expect he'll arrive tonight. 1. What do you think she'll say? (probably/nothing) 2. Where do you think she'll go? (expect/London). 3. When do you think she'll leave? (think/tomorrow). 4. How do you think she'll get there? (expect/by train). 5. When do you think she'll be back? (think/quite/soon) 6. Who do you think will win? (I'm sure/ Mike) 7. Where do you think he will stay? (probably/at his brother's) V. Complete the sentences with I'll-}-prompt words. e.g. We haven't got any cigarettes. Oh, haven't we? ... get some. I'll go and get some. 198 1. It's a bit cold in this room. Is it? ... the heating then. 2 I'm too tired to walk home. I think ... a taxi. 3. It's too late to telephone Tom now.... in the morning. 4. Would you like tea or coffee? ... coffee, please. 5. I feel a bit hungry. I think ... something to eat. 6. Did you write that letter to Jack? Oh, I forgot. Thanks for reminding me. ... in the evening. VI. Make up short dialogues using the prompts. e.g. I wonder if Harry will buy that car. I expect (think) so.

1. Danald/get a rise; 2. Betty/pass her exam; 3. Roger/repair the radio-set, 4. Alice/come; 5. Roger and Susan/get married; 7. Jack/ go to the seaside; 8. Mike/tell his parents about it; 9. Helen/stay at her relatives'; 10. Jane/take part in the expedition; 11. Helen/invite Peter, e.g. I wonder (I'd like to know) when Mary will come. I've no idea about it. 1. Robert/buy the tickets; 2. Lucy/write to us; 3. Roger and Alice/get married; 4. Mike/tell Jane about it; 5. they/finish the work; 6. they/start the experiment; 7. Helen/be back VII. Ask the speaker to repeat what he has just said: e.g. I'll see Alec on Tuesday. Pardon? When will you see him? On Tuesday. 1. Alice will be away for a month, (how long) 2. I'll be back in half an hour, (when) 3. We'll invite twenty people to the party, (how many) 4. I'll be in Rome next week, (where) 5. I'll have my French classes three times a week, (how often) 6. The professor will give two lectures, (how many) 7. Victor won't come because he is busy, (why) 8. Mike will book the tickets, (who) 9. She will study art. (what) 10. They'll pay him 3000 dollars, (how much) 11. I'll be at the library at 4. (where) 12. I'll marry John Smith, (who)

VII/. Ask questions. Use the prompts: e.g. I'm leaving, (you/be back/soon) You'll be back soon, won't you? I think I shall (will). 1. Robert is in Minsk on business, (he/call on you) 2. The documents are ready, (you/send them/yourself) 3. I am thirsty, (you/have some lemonade) 4. The boss is out. (you/wait for him) 5. Jane is going to celebrate her birthday, (she/be/twenty) e.g. The station is not far from here, (you/not/take a taxi) You won't take a taxi, will you? 199 I don't think I shall. 1. We've got some time left, /we/not/be late) 2. Jack is very busy right now. (he/not/come to the party) 3. Mike has a cold, (he/ not/take part in the picnic) 4. I usually see James on Friday, (you/not see/him/tomorrow) 5. We usually spend our holidays at the seaside, (you/not/go to the seaside/this summer) IX. Express solidarity: e.g. I shan't come to the meeting. And you? Neither shall (will) I. We shall go abroad for our holidays. And your parents? So will my parents. 1. We shall travel by train. And you? 2. I'll be thirty soon. And Victor? 3. We won't stay in town in summer. And you? 4. I'll take a taxi. And you? 5. Jane won't go to the sea this year. And Mary? 6. I'll go fishing tomorrow morning. And your father? 7. I shan't speak at the meeting. And you? 8. Betty won't be present. And Susan? 9. Jane will come. And her sister?
Fluency Good-bye and Good Luck

Our neighbour, Captain Charles Alison, will sail from Portsmouth tomorrow. We shall meet him at the harbour early in the morning. He will be in his small boat Topsail. Topsail is a famous little boat. It has sailed across the Atlantic many times. Captain Alison will set out af eight o'clock, so we shall have plenty of time. We shall 4see his boat and then we shall say goodbye to him. He will be away for two weeks. We are very proud of him. He will take part in an important race across the Atlantic. /. Listen to the text "Good Bye and Good Luck" and ask: where Captain Alison will sail from; who will meet him at the harbour;.in what boat Captain Charles Alison will sail across the Atlantic; what time Captain Alison will set out; whether the captain's friends will see him off; how long the Captain will be away; why the captain's friends are proud of him. //. Speak on the captain's future voyage across the Atlantic. III. Say what you will do during your holidays. Going to the Theatre Brenda: I hope it won't be too hot in the theatre. George: No, I don't think it will be.
200

Brenda: We won't be too late, will we? George: No, we won't. We'll be on time. Brenda: I hope we'll have good seats. Do you know what kind of seats we'll have? George: We'll have the best seats, of course. /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: Where are Brenda and George going tonight? Why is Brenda a little worried? What does she ask George? //. Listen to the conversation again. Fill in the missing parts of the conversation: Brenda: I hope ... in the theatre. George: No, I don't think... . Brenda: We ... too late, ...? George: No, ... . We ... on time. Brenda: I hope ... good seats. Do you know ...?

George: ..., of course. ///. Act out the conversation. IV. You and your wife (friend) are going to spend your holidays at the seaside. Your wife (friend) is a little worried about the weather, the hotel, the food, etc. Monday Morning David: What's the matter? Sue: Oh, I don't know. David: Oh, come on ... it's something. What is it? Sue: It's just life ... it's so boring. David: Oh, it's not so bad ... you've got Daniel! Sue: But he's only a baby! It's all right for you. You'll leave the house in five minutes. I'll be here all day. When'll you come home? You won't come home till seven! David: One of us must go to work, dear. Sue: Yes, but your day'Il be interesting. My day'll be the same as every day. David: My work isn't always interesting. Sue: I know, but you travel around, you meet different people and you do different things. Who'll I meet today? What'll I do? Eh? I'll wash up, feed the baby, do the washing, clean the house, bath the baby, take the dog for a walk ... David: But ... but ... dear. 201
Sue: Then I'll go to the supermarket, prepare dinner, meet you at the station, have dinner, wash up again ... David: But ... but ... dear. Sue: Then I'll feed the baby again, put the baby to bed ... What a life! Today, tomorrow, this week, next week, this month, next month, next year ... for ever! David: It's just Monday, dear ... you'll be . . later. Sue: Will I?

/. Listen to the conversation "Monday Morning" and say why Sue thinks her life is boring. II. This is David's work schedule for Monday. Say what he will do:
David's Monday David Shaw, television interviewer 8.30 catch "the train 9.30 arrive at the television studio 10.00 interview Miss World 12.00 have lunch with a film producer 15.00 meet Paul McCartney at London Airport 16.00 have cocktails at the new discotheque 17.00 catch the train 19.00 go to the pub 19.30 have dinner 20.30 watch television /// Imagine you are David, a) Speak on your work and your usual working day; b) Say what you did yesterday.

IV. This is Sue's day on Monday. What will she do? Sue's Monday
Sue Shaw, housewife 9.00 wash up 10.00 feed the baby 10 30 do the washing 12.00 clean the house 13.00 take the dog for a walk 14.30 go to the supermarket 16.00 prepare dinner 15.30 meet David at the station 19.30 have dinner 22.00 go to bed 202 V. Imagine you are Sue a) Speak on your daily routine; b) Say what you did yesterday.

VI. Say what you will do after your English class today. VII. Say what you will do tomorrow (on Sunday).
Simple Future and Present Tenses with a Future Meaning Compared Simple Future is used a) to make predictions about the future: This time next year I'll be in Japan. I think Tom will get the job. b) to make statements of fact about the future: Steve will be thirty next birthday c) to make a decision at the moment of speaking: Does Peter know about the picnic?
I'll tell him tonight.

d) to make a promise or offer: I'll post those letters for you. Present Continuous (I am doing) is used a) to talk about arrangements, plans for the near future: "Going to" is also possible but "I am doing" is more natural: I'm playing tennis this afternoon, (or I'm going to play tennis this afternoon) What time are you meeting Ann? (or What time are you going to meet Ann?) "Going to" is used a) to talk about planned decisions, intentions and arrangements: I'm going to ask for a rise next month.

Compare the use of Simple Future and "Going to" in the following situation: Helen (to her Father): My bicycle has a flat tyre. Can you repair it for me? Father: Okay, but I can't now. I'll repair it tomorrow. We use "will" when we decide to do something at the moment of speaking. Later Helen's mother speaks to her husband. Mother: Can you repair Helen's bicycle? It has a flat tyre. Father: Yes, I know. She told me. I'm going to repair it tomorrow. We use "going to" when we have already decided to do something. b) to make predictions about the immediate future when there is some evidence to show what is going to happen: 203

Look at those black clouds. It's going to rain in a minute. Simple Present (I do) is used to talk about timetables, programmes, etc. The football match starts at 8 o'clock. What time does the film begin? But we do not normally use the Simple Present for personal arrangements.

Practice
/. Make sentences with these situations: Situation: Margaret has a new job. Her first day in it will be next Monday. Margaret is starting her new job next Monday. 1. Tom sees his mother every Sunday. It is Sunday tomorrow. 2. Jill and Bert have a date this evening. Trafalgar Square is their meeting place. 3. Mrs Lee has an appointment with the doctor tomorrow. 4. Mr Hanson has a ticket in his pocket for this evening's plane to Moscow. 5. Tony and his wife eat out every Friday. It is Friday tomorrow. 6. You rang up your friend and arranged to see a film this evening after work. 7. Tony and Susan always play tennis on Saturday. It is Saturday tomorrow. 8. Your friend's wedding is tomorrow. You've got an invitation to the wedding. 9. On Tuesday Steve always has lunch with Dr Walker. It is Tuesday tomorrow. //. Say what the people in these situations are going to do. Situation: Charles is alone this evening. He likes boxing matches and there is one on television at 8. It is 7.30 now. Charles is going to watch a boxing match on television. 1. Peter is sitting in the train. He is taking a newspaper out of his briefcase. 2. The telephone in the sitting-room is ringing. Mary is coming down the stairs. 3. There are clouds in the sky and they are getting darker and darker. 4. The train is still standing at the platform but all the passengers are inside now. 5. The Browns usually have dinner at. 7. It's 6.50. Mrs Brown is laying the table. 6. The pianist is walking into the concert-platform. The audience is waiting. ///. Complete these sentences, using "going to" or "not going to": e.g. I watched Panorama last week, but... (not/next week) I watched Panorama last week, but I'm not going to watch it next week. 1. Julia caught the 7.45 train yesterday, but... (not/tomorrow). 204 2. I didn't see the film last month, but ... (next month). 3. She bought some meat in that shop last Monday, but ... (next time). 4. I didn't travel by air the last time, but... (next time). 5 We stayed at home last night, but. . (not/tonight). 6. I spent 20 on Christmas presents last year, but . . (not/so much this year). 7. I visited Bill in hospital this morning, but ... (not/again today) 8. I didn't pay the bill when it came, but ... (very soon). 9. We didn't plan our holidays last summer, but ... (this summer). IV. In pairs, practise the following dialogue several times, choosing different words and phrases each time: A: What are you going to do tomorrow? B: We're going to spend the day in the country; in the mountains; by the lake; on the coast A: Well, they say it's going to rain; be cold; freeze; snow; be lovely and sunny. B: In that case I'll take my skis; swimming things; skates; thick jacket; raincoat. V. A friend of yours is planning to go on holiday very soon. You ask him about his plans. Use the words in brackets to make, your questions. e.g. (where/go) Where are you going? 1. (how long/stay?) 2. (when/leave?) 3. (go/alone?) 4. (go/ by car?) 5. (where/stay?) VI. Ann is going on holiday. Tell about her holiday plans. Use the words in brackets. e -g- (go/Scotland) She is going to Scotland. 1. (leave/next Friday). She ... 2. (stay/in Scotland for two weeks) 3. (go/with a friend of hers) 4. (stay/in a hotel). They... 5. (go/by train)
VII. Find out:

what your friends are going to do this weekend; what your teacher is going to do immediately after this lesson; if anyone is going to spend the holidays at the seaside; the weather forecast for tomorrow (if it is going to be warm and sunny or wet) VIII. Match the words and phrases in the two columns below to talk about your plans lor the coming weekend. e.g. I'm going to write some letters. 1. write my room 2. phone some letters 3. do my bike

4. repair a cake 205 5. buy my girl/boyfriend 6. take back last week's homework 7. tidy a new pair of jeans 8. make my library books IX. Now add some plans of your own. X. Exchange the lists above with your partner. Imagine that it is now Monday morning. Admit that you forgot to do each activity and decide when you intend to do it using "will". e.g. A: Did you write any letters? B: No, I forgot but I'll write some tomorrow morning/afternoon/evening. Fluency A Long Lunch Hour Steve: I'm going to lunch in a few minutes. Barbara: Oh, are you? You're going early today. It's only 11.30. What time are you coming back? Steve: Well, I'm meeting Jill in town. We're doing some shopping together, but er ... please, don't tell Mr. Short! Barbara: Of course not. What are you doing this afternoon? Aren't you discussing the new series today? Steve: Yes, we are, but not until 3. Harry's coming to the meeting, too. I'm going now. Don't work too hard. Barbara: Enjoy your lunch, don't eat too much. Don't spend too much money and don't come back late to the meeting. /. Listen to the conversation and say why Steve is going to lunch early today. II. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases with the Present Continuous expressing a future action. III. Act out the conversation. IV. Here is Steve's diary: Monday Liverpool Tuesday 10.00 interview John Miller (Heathrow Airport) 12.00 see bank manager Wednesday 2.00 Birmingham Thursday 9.00 visit Ministry of Transport 2.00 interview Robert Brewster from National
206

Union of Teachers Friday 10.( atter New Art Exl .bition 12.30 meet Dr Parker for lunch at Grand Hotel 13.30 see dentist This is part of a conversation between Steve and his wife Jill. Complete the conversation. Jill: Look, Steve. Here's an interesting advertisement for a flat in Netting Hill Gate. Let's go and see it. What are you doing next week? Steve: Oh, I've got a very full week, Jill. On Monday I'm ... V. Your friend Tom wants you to visit him. Look at your diary for the next few days and explain to him why you can't come. Monday Friday volley-ball, 7 p. m. football match, 5 p.m. Tuesday Saturday repair car cinema, 6 p. m. Wednesday Sunday theatre, 6 p. m. visit parents Thursday meet Judy, 6 p. m. Tom: Can you come on Monday evening? You: Sorry, I'd love to but I'm playing volley-ball. Tom: What about Tuesday evening then? You: I can't I'm afraid. I ... Tom: What are you doing on Wednesday evening? You: ... Tom: Well, are you free on Thursday evening? You: I'm afraid not. ... etc.
Happy New Year

It's December thirty-first, New Year's Eve. Bob and Sally Simpson are celebrating the holiday with their children, Lucy and Tom. The Simpsons are a very happy family this New Year's Eve. Next year is going to be a very good year for the entire family. Next year Bob and Sally are going to take a long vacation. They're going to visit Sally's cousin in California. Lucy is going to finish school. She's going to move to Boston and begin college. Tom is going to get his driver's licence. He's going to save a lot of money and buy a used car.
207

As you can see, the Simpsons are really looking forward to next year It's going to be a happy year for all of them. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What holiday are the Simpsons celebrating? What are the Simpsons going to do next year? //. Say why the New Year is going to be a very good year for the entire family. III. Here is Bob Simpson's diary for next week. Monday present for Tom Tuesday table tennis with Harry Wednesday car to the garage for service Thursday tickets for "Oliver" Friday birthday card to uncle Jim Saturday football match on television Sunday jazz concert on the radio" What is Bob going to do next week? IV. What are you going to do a) tomorrow? b) on Sunday? c) next week? d) next month?
Would you Like a Cup of Coffee?

Two years ago, before he married Susan, Tom taught English in Paris. He taught at an institute for adult students. One evening he went to another institute to give some oral examinations. Tom: You speak English very well. I'm going to give you a very good mark. Don't worry. Student (Girl): Thank you very much. Tom: Not at all. Oh, when you go out please tell the next student to come in. Student: Certainly. Good bye. (Goes out, closing the door. Short pause. Another person comes in). Woman: Excuse me. Are you Mr. Atkins? Tom: Yes. You don't know me, of course. I don't teach here. I just give oral examinations here now and then. Don't be nervous. Woman: Nervous? Who? Me? Tom: Now, sit down please. I'm going to ask you a few questions. Then we're going to have a short conversation in English. Do you understand? Woman: Yes, of course I do. But may I ask you something first? 208 Tom: After the examination, please. Just concentrate on my questions for the moment First of all, why are you learning English? Woman- Why am I learning English? Tom: Yes, I mean, what are you going to do with it3 Are you going to be a teacher of English, or what? Woman: Please stop just a second. 1 really must ask you something first. Tom: (irritated) Very well. If you insist. Woman: Would you like a cup of coffee? Tom: Pardon? What did you say? Woman: You see, I'm English, too. I'm one of the teachers here. I came to ask you if you would like a cup of coffee. /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: Why did Tom go to the institute that evening? Who did he think the woman was? Who was the woman really? Why did she come in? //. Read the conversation. III. Without looking at the conversation, try to remember what Tom and the woman said with these words: Tom: a very good mark, worry, a few questions. Then/a short conversation. First why/English? do with it? a teacher of English? Woman: Stop, something first, teacher here, come/coffee. IV. Act out the conversation.
Jeff and Mary are Going to Spain

Jeff has a ten-day vacation during June. He and Mary are going to go to Spain. The children will stay with Mary's mother. Jeff and Mary don't have much time, so they'll fly. They are going to leave Boston on a Wednesday night. It's cheaper to fly at night. They'll arrive in Spain early the next morning. They are going to be very tired, so they'll go to the hotel and sleep. That afternoon Jeff is going to see a bullfight. Mary isn't going to. She doesn't like bullfights. She's going to go shopping. She'll look at a lot of different things hats, jackets, shoes. But she isn't going to buy many things. She's going to get a leather bag. That evening Jeff and Mary are going to eat in a Spanish restaurant. There are many tourist restaurants, but they want to have good Spanish food. They are going to have seafood and wine. Friday morning they'll leave for another city. They're going

209
to rent a car. They'll stop in many small cities. Saturday they are going to see a castle. Sunday they'll visit Mary's brother, Carlos. He is living and working in Spam. The next week they aren't sure what they are going to do. It'll be warm, so they'll go swimming. And they'll have the car, so they're going to drive a lot. They'll miss their children. After ten days they'll be happy to go home.

/. Listen to the text and answer the questions: Where are Jeff and Mary going to spend their vacation? How --will Jeff and Mary get to Spain? How long will they stay there? //. Listen to the text again and ask more detailed questions on the text. HI Imagine you are Mary. Tell your friends about the plans for your vacation.

Self check
/. Decide which form of the verb is correct (or more natural) in these situations: 1. I will go/am going to a party tomorrow night. Would you like to come, too? 2. According to the weather forecast it will rain/is raining tomorrow. 3. I'm sure Tom will get/is getting the job. He has a lot of experience. 4. I can't meet you this evening. A friend of mine will come/is coming to see me. 5. Have you decided where to go for your holiday yet? Yes, we will/are going to Italy. 6. Don't worry about the dog. It won't hurt/isn't hurting you. 7. Did you phone Ann? Oh, no, I forgot. I am doing/I'll do it now. //. Put the verb into the most suitable form: a) use "will" or "going to" 1. Why are you filling that bucket with water? I (wash) the floor. 2. Oh, I haven't got any money to buy the books. Don't worry that's no problem. I (lend) you some. 3. What (you/do) after supper? Watch television. Why? 4. Have a good time in Italy! Thanks. I (send) you a postcard. 5. Why are you turning on television? I (watch) the news. 6. Did you post that letter for me? Oh, I'm sorry. I completely forgot. I (do) it now. 7. We need some bread for lunch. Oh, do we? 1 (go) to the shop and get some. 8. The ceiling in this room doesn't look very safe, does it? No, it looks as if it (fall) down. 9. 1 don't know how to use this camera. It's quite easy! I (show) you. 10. What would you like to drink tea or cof-210 fee? I (have) tea, please. 11. Phew! It's hot in here. Yes, isn't it? I (turn on) the air conditioning. 12. Has George decided on what to do when he leaves school? Oh, yes. Everything is planned. He (have) a holiday for a few weeks and then he (start) a computer programming course. 13. Where are you going? Are you going shopping? Yes, I (buy) something for dinner. 14. I decided to re-paint this room. What colour (you, paint) it? 15. I'm going to a party tomorrow. What (you, wear)? 16. When (you/type) my article? I (do) it tomorrow if I have time. b) use the "going to" future or the present continuous 1. I don't know what I (do) with my computer. Perhaps you'd like it? 2. The plane (leave) at 6 o'clock. 3. I know you (like) our new geography teacher. 4. Come on! We (be) late. 5. Sue and Alan (get) married on Saturday. 6. Take a warm coat. It's very cloudy. I think it (snow) 7. I (take) my driving test on Wednesday. 8. My parents (arrive) by the 11.50 train. 9. I feel terrible. I think I (be) sick. 10. The new supermarket (open) on 5th May. c) use Present Continuous (I am doing) or Simple Present (I do) 1. We (go) to the theatre this evening. 2. We (have) a party on Saturday. Would you like to come? 3. ... the film (begin) at 3.30 or 4 30? 4. I (go, not) away for my holiday next month because I haven't got enough money. ... (you/go) away)? 5. The concert this evening (start) at 7.30. 6. George, is it true that you (get) married next week? 7. The art exhibition (open) on 3rd May and (finish) on 15th July. 8. What time (the next train/leave)? 9. Ann, we (go) to town. ... (you/come) with us?

//. Translate into English: 1. , ? , . 2. ? . 3. ? . 4. , . . , . 5. ? , . . 6. . . . 7. . . 8. . . 9. ? .

211

UNIT 19 TOPIC: SEASONS AND WEATHER GRAMMAR: REVIEW OF TENSES

PART A
TEXT. THE ENGLISH ABOUT THE ENGLISH WEATHER

The English weather on the whole is not exceptionally good. It's very damp, we have a lot of rain. Our weather is very changeable: a fine morning may change into a wet afternoon and evening. Conversely, a miserable morning may give place to a glorious afternoon. The English summer is usually disappointing. We expect during winter to have two or three months of extremely good weather, sunshine and hot weather, hot enough to bathe, to go to the sea. But summer months are often cool, there is always plenty of rain. Planning summer holidays is not easy because you can never depend on the weather. One year June may be hot and sunny and July and August rainy, another year it might be the other way round. So many people who look forward to the summer holidays, if they can afford it, go abroad for their holidays, though there are so many lovely beaches on the English coast. The English winter is not cold. The temperature seldom falls below 34 degrees. The usual temperature is about

zero. The air is frequently damp and foggy. It often rains and it seldom snows. The snow melts very quickly. Autumn is the season of foggy, windy days. A spell of sunny weather in October is called an Indian Summer. Spring is a warm and beautiful season. Spring flowers start to bloom from February. The weather in spring however, is changeable, and even if the sky is blue without a single cloud in the morning there is no guarantee that it may not rain within a short time. It is always wise to take a mac or an umbrella. No conversation ever starts in England without a comment on the weather It is almost a formality like shaking hands. "How do you do?", "Nice day today, isn't it?", "Isn't it hot today?", "Isn't it a beastly day?", "Shocking weather, isn't it?" these remarks are often used when speaking about the weather. Comprehension /. Listen to the text "The English about the English weather", and say whether England has a pleasant climate. 212 //. Listen to the text again and say whether the statement is true to the text. Give additional information to prove your answer. 1. The English weather is very changeable. 2. The English summer is usually fine. 3. It is usually cold in winter. 4. Spring is a very pleasant season. 5. The weather in autumn isn't very pleasant as a rule. 6. The English like to speak about the weather. ///. Read the text and analyse the language peculiarities of the text. Do some exercises in the next section to remember them. Special Difficulties /. Make up dialogues using the prompts. Observe the use of the verbs "rain" and "snow". e.g. Does it sometimes snow/rain in Belarus at this time of the year? Yes, quite often, I must say. (England, Siberia, the Ukraine, Poland) e.g. It often rains /snows here in November, doesn't it? Not very often, in fact. (September, December, October; May, July) //. Use the correct forms of the verbs "rain" and "snow": 1. It ... again today. It ... almost every day. 2. We didn't go to the country on the weekend because it... all day long. 3.... it... when you left home? Yes, it... heavily. 4. When ... it last... ? Two weeks ago. 5. Take an umbrella. It ... . 6. It often ... last winter, ... it? 7. ... it still ... ? Yes, it is. 8. ... it... on Monday morning? No, it ... . 9. It often ... here at this time of the year, ... ? ///. Answer the questions: What do you think the weather will be like tomorrow? on Sunday? in June? in July? in autumn? next week? e.g. I think it'll be hot next week. Prompts: cool, sunny, rainy, warm, lovely, fine, damp, foggy, windy, cold, wet. IV. Respond expressing uncertainty. Use the modal verb"may": e.g. What will the weather be like this Sunday? (hot) It may be hot. 1. What will the weather be like tomorrow? (sunny) 2. What will the weather be like next week? (fine) 3. What will the weather be like in summer? (rainy) 4. What will the weather be like in July? (warm). 5. What will the weather be like in September? (wet). 6. What will the weather be like in winter? (cold) 213

V. Translate into English (self check): 1. , . . . . 2. . 3. , . 4. , . 5. ? . 6. . . 7. ? , . 8. . , .

Text Exercises

/. Ask and answer questions on the text II. Speak on: a) the English weather on the whole; b) the English summer (winter, spring, autumn) ///. Imagine you've just come from England. Your friends want to know about the English weather. They are asking you questions. IV. Speak on the English weather. V. Answer the questions: What was the weather like yesterday? What is the weather like today? What do you think the weather will be like tomorrow? Do you like the climate in Belarus (the place you live in) or not? Why?

PART Conversation Practice The English Weather Hans: Where do you come from? Jim: I come from England. Hans: What's the climate like in your country? Jim: It's mild, but it's not always pleasant. The weather's often cold in the North and windy in the East. It's often wet in the West and sometimes warm in the South. Hans: Which seasons do you like best? Jim:

I like spring and summer.

The days are long and the nights are short. The sun rises early and sets late. I don't like autumn and winter. The days are short and the nights 214 are long. The sun rises late and sets early. Our climate is not very good, but it's certainly interesting. It's our favourite subject of conversation. /. Listen to the conversation "The English Weather" and answer the questions: Where does Jim come from? What does he tell Hans about the climate in England? Which seasons does he like? Why? Why doesn't he like autumn and winter?

//. Act out the conversation. III. Answer the questions: Where do you come from? What is the climate like in ... ? Which seasons do you like best? Do you like winter? autumn? spring? summer? Why?
What's the Climate Like in your Country?

Jim: Where do you come from? Dimitn: I come from Greece. Jim: What's the climate like in your country? Dimitri: It's very pleasant. Jim: What's the weather like in spring? Dimitn: It's often windy in March. It is always warm in April and May, but it rains sometimes. Jim: What's it like in summer? Dimitri: It's always hot in June, July and August. The sun shines every day. Jim: Is it cold or warm in autumn? Dimitri: It's always warm in September and October. It's often cold in November and it rains sometimes. Jim: Is it very cold in winter? Dimitri: It's often cold in December, January and February. It snows sometimes. /. Listen to the conversation "What's the Climate Like in your Country?", ask and answer questions. II. Speak on the climate in Greece. III. Situation: One of you is Jim. You are from England. The other is Dimitri. You are from Greece. At the moment you are speaking about the climate in your countries. 215
The Weather Forecast

Paul and Judy live in Birmingham. It's a large city in the Midlands. They're planning a weekend holiday. Paul: I know, Judy! Why don't we go to Scotland? Judy: It's a very long way Paul: Oh, it isn't too far. Anyway, the motorway's very good, so we can get there quickly. Judy: But Scotland's often cold at this time of the year. It may snow! Paul: Well, yes ... it may ... but I don't think it will. Judy: I'm not sure. It is February, and I'm frightened of driving in snow. And we may not be able to find a hotel. They may be closed. Paul: Oh, that's no problem. I can book a hotel by phone. Judy: Well, perhaps it's not a bad idea. We may have beautiful weather. Paul: Oh, we'll enjoy ourselves anyway. Let's watch the weather forecast on television. We may not go to Scotland, we may go to Wales or London. We can decide after the forecast. Good evening, and here is the weather forecast for tomorrow. Northern Scotland will be cold, and there may be snow over high ground. In the north of England it will be a wet day and rain may move into Wales and the Midlands during the afternoon. East Anglia will be generally dry, but it will be dull and cloudy. In southern England it will be a bright clear day with sunshine, but it may rain during the evening. In the south west it may be foggy during the morning, but the afternoon will be clear. It may be windy later in the day. /. Listen to the text "The Weather Forecast" and answer the questions: What are Paul and Judy planning? Is the weather forecast for tomorrow good? //. Read the text and analyse its language peculiarities. Observe the use of the modal verb "may". III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following: ? , . . , . 216 . . . . . . , . . , . . , . , . . - , . IV. Ask and answer questions on the text.

Ask: where Paul wants to go for the weekend; why Judy doesn't want to go to Scotland; what she is afraid of; what Paul and Judy want to watch on television; what the weather will be like in Northern Scotland; what it will be like in the North of England and Wales; whether East Anglia will be dry or wet; whether it will rain in Southern England; what the weather will be like in the South West. V. Act out the conversation between Judy and Paul. VI. Reproduce the weather forecast you've just heard. VII. Did you hear the weather forecast for tomorrow in this country? What will the weather be like tomorrow? VIII. Situation: Your friend phones to invite you to the country for the weekend. You are not sure whether the weather will be fine. Your friend says he has heard the weather forecast. It will be warm and dry at the end of the week

Listening Hurry, Spring! I can't wait for spring to come. I'm tired of winter. I'm tired of the snow. I'm tired of cold weather. And I'm sick and tired of winter coats and boots! Just think! In a few weeks it won't be winter any more. It will be spring. The weather won't be cold It'll be warm. It won't snow any more. It'll be sunny. I won't have to stay indoors any more. I'll go outside and play with my friends. We'll ride bicycles and play baseball again. Just think! In a few weeks our neighbourhood won't look so sad and grey. The flowers will bloom and the trees will become green again. My family will spend more time outdoors. My father will work 217 in the yard. He'll cut the grass and paint the fence. My mother will work in the garden. She'll buy new flowers and plant them in the garden. On weekends we won't just sit in the living-room and watch TV. We'll go for walks in the park and we'll have picnics on Sunday afternoons. I really can't wait for the spring to come. Hurry, Spring! /. Listen to the text "Hurry, Spring" and answer the questions: What is the boy tired oP What will the weather be like in spring? How will the boy spend his time in spring? What will the neighbourhood look like in spring? What will the boy's parents do outdoors? //. Say why the boy is Looking forward to spring. III. Are you looking forward to summer? spring? winter? autumn? Why? The Best Time for Apples It is the first English lesson at a small school after the summer holidays. The lesson is about the seasons of the year. 'There are four seasons in a year", says the teacher. "They are spring, summer, autumn and winter. In spring it is warm and everything begins to grow. In summer it is hot and there are a lot of flowers in the fields and gardens, in the parks and woods. The farmers work all day long on their farms. In autumn there are a lot of vegetables and fruit. In winter it is cold, it often rains. Sometimes there is snow on the ground ..." Here the teacher stops and looks at one of the pupils. "Stop talking, Tom", he says "Now listen to my question. Can you tell me what is the best time for apples?" "Yes, sir", answers Tom. "It is when the farmer is not at home and there is no dog in the garden". /. Listen to the text "The Best Time for Apples" and answer the questions: Where is the scene taking place? What does the teacher say about the seasons of the year? What question does he ask Tom? What does Tom answer? //. Tell the story that happened at a small English school after the summer holidays. Self check /. Put the verbs into the correct forms: Two men (travel) in a very wild part of America. They (see) no 218 modern houses and no traces of civilization for many days. What they (see) were only a few huts made of wood or tents where Indians (live). One day they (meet) an old Indian who (be) a hunter. He (be) very clever and (know) everything about the forest and the animals living in it and many other things. He (can) also speak English quite well. "Can you tell us what the weather (be) like during the next few days?" one of the two travellers (ask) him. "Oh, yes", he (answer). "Rain (come) and wind. Then there (be) snow for a day or two but then the sunshine (come) again and the weather (be) fine." "These old Indians seem to know more about Nature than we with all our science", (say) the man to his friend. Then he (turn) to the old Indian. "Tell me", he asked, "how you (know) all that?" "I (hear) it over the radio", the Indian answered. //. Translate into English: 1. ? . ? . . 2. ? . . , . 3. ?

 , .

Fluency
/ Let's talk about the weather: 1. What is your favourite season? Why? 2. Do you like to spend your holidays in the south? When did you last rest in the south? Where? What was the weather like? 3. Can you forecast weather? What do you think the weather will be like tomorrow? Do you like this sort of weather? 5. When did you last go to the country? Was the weather fine? 6. What is your favourite season? Why? Do you like winter? (autumn, etc.)? What sort of weather do you prefer in winter? in autumn? etc. 7. Do you remember what the last winter (summer, etc.) was like? 8. Give your arguments for or against autumn (winter, spring, summer). 9. When do you say the weather is nasty? fine? dry? damp? pleasant? 10. Do you like the climate in Belarus? (the place you live in)? Why? ii- Act out the situations:
219

1. Your English friend and you are speaking about the climate in your countries. 2. Your friend and you are speaking about your likes and dislikes as far as the weather and the seasons are concerned. 3. Your friend has just returned from Sochi. He was on holiday there. You want to know about the weather.

///. Speak on: a) the winter (summer, spring, autumn) in Belarus/your native town, the foreign country you visited, etc. IV. Write a letter to your English friend about the weather in the place you live in. Write what you like and what you dislike about the weather. Ask your English friend about the climate in his country. UNIT 20 GRAMMAR: SIMPLE FUTURE COMMUNICATION: "SHALL" AND "WILL" IN REQUESTS, OFFERS AND SUGGESTIONS Illustrative Situations 1. You see an old lady at the railway station. She's carrying a heavy suitcase but you can see it is much too heavy for her. You say to her: "Shall I carry that bag for you?" Questions: What is the old lady doing? Is it a light suitcase? What do you say to her? 2. Susan and her husband are on the motorway. He is driving. He is very tired. Susan says: "Shall I drive?" "Please, do", her husband answers. Questions: Who is driving the car? What does Susan say? What does her husband answer? 3. Julia and her boyfriend are at the cinema now. "Shall I get you some chocolates?" he asks. "Thank you very much. That's very nice of you", is Julia's answer. Questions: Where are Julia and her boyfriend? What does Julia's boyfriend ask her? What does she answer? 4. Deborah feels terrible this morning. "Shall I bring you some tea now?" her daughter asked her a few seconds ago. "No, bring me an aspirin instead", Deborah told her. Questions: How does Deborah feel this morning? What exactly did her daughter ask her? What did Deborah answer? 220 5. It is lunch time and two students want to eat somewhere in town. One of them has an idea. He wants to know if the other student thinks it is a good one. He says: "Shall we have a sandwich and some beer in a pub?" "All right", his friend agrees. Questions: What do the students want to do? Where does one of them want to eat? How does he find out if the other student thinks this is a good idea? What does his friend say? 6. It is Saturday evening and Tony and Susan want to go out somewhere. Neither of them knows where, but then Tony has an idea. He says: "I know. Shall we go to a concert?" "Good idea", Susan answers. Questions: What do Tony and Susan want to do? What does Tony suggest? What are his exact words? Does Susan like the idea? 7. Susan wrote a letter and asked Tom to post it only a second ago. She said: "Will you post this for me, Tom? It must catch the next post". Peter is going out for a walk. "I'll post it for you. I'm going out for a walk anyway," he says. Questions: What did Susan ask Tom to do? What were her exact words? What does Peter say? 8. Jane wants to type some documents but she hat no typewriter. She asks Helen: "Will you please lend me your typewriter?" "Certainly", Helen answers. Questions: What does Jane want to do? Why can't she type the documents? What does she ask Helen? What are her exact words? What is Helen's answer? 9. It's rather hot in here. Shall I open the window? Please, do. Is that better? Yes, thank you. 10. What are you going to do tomorrow evening? I'll probably stay at home and learn some English. Shall we go out instead? No, thank you.

11. Will you be home tomorrow evening? Yes, why? Will you help me with my article? Certainly. Come at any time after 5. 12. I'm thirsty. Will you have a cup of tea? No, thank you. Then, perhaps, you'll have some beer. Yes, please.

221 Practice
/. Offer your services. Use the verb "shall". e.g. You are going to the classroom and so is the teacher, but she has a lot of books in her hands. You say: "Shall I carry the books for you?" 1. You and your friend are going out of the house. The radio in your friend's room is still on. He is outside; you're not. What do you say? 2. Your teacher is trying to talk but a lot ot noise is coming from the street and the window is open. You are next to it. What do you say? 3. Your friend cannot do a problem. You already know the answer. 4. The train is going to leave in a few minutes. Robert is going to get himself a magazine. He sees his girlfriend has nothing to read. What does he say? 5. Two men are trying to push a car. They are finding it very difficult. What do you say? 6. Your friend is going to give a party, but he hasn't got many good records. What do you say? //. Ask your friend lor advice. Begin your sentence with "Shall I?" or "What shall I?" "Where shall I"? e.g. It's very hot in the room. The window is shut. You ask your friend: "Shall I open the window?" 1. You're going out. It's possible that it will rain and you're not sure whether to take an umbrella or not. Ask your friend for advice. 2. It's Ann's birthday soon and you don't know what to give her. Ask your friend for advice. What... ? 3. You've just tried on a jacket in a shop. You are not sure whether to buy it or not. Ask your friend for advice. 4. You are furnishing your new flat. You don't know where to put the piano. You ask your son for advice. Where ... ? 5. Your friend wants you to phone him/her later. You don't know what time to phone Ask him/her. What time ... ? ///. Read the situation Suggest an idea. e.g. You and some other people are sitting inside on a rainy day. You are bored. Suddenly you see a pack of cards. You say: "Shall we play cards?" 1. You and your friend are hungry. There is a Greek restaurant nearby. You think it is a good restaurant. 2. You and your friend have to get somewhere in Moscow. Yoy know it is quickest by Underground. 3. Robert and his girlfriend want to go out. He knows there is a good film at the cinema. What does he say? 4. You and your friend are keen on tennis. You are both free at the moment. You say: ... ? 5. You and your friend are going on a picnic tomorrow. You don't know when you are going to start. You ask' When ... ? 6. Your friend and you are at a restaurant You are looking at the 222 menu .and ask: What ... ? 7. Your friend and you are going to the cinema. You haven 't decide where to meet. You say Where ? IV. Make requests with "Will": e.g. You are sitting at the breakfast table and want the salt and pepper. You ask your neighbour: "Will you pass me the salt and pepper, please?" 1. You are busy and can't answer the phone. You ask your friend: ... ? 2. The coffee is practically cold. You ask the waiter: ... ? 3. You want to light a cigarette but you have no lighter You ask your colleague: ... ? 4. You want to type some documents but you have no typewriter. You ask your friend: ...? 5. You are short of money. You ask your cousin: .. ? 6. You are in bed with the flue. You want to listen to the 9 o'clock news. You ask your daughter: ... ? V. Offer your services in response to the following statements. Your friend will accept or refuse the offer politely. Possible replies to offers: . .; Yes; Yes, please; Do, please; That's very kind of you; No, thank you; It's all right, e.g. Helen doesn't know about the meeting. Shall I tell her? Do, please. 1. I have a terrible headache. 2. The text is too difficult. 3. I am thirsty. 4. My mother is coming at 6 o'clock but I have an appointment at that time. 5. I can't do this work alone. 6. I'd like something to read on the train. 7. I am very tired. 8. I haven't got this dictionary. 9. Jack doesn't know about the picnic. VI. Suggest to your friend: going to the movies, spending the weekend in the country, playing a game of tennis, having a swim, watching the boxing match on television. Your friend will accept or refuse your suggestion. Possible replies to suggestions: OK; Yes; All right; Good idea; I'm afraid (sorry) I can't, e.g. Shall we play cards? Good idea. VII. Make requests and respond appropriately in the following situations:

1. Boss to his secretary: type these letters, photo-copy those documents, send this parcel, work overtime, answer the phone Possible replies to requests: OK; Yes; Certainly; I'll try; I'm afraid (sorry) I can't, e.g. Will you please post this letter?. . 2. Friend to friend:

223
a) Your friend is going on holiday send me a card, write to me, look after my house, look after my garden b) You need your friend's help in a number of ways translate this text for me, repair my typewriter, post the parcel, lend some money, carry my suitcase, answer the phone Fluency A Birthday Present Jill: I've bought your mother a birthday present. Steve: Good. Shall we send a parcel or shall we give her the present this weekend? Jill: As you please. It's a cashmere cardigan. Shall I show you the cardigan? Steve: Yes, please. Oh, it's lovely. How much did it cost? Jill: I'll tell you the truth. A lot of money. /. Listen to the conversation and say what Steve and Jill are going to give Steve's mother as a birthday present. II. Listen to the conversation again and answer the questions: What does Steve ask Jill? What are his exact words? What is Jill's question? ///. Act out the conversation. IV. Situations: a) You are not feeling well today. Your daughter (son) offers to do some work about the house. You accept or refuse the offer. Prompts: go shopping, wash the floor, cook dinner, dust the furniture, clean the windows b) You are going to give a party and you ask your husband for advice. Prompts: invite the Browns, tell Peter about the party, buy some flowers, make a cake, borrow some records, wear the blue dress Going out Brenda: Oh, George ... we haven't got much for dinner. George: That's all right. Shall we eat out? Brenda: Oh, yes! Where shall we go? George: Let's go to that new Italian restaurant. Brenda: That's a marvellous idea. 224 /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: What does Brenda tell George about the dinner? What does George suggest? What does Brenda say? Where do they agree to go? //. Act out the conversation. III. Situation: Your friend and you are planning how to spend the weekend.

Self check
/. Translate into English: 1. , .. 2. ? , . 3. ? 7. 4. ? , . . 5. ? . 6. ? . 7. , . 8. ? . 9. ? 10. ? , . 11. ? , . . 12. ? . 13. , ? 10.30. UNIT 21 GRAMMAR: FUTURE CONTINUOUS Illustrative Situations /. Study these example situations: a) Tom is a football fan and there is a football match on television this evening. The match begins at 7.30 and ends at 9.15. Ann wants to come and see Tom this evening and wants to know what time to come. Ann: Is it all right if I come at about 8.30? Tom: No, don't come then. I'll be watching the match on television. In this situation Future Continuous is used to denote an action which will be going on at a definite moment in the future. b) You can also use Future Continuous to talk about things which are already planned or decided. I'll be going to the city centre later. Can I get you anything?

225
With this meaning "will be doing" is similar to "am doing". I'm going to the city centre later. We often use Will (you) be ing? to ask about people's plans, especially when we want something or want someone to do something. Will you be using your bicycle this evening? No, you can take it. //. Listen to the dialogues, analyse the use of the Future Continuous tense. Learn the dialogues.

1. What's the time? It's five past three. Then I must go to the butcher's. Will you be passing the grocer's on your way? Yes, I will. Do you need anything? Yes, just a pound of sugar, if you don't mind. 2. I'll be seeing you on Tuesday then? I'm afraid not. I shan't be coming here on Tuesday. But I must give you back your book. That's all right. You'll be rehearsing your play with Bill on Tuesday, won't you? Give it to him then. 3. We've got visitors coming to tea today.
What visitors?

The Browns and the Greens. I expect they'll be bringing their children along.

Practice
/. Say what you or other people will be doing at a definite moment in the future. e.g. I'm going to watch TV from 9 till 10 o'clock in the evening. So at 9.30 I'll be watching TV. 1. Tomorrow afternoon I'm going to play tennis from 3 o'clock until 4.30. So at 4 o'clock tomorrow I ...' 2. Jim is going to study from 8 o'clock until 10 o'clock this evening. So at 8.30 this evening he ... 3. We are going to clean the flat tomorrow. It will take from 9 till 11 o'clock. So at 10 o'clock tomorrow morning ... 4. Susan has a lot of typing to do. She's going to type today from 8 a. m. until 5 p. m. So at 4.30 this afternoon ... 5. We are going to pack our things from 6 to 9 this evening. So at 7 o'clock this evening we ... 6. We are going to have our classes from 3 to 6 o'clock. So at 5 o'clock we ... 7. I'm going to write letters from 10 until 11. So at 10.30 I ... 8. From 11 till 6 I'm going to prepare for my exam. So at 2 o'clock I...
226

II. Make up short dialogues using the prompts. e.g. Paul's on holiday; he's having a marvellous time. This time next week I'll be having a marvellous time, too. Paul's on holiday; he's ... sunbathing boating swimming drinking fresh grapefruit water-skiing camping fishing climbing the mountains ///. Answer the questions: e.g. Are you going to watch the match tomorrow? (work) No, I'm not going to watch it because I'll be working. 1. Are you going to phone him now? (sleep) 2. Are you going to ask them now? (have their lunch) 3. Are you going to bed early? (go to a party) 4. Are you coming to the pictures tonight? (do my homework) 5. Is he playing tennis with us tomorrow? (safari exam) 6. Are they going to visit us next week? (go to Scotland) 7. Is he going to Rome immediately? (have a holiday first) IV. Respond to the following statements: e.g. Look, it's getting dark, (it, rain, in a few minutes) It'll be raining in a few minutes. 1. I don't think they will come, (move to a new flat) 2. What are your plans tor tonight? (take a friend to a concert) 3. My vacation is coming to an end. (return to the University, in two days) 4. Stay a little longer, (we, have supper, in a few minutes) 5. You are looking tired. (I, get a holiday soon) 6. I'm going to speak to Mr. Smith about it. (see him tonight) 7. My mother is coming by the 6 o'clock train, (meet her at the station) 8. Jane is packing her things, (leave tonight) e.g. The Wests are moving to London. What a pity! We shan't be seeing them soon. 1. Mary is busy, (go on a picnic) 2. The TV set is out of order, (we, watch TV) 3. Victor is having his classes tonight, (see us at the station) 4. Alice has got a cold, (sing at the concert) 5. John is going away on business, (come to the party) 6. Peter has to get ready for his exam, (play football with us) V. Paraphrase using the Future Continuous: e.g. We are going to London tomorrow. We'll be going to London tomorrow. 1. We're catching the 8 o'clock train. 2. My brother is meeting me at the station. 3. Our wives aren't coming with us. 4. They are staying at home. 5. We're arriving at Paddington Station at ten o'clock. 6. My brother's staying overnight in London, but I'm not.
227

7. I'm returning on the 9 o'clock express. 8. My wife's picking me up at the station. VI. You have already planned your evening. A friend has just told you he wants to see you at 8. He asks what you will be doing then. Make the answers with these words. \. some homework 5. a party with some friends 2. the radio 6. a play on television 3. a letter home 7. dinner at the new Chinese res 4. a new book I got today taurant

8. my suitcases before I go away

VII. Ask questions. e.g. You want to borrow your friend's car. (you/use/your car/this evening) Will you be using your car this evening? 1. You want your friend to give Tom a message this afternoon. (you/see/Tom/this afternoon) 2. You want to borrow your friend's typewriter tomorrow evening, (you/use/your typewriter/tomorrow evening) 3. Your friend is going shopping. You want him/her to buy some stamps for you at the post office, (you/pass/the post office) 4. Your friend is leaving for Moscow tonight. You want him to take some things to your parents who live in Moscow, (you/leave for Moscow/tonight) 5. Your friend often goes to the country on Saturday, but you want to invite him to the theatre, (you/go/to the country/on Saturday) e.g. I usually see Ann on Monday. Will you be seeing her next Monday? I usually ... 1. leave early on Friday, 2. lunch with Bill on Monday; 3. go camping in summer; 4. play golf on Sunday; 5. take out Mary on Monday; 6. watch TV on Sunday evening; 7. listen to the radio on Saturday morning; 8. write to my father on Thursday; 9. meet Arthur on Tuesday; 10. dine out on Saturday; 11. visit my mother-in-law on Wednesday VIII. Ask your friend questions. Ask him (her): what he (she) will be doing at 6 o'clock today; what he (she) will be doing on Sunday; when he (she) will be leaving for Moscow; how long he (she) will be staying there; when he (she) will be having his (her) holidays; where he (she) will be resting; what he (she) will be wearing at the party; when he (she) will be taking his (her) exams 228 Fluency Happy Thanksgiving Thanksgiving is this week and several of our relatives from out of town will be staying with us during the long holiday weekend. Uncle Frank will be staying for a few days. He'll be sleeping on the couch in the living-room. My wife's parents will be staying until next Monday. They'll be sleeping in the guest room over the garage. And Cousin Bertha will be staying for a week or more. She'll be sleeping on a cot in the children's bedroom. My wife and I will be busy for the next few days. She'll be preparing Thanksgiving dinner and I'll be cleaning the house from top to bottom. We're looking forward to the holiday but we know we'll be happy when it's over. Happy Thanksgiving. /. Listen to the text "Happy Thanksgiving", ask and answer questions on the text. II. Retell the text. Food and Talk Last week at a dinner-party, the hostess asked me to sit next to Mrs Rumbold. Mrs Rumbold was a large, unsmiling lady in a tight black dress. She did not even look up when I took my seat beside her. Her eyes were fixed on her plate and in a short time she was busy eating. I tried to make conversation. "A new play is coming to "The Globe" soon", I said. "Will you be seeing it?" "No", she answered. "Will you be spending your holidays abroad this year?" I asked. "No", she answered. In despair, I asked her whether she was enjoying her dinner. "Young man", she answered, "if you ate more and talked less we would both enjoy our dinner". /. Listen to the text "Food and Drink" and answer the questions: Where did the writer sit at the dinner-party? How did the writer try to make conversation? What questions did he ask Mrs Rum-bold? What did she answer? //. Retell the text.

229
The Greenwood Boys

The Greenwood Boys are a group of popular singers. At present they are visiting all parts of the country. They will be arriving here tomorrow They will be coming by train and most of the young people in the town will be meeting them at the station. Tomorrow evening they will be singing at the Workers' Club. The Greenwood boys will be staying for five days. During this time they will give live performances. As usual, the police will have a difficult time. They will be trying to keep order. It is always the same on those occasions. /. Listen to the text "The Greenwood Boys". Ask and answer questions on the text. II. Retell the text. III. Situation: You are going to the South for your summer holidays. Say what you will be doing there. IV. What are some of the things you will be doing at these times: 1. 7.30 tomorrow morning 2. 7.15 tomorrow evening 3. 10.30 next Sunday morning 4. 8.00 this evening 5. this time next week
Across the Channel

Erna Hart is going to swim across the English Channel tomorrow. She is going to set out from the French Coast at

five o'clock in the morning. Erna is only fourteen years old and hopes to set up a new world record. She is a strong swimmer and many-people think that she will succeed. Erna's father will set out with her in a small boat. Mr Hart has trained his daughter for years. Tomorrow he will be watching her anxiously as she swims the long distance to England. Erna intends to take short rests every two hours. She will have something to drink but she will not eat any solid food. Most of Erna's school triends will be waiting for her on the English coast. Among them will be Erna's mother, who swam the Channel herself when she was a girl. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What is Erna Hart going to do? Who will be watching her anxiously?
230

//. Read the text. III. Ask and answer questions on the text. IV. Retell the text. V. What are your plans for the future holidays?

Self check
/. Use the proper tense forms: Terry: I hear you're off to Italy, Steve. Steve: Yes, I (work) in Rome for a few months. Terry: When you (set) off? Steve: On Monday morning. But I (take) two weeks' holiday before starting work. I (spend) a few days in Germany and a week in the Alps with a friend. We (do) some skiing together.
Terry: You (travel) by air?

Steve: No, I (take) the car. I (stay) Sunday night in London and I (leave) Monday morning on the Dover-Ostend ferry. Terry: And at that time on Monday I (sit) here in Birmingham sorting out the correspondence and it probably (pour) with rain, too. Steve: Never mind, Terry, your turn will come! Terry: I hope so. Anyway, I must be off It's five o'clock and my girl-friend (wait) for me outside and she (wait, not) long. Steve: Now it's my turn to envy you. I (do) overtime until 8 o'clock tonight. Terry: Don't work too hard! Have a good trip and don't drive too fast! Steve: I won't! Cheerio, Terry.

//. Translate into English: 1. . . 2. ? . 3. . . 4. . . 5. . . 6. ? , . 7. ? 10 2 . 3 7 . 231

UNIT 22 TOPIC: WEEKEND. PASTIME. GRAMMAR: REVIEW OF TENSES.
PART A TEXT. WHAT PEOPLE DO IN THEIR SPARE TIME

At weekends in England people like to relax. You can relax in many different ways. Some people like to stay at home with their families, and others like to go out and enjoy themselves. Young people enjoy going out to pubs, to the cinema or to nightclubs. Many young people also like to play different kinds of sports. Tennis is very popular in England in the summer when you can play outdoors Other popular sports are badminton, football, basketball and cricket. Cricket is a very traditional English game. It is played a lot at schools and in villages in the summer. If you have children, you often go on day-trips to the seaside or take your children to amusement parks or perhaps to the zoo. In the summer, many parents like to take their children on picnics in the countryside, especially if they live in a big city. It is nice to get away from the noise and the traffic at weekends and relax in the country. If you have a house in the country you probably spend a lot of your time in the garden. Gardening is another very traditional English pastime. People are very proud of their gardens and spend many hours trying to grow beautiful flowers and rare bushes. English people usually have about 5 weeks' holiday a year, apart from public holidays like Christmas and Easter. Many people like to go abroad for their holidays because the English weather is not always sunny. People want to lie in the sun and swim in the sea. So they cross the Channel and go to France, Spain or Italy. Some people fly, but a lot of people drive in their cars to the beaches in Southern Europe. However, many people also enjoy staying in Britain and visiting other regions of their own country. They like going to the sea-side in the south of England or the Lake District in the north. Many people also go to Scotland. It all depends on what you enjoy doing. You can relax in many different ways in England.

Comprehension /. Listen to the text " What People Do in their Spare Time" and answer the questions: How do people relax at weekends in England? What sports are popular in England? Where do people spend their holidays?
232

//. Read the text and analyse the language peculiarities of the text. Do some exercises in the next section to remember them.

Special Difficulties / Ask and answer questions. Use the verb "enjoy". e.g. you/skate Do you enjoy skating? Yes, 1 enjoy it very much. 1. Your son/read. 2. Mike/the picnic 3. Mary/dance. 4 You/the party. 5. you/watch films on television 6. Peter/the concert. 7 You/ /classical music. 8. Your friend/ski. 9. You/tish. . Lucy/play tennis. //. Complete the utterances using the word combination "enjoy oneself (oneselves)": 1. My brother usually spends his holidays in holiday camps, and he always ... 3. We ... in the country last weekend. 3. I'm going to a party tonight. ... ! 4. We were at a concert yesterday. ... you ...? 5. The Parkers went on a picnic on Sunday. They say they ... very much. 6. My sister spent her holidays in Spain. ... she ... ? ///. Paraphrase using the verb "enjoy": 1. Mike likes boating. 2. Helen liked the film very much. 3. We had a good time at the party. 4. I'm fond of gardening. 5. Did you like the book? 6. He likes walking in the forest. 7. Do you like Indian films? 8. You are fond of playing chess, aren't you? 9. We liked swimming in the lake. IV. Say that you or some other people are proud of smb/smth: e.g. Mrs Smith/her son Mrs Smith is proud of her son. 1. Mr Baxter/his wife. 2. We/our children. 3. George/his brother. 4. Ann/her daughter. 5. Mr. Collins/his collection of stamps. 6. The boss/his office. V. Make up your own sentences using the verb "spend" + Participle J: e.g. My son/read detectives My son spends hours reading detectives. 1. My father/fish. 2. Jack/play football. 3, Marian/work in the garden. 4. David/listen to pop music 5. My daughter/do her homework 6 She/play the piano.
233

VI. Fill in the gaps with, either "other" or "another" (self-check) : 1. Will you have ... cup of tea? 2. Where are the ... boys? 3. There are some ... people waiting for you. 4. This pen is broken. Give me ... . 5. He is busy now, ask him about it some ... time. 6. I don't like this suit. Show me ... . 7. What is the ... man's name? 8. One of the hats is mine, the ... is Mr. Blake's. 9. I am worried about Helen. I'm going to send her ... telegram. 10. Give me some ... books. 11.... people saw him there, too.

VII. Translate into English (self check): 1. ? . 2. . ? . 3. , . . 4. . ? , . , . . . Text Exercises /. Ask and answer questions on the text. II. Speak on weekends and holidays in England. III. How do you usually spend your weekends? Do you go in for sports? What is your favourite sport? Where do you usually go for your holidays? Why? PART Conversation Practice Harry's Weekend Harry is American He works as a sound engineer in a recording studio in San Francisco. Interviewer: Harry, could you tell me something about your weekends? Harry: Sure. I: Are they busy, or ... don't you do much? H: No, they tend to be very busy. I don't have much spare time during the week, so when the weekend comes, we try very hard to have a good time.
234

I; So what sort of things do you do? j-j: Well, let's see. It begins on Friday night, of course, er ... we maybe go to a bar but we usually go to the theatre. Saturday morning, that's the time for cleaning the house, washing the car, doing the laundry. After lunch we go for a walk on the beach, or play tennis, or go for a run. In the evening we sometimes go to a movie, but usually we go to watch a band. I: Oh. H: Yea. Not, not in a concert, in a bar you know bars in America are more like clubs. I: Oh, yes. So plenty to do on Saturday. Mmm. What about Sunday?

H: Well, on Sundays we get an enormous pile of newspapers, and we just sit in the garden over a cup of coffee with maybe a continental breakfast and read the newspapers. I: Relax. What about Sunday evening then? H: Well, Sunday evening we quiet down a bit. It's time to get ready for Monday. Another week. So we usually have an early night. Maybe watch a little television. I: Oh, that's very interesting, Harry. Thank you very much. I. Listen to the conversation "Harry's Weekend" and answer the questions: Are Harry's weekends usually busy? What do they do on Friday night? on Saturday morning (evening)? on Sunday? //. Listen to the conversation again. Tell about Harry's weekends. III. Situation: You and your friend are speaking about your weekends.
What are You Doing this Afternoon?

Roger: Hi! It's me. Peter: Oh, hi! How are you? Roger: Fine. Tell me, what are you doing this afternoon? Peter: I'm not sure. I'll probably stay home and read a book. How about you? Roger: Well, I'm planning to go fishing. Would you like to join me? Peter: Sure. I'd be happy to. Going fishing sounds a lot more exciting than staying home and reading a book. Roger: Good! I'll pick you up at around one o'clock. Peter: See you then.
235

/. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: Where is Roger planning to go this afternoon? What does Peter prefer: reading a book or going fishing? //. Listen to the text again and pick out the phrases expressing a future action. III. Act out the conversation.
A Picnic

Tim: Hullo? Mary: Hullo, Tim. This is Mary. Alan and I are going on a picnic. Do you want to come? Tim: Isn't it going to rain, Mary? Mary: I don't think so. The sun's shining and there isn't a cloud in the sky. Tim: Well, I've got some work to do, but I suppose I could put it off till tomorrow. Where are you thinking of going? Mary: Near Stroke. There's a nice spot by the river with some tall elm trees. Tim: It is just before Stroke, on the left of the road? Mary: That's right. It's very easy to find. Tim: I'll come, and I might even go for a swim. Are you taking any food or drink? It's a pity you didn't mention it yesterday. I don't think there's any beer in the house. Mary: Don't worry. We've got some bottles of beer and lemonade and there's half a chicken in the fridge. Tim: Right then. See you there in about an hour. /. Listen to the conversation "A Picnic" and answer the questions: Where are Mary and Alan going today? What is the weather like? Does Tim feel like going to the country? //. Read the conversation and analyse its language peculiarities. III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following: ? . , . ? . , . . . , , . ? . . 236 IV. In one paragraph of about 50 words give a brief account of the conversation. V. Act out the conversation. VI. Tomorrow is Saturday. Your friend phones to invite you to the country for the weekend. You are free tomorrow and would like to come. Your friend has a car, he is going to pick you up at 7 a. m.
On a Phone

Mary: Extension seven five three. Jim: Hi, Mary! It's Jim here. Mary: Oh, it's you again. Jim: Yes, what shall we do this evening? Mary: What do you suggest? Jim: I don't know. You decide. Mary: What about a game of tennis? Jim: No. Not today. How about going to the cinema instead? Mary: Oh, good idea! We could meet at the box-office. At a quarter past seven? Jim: OK. Let's do that.

/. Listen to the conversation "On a Phone" and answer the questions: What does Mary want to do this evening? What does Jim suggest? What are his exact words? //. Listen to the conversation again, reproduce the phrases expressing suggestions. III. Act out the conversation. IV. Situation: Your friend and you are staying in town this weekend. At the moment you are making plans for the coming weekend.
Do you Want to Come with Me?

Angie: Colin? It's Angle. Colin: Oh, hi, Angie! How are things? Angie: . . thanks. Listen, are you doing anything on Saturday? Colin: Saturday? I'm not sure. Why? Angie: Well, it's the international athletics meeting at Crystal Palace. I've got two tickets. I think it is going to be good. Do you want to come? Colin: It sounds fun. I'll check in my diary. Hang on.
237 Angle: . . Colin: Let's see. Oh, that's a pity! Angie: What's wrong? Colin: I am playing in a college football match that afternoon, I'm afraid. ( Angie: That's a shame! Who else can I ask? Colin: You could ask Mike. He's quite keen on athletics. Angie: Yes, . . What's his number? Colin: I can't remember. But I know he is going to be at college this afternoon and I'll ask him to phone you. Angie: Fine. I'll call you home about nine. Colin: . . Angie: Thanks. Look, I'd better go now. I'll be late for work if I'm not careful. Bye for now! Colin: Bye, Angie!

/. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions:

Where is Angie going on Saturday? Why can't Colin come with her? What do they agree to do?

//. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases expressing a future action. III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following:
. , - ? ? . . . . ? .

IV. Express regret in response to the following statements:

e.g. Donald won't come to the party. That's a pity, (or That's a shame) 1. Robert failed in his chemistry exam. 2. I'm afraid I can't lend you any money. 3. I lost 20 pounds yesterday. 4. I couldn't get the tickets for the match. 5. Roger won't take part in the discussion. 6. We have no vacancies.

V. Give advice in response to the following statements:

e.g. I've got a cold, (stay in bed) You'd better stay in bed. 1. I haven't enough literature for my report, (go to the library) 2. The train is leaving in an hour, (take a taxi) 3. It's 6.30. (start at once) 4. The dress is both cheap and nice, (buy) 5. I don't know what's the matter, (ask her) 6. I am going to travel by plane, (go by train) 7. Susan doesn't know about the picnic yet. (phone) 238 VI. Use the conversational phrases from the text in response to the following utterances. 1. How are you getting on? 2. The airport is far away from here. 3. We are going to the seaside for the weekend. Do you want to come with us? 4. Are you free on Tuesday evening? 5. The Browns won't be coming to the party. 6. It's 10 o'clock. 7. What shall we do this evening3

VII. Write the note to Mike which Colin leaves on the college notice board to tell him about Angle's telephone call. Start like this:
Dear Mike, Sorry I missed you but I've got a message from Angie: She's got... I can't go myself because ... She wants to know if you ...

VIII. Act out the conversation "Do you want to come with me?'.'
IX. Situations: a) Mike has read Colin's note and he is phoning Angie to tell her he would like to come, b) Your friend calls you to invite you to the theatre some time next week. But you've got a very busy week and you can't find a suitable day and time. You agree to go to the theatre the week after next. Listening A Picnic in the Country A week ago the Smith family went for a picnic in the country. It was early spring, so they thought it was too cold to go to the seaside. Mrs Smith packed a large basket of food and David put it in the back of the car. They set off early after breakfast and drove about 30 miles into the country until they came to the woods. The sun was shining brightly and the ground was dry. Susan put the blanket on the ground, so that they could sit on the grass. David took the food out of the car. Mr Smith made a fire and Mrs Smith made tea. "Isn't it beautiful here?" said Mrs. Smith. "It's very quiet and green". David had a kite, and soon he was running across the grass with it. "Be careful", shouted his mother, but it was too late! David fell over the basket of food and everything fell out. "Look!" cried Susan. "There are ants in the food!" Yes, there were. There were hundreds of them. The blanket was on the ants' nest!

/. Listen to the text and answer the questions'.

239

Where did the Browns go for the weekend? What was the weather like? What happened after they came to the woods?

//. Imagine you are David. Tell about your last picnic in the country. Give more details. III. When did you last go to the country? What was the weather like? What did you do there? Did you enjoy yourself? How are you going to spend your next weekend?
Weather Reports

Weather reports are often misleading. They report what happened yesterday or the day before yesterday and not what is going to happen today. I remember a Sunday in autumn that was spoiled because of the weather report in the newspaper. "Heavy rains and thunderstorms today", it said and we had to give up our outing and we stayed at home all day waiting for the rain to start. In the morning the sun was shining brightly and there was not a cloud in the sky. People passed our house on their way to the country. "Ah,", we said, as we stood looking out at them through the window, "Won't they come home soaked? At 12 o'clock it became very hot and we began to wonder when those heavy rains were going to come. "They'll come in the afternoon", we said to each other. But not a drop of rain ever fell, and it finished a grand day and a lovely night after it. The next morning we read that it was going to be a fine warm day and we went out without our raincoats and umbrellas. Half an hour later it began to rain heavily and a cold wind blew so that we came home with bad colds and had to go to bed.

/. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What does the writer think about weather reports? How did the weather reports spoil the writer's weekends? //. Do you share the writer's opinion that weather reports are sometimes misleading?
A Wet Night

Late in the afternoon, the boys put up their tent in the middle of a field. Not far from the tent they made a fire and cooked a meal. They were all hungry and the food smelt good. After a wonderful meal, they told stories and sang songs by the camp fire. But some time later it began to rain. The boys felt tired so they put out the
240

fire and got into their tent. Their sleeping-bags were warm and comfortable, so they slept soundly. In the middle of the night, the boys woke up and began shouting. The tent was full of water! They all got out of their sleeping bags and hurried outside. It was raining heavily and they found a stream in the field. The stream ran across the field and right under their tent.

/. Listen to the text and answer the questions. Where did the boys put up their tent? What did they do then? What happened at night? //. Ask your friend questions about his last picnic the country. Iff. Tell about a picnic in the country you enjoyed.
Cycling

David likes cycling very much. He belongs to a cycling club, and almost every Saturday afternoon, he goes off on his bycycle with his friends. In summer he takes his little tent and his bike with him, and camps in some beautiful places of the country When it rains, it is not very pleasant, but when the sun shines and the weather is warm, camping is very nice. David and his friends cook their meals on their little stoves, make a fire and then sing round it until it is almost midnight. Then they get under their blankets in their little tents and go to sleep. Sometimes there are bicycle races, and David goes to see them. They are very interesting. Sometimes David's big brother George rides in these races. Once he won a race and got a beautiful silver cup. David was very happy. David wants to take his bicycle to Germany next summer. He will go from England to Belgium by ship and then ride to Cologne on his bicycle. He will go with some of his friends from the cycling club They will camp every night. Cycling and camping are quite cheap, and David's father will give him money for the ship. He will have a very good time, I think.

/. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What is David's hobby? How does he spend his weekends? What is David planning to do next summer? //. Tell about David's hobby. III. 1. Are you fond of cycling? Did you use to cycle when you were a child? 2. They say camping is very pleasant. What do you think of it? 3. What is your favourite pastime?
241 Hobbies

My hobby is collecting stamps. When I began, I collected the stamps of all countries, but there are too many, so now I collect only Greek and Indian ones, because I have friends in Greece and I live in India. Some of my stamps are very pretty, and they are all interesting. When you look at the stamps carefully, they teach you a lot about the history of their country. My small brother's hobby is watching trains. He goes to our station and watches them there. When an engine goes through the station, he writes down its name and number. He likes train-watching very much, but I don't. I went to the station with him one day but it wasn't interesting, I thought.

My big sister's hobby is sewing. She makes most of her clothes and when I tear my shirt or my trousers, I take them to her and she mends them. My father has a hobby, too. It is gardening. Every Saturday and Sunday afternoon, and sometimes on other summer evenings, too, he digs, or plants flowers, or cuts the thick grass. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What is the boy's hobby? What is his brother's? sister's? father's hobby? //. 1. Do you collect stamps? Do you think it's an interesting hobby? 2. Are you fond of gardening? 3. What is your hobby? Do you spend much time on your hobbies? 4. What hobbies do the members of your family have? Do you think it's good when all the members of the family have the same hobby? 5. I have no hobby. What hobby would you advise me to choose?

Self check
/. Put the verbs into the correct tense forms: It (be) Sunday. I never (get) up early on Sundays. I sometimes (stay) in bed until lunch time. Last Sunday I (get) up very late. I (look) out of the window It (be) dark outside. "What a day"! I (think) . "It (rain) again". Just then, the telephone (ring) It (be) my aunt Lucy. "I've just arrived by train", she (say). "I (come) to see you". "But I (still, have) breakfast," I (say). "What (you, do)?" she (ask). "I (have) breakfast", I (repeat). "Dear me," she (say). "... you always (get) up so late? It (be) one o'clock!" //. Translate into English: 1. ? .
3.

. . 2. . ! ? , . 4. ? , . . 5. . , . 6. . .

Fluency
/. Talking points 1. What do you think is the best way of spending a weekend? Why? 2. What are the most popular hobbies? What do you think of them? 3. I think watching television is a pleasant pastime. Are you of the same opinion? Why do you think so? 4. Are you tor or against spending your next weekend in the country? Give reasons. 5. There is no point in making plans for anything. You never know what may happen tomorrow. What do you think of this opinion?

//. Situations:
1. With two or three other students discuss where you might go for the weekend. Before you start you should each write down brief answers to these questions: Where shall we go? How shall we get there? How much can I afford? How much will it cost? What shall we do there? What arrangements do we need to make? 2. You don't like your friend's suggestion for an evening at the theatre. How would you suggest an alternative? 3. You've made plans to' go to the country with a friend in your old car. Your car has just gone wrong and will cost too much to repair. Phone your friend, explain the situation and make an alternative suggestion about the weekend arrangements. 4. You and your friend are speaking about your pastime and hobbies. ///. Look at the pictures. Say what the people in the pictures are doing. What is the weather like? IV. Write a postcard to a friend describing your last weekend. 242 243
U N I T 23 GRAMMAR: SIMPLE PRESENT AND PRESENT CONTINUOUS IN "IF" AND "WHEN" SENTENCES

Illustrative Situations
1. Tom is making a long-distance call to his girl-friend. His girl-friend is going to come to London tomorrow. Her train will get into Euston station at 10. She does not know London at all. Tom tells her this: "Don't worry. I'll be there when the train gets in". Questions: Where is Tom? What is he doing? When will his girl-friend's train get in? Will Tom be at the station? When? What exactly does he say? 2. It is a cold, foggy winter day. The weather report says the fog is going to get worse. Mrs Collins is phoning Mr Collins. He is at work. She is worried about him because bad accidents often happen on the roads especially after it gets dark. "Don't worry", he says. "I'll get home before it gets dark" Questions: What is the weather like? What does the

weather report say? What is Mrs Collins doing and why is she worried? What does Mr Collins say? 3. The director of a firm is waiting for an important customer The customer is going to arrive any minute, and the director doesn't want to keep him waiting. His secretary knows this. She is speaking to the director now. "Don't worry. I'll tell you as soon as he comes, sir" Questions: Who is the director waiting for? What doesn't he want to do? What are his secretary's exact words? 4. The Browns are going on a picnic at the weekend. But Mrs Brown is not sure if the weather will be fine on that day. Mr Brown says: "We'll cancel the picnic if it rains". Questions: What are the Browns going to do at the weekend' What troubles Mrs Brown? What does her husband say? 5. Julia is working late this evening. All the other typists left five minutes ago. The manager is leaving, too. He is worried about the lights. "Don't worry! I'll turn them off when I leave", Julia is saying He will be very angry if she forgets. Questions: What is Julia doing? Why aren't the other typists there? What is the manager worried about? What is Julia saying to him? Will the manager be angry if she forgets? 6. It is going to rain and Julia hasn't got an umbrella "I'm
244

going to get wet if that bus doesn't come soon!" she is saying to herself. She does not know it but the driver of that car is going to stop and he is going to offer her a lift. Questions: What is the weather like? What is going to happen if the bus doesn't come soon? What is it that Julia doesn't know? 7. Arthur and Deborah are at the opera. The curtain is going to rise and the opera is going to begin in a few seconds. "I hope that woman is going to take off her hat!" Deborah is saying loudly. "We aren't going to see very much if she keeps it on!" Questions: What is going to happen in a few seconds? What does Deborah hope the woman in front is going to do and why? 8. How long must I stay? Stay here till I come back. But how long will that be? I shan't return till it's dark. 9. Why isn't Betty going on holiday? She is waiting until she can afford it. How long will that be? Several months, I expect. 10. Are you going boating tomorrow? I will if the weather keeps fine. What's the weather forecast for tomorrow? The forecast's all right, but you can't always rely on it, can you? 11. I am going on an excursion tomorrow. But what will you do if it is raining? If it is raining I'll stay under cover. I think you'll have to. 12. Bill is a very careless driver. Yes, I'm afraid so. He may have an accident if he doesn't take more care. That's what I am afraid of. 13. Are you going to have a picnic tomorrow? I shall if it's not too wet. But if it is wet? Then I'll stay indoors instead. 14. Will you go abroad for your holidays next summer? Yes, I will if I get a rise this year. Are you expecting one? Yes, I am and I shall be very disappointed if I don't get it. 15. I'm going to the theatre with Tom tomorrow. What will you do if he can't come? If he can't come I'll probably go by myself. 16. I don't know whether to move to London or not. If you move to London you won't see your parents so often.
245

But if I don't I'll not get such a good job.

 I do not know about it.

Practice /. Respond to the following questions: e.g. - - Will you ask Peter to phone me tonight? (he, come home) All right. I'll ask him as soon as he comes home. 1. Will you ask Jack to translate this article for me? (he, do his homework) 2. Will you tell Mike my new address' (I, see) 3. Will you ask Mary to type these documents for me? (I, return home) 4 Will you ask your husband to repair my taperecorder? (he, have free time) 5. Will you ask your son to help me move the furniture? (he, pass his exam) 6. Will you tell John about the meeting? (he, phone) eg. When are you going to the country? (be warm) I'll go to the country when it is warm. 1. When are you going to leave the office? (finish typing) 2. When is your brother going to France? (get a visa) 3. When are you going to talk to Mary? (see her) 4. When are you going away on business? (prepare the documents) 5. When are you going to post the letters? (the boss, sign them) 6. When are you going to play tennis? (the rain, stop) 7. When is Peter going to the seaside? (pass one's exams) //. Make up short dialogues. e.g. You'll tell Tom, won't you? Well, if 1 see him I'll tell him. You'll ... , won't you? Prompts: remind Mary speak to Helen ask Peter give Harry this letter tell them invite her congratulate them discuss it with George e.g. What shall I do, I wonder? Wait until the boss comes back. What shall I do, I wonder? Prompts: Mike/phone the lesson/be over Mary/be free Peter/send a telegram Jack/arrive e.g. What are you going to do now? After I finish my homework, I'll go for a walk. What are you going to do now?
246

Prompts: cook supper/phone Mary do the housework/write a letter to Mother clean the kitchen/go shopping translate the text/watch TV book a ticket/visit Helen send the parcel/go to the movies ///. Reply to the questions on the left choosing from the list on the right. Start with I'll/we'll ... as soon as ... e.g. When are we going to eat1 We'll eat as soon as John gets back. 1 When are you going to do your a) 1 finish reading it homework? 2. Aren't you going to leave soon? b) I get a free weekend 3. When can you lend me that book? c) this programme finishes 4. When are you going to come d) I get my typewriter back and visit us? 5. When are you going to finish e) the babysitter arrives that report? IV. Make the if-clause negative. Make any necessary changes to the main clause to keep the same meaning. e g. If you work hard, you'll pass your exams. If you don't work hard, you won't pass your exams. 1. If you go to the market early, you'll get some fresh fish. 2. If you hurry, you'll catch the bus. 3. If it is sunny, we'll go to the beach. 4. If we hurry, we shan't be late. 5. If the programme is interesting, I'll watch it. 6. If the weather is fine, we'll go to the country.

Look at the sentences in Exercise IV and change them using "unless". e.g. You won't pass your exams unless you work hard. V. Respond to the following utterances: e.g. If I find her telephone number I'll phone her. But what will you do if you don't find her telephone number? (visit) If I don't find it I'll visit her. I. If I see James today I'll tell him the news, (leave a message) 2. If Roger is free this evening we shall play a game of tennis. (go boating) 3. If James repairs my TV set today I'll be watching TV the whole evening, (read) 4. If Helen phones me tonight I'll tell her about it.(send a telegram) 5. Jack will go to the University if he does well in all his exams, (to a technical college) 6. If it snows today I'll go skiing tomorrow, (go to the skating-rink) 247 VI. Make sentences with the given patterns for these situations: e.g. You are going to see the boss. You'll discuss your friend's problem. I'll discuss your problem with the boss when I see him. i Your friend is going to arrive at Sheremetyevo Airport. You'll be there. 2. You are going to get some money from home. You'll pay your friend back then. 3. You know a telegram is coming. You'll tell me the news then. 4. The rain is going to stop. You'll go out then. 5. You are going to be in London. You'll send your friend a postcard. 6. You have to go to the post-office. You'll buy some stamps there. 7. You are going to see your brother. You'll ask him for help. 8. You are going to buy a new car. You'll sell the old

one. 9. Arthur is definitely going to phone soon. You'll speak to him then. 10. You are going to come to Chicago next week. You'll phone your friend, e.g. The party is going to begin at 8. You'll come earlier. I'll come before the party begins. 1. The film is going to begin at 7. You'll get to the cinema earlier. 2. The train is going to leave at 9. You'll be at the station before then. 3. Your boss is going home at 6. You'll finish all the letters earlier. 4. It's going to get dark soon. You'll leave the beach before then. 5. You are going to leave England. You'll buy some books first. 6. The lesson is going to end soon. You'll finish the dictation before that. 7. Your sister is going to New York next week. You'll give her your guide book before then. 8. You are going to Mexico. You'll learn Spanish first, e.g. Perhaps you are going to miss the bus. You'll take a taxi then. If I miss the bus I'll take a taxi. 1. Perhaps the sun is going to shine. You'll sit in the garden then. 2. It is possible that you are going to get a rise. You'll buy a car then. 3. There is a chance you'll go to Boston. You'll visit your friend there then. 4. There is a chance you'll fail the exam. You'll take it again. 5. Perhaps you'll see John. You'll tell him about the match. 6. It might rain tomorrow. You'll stay at home then. VII. Say what the people in these situations will be doing and what they will do. (2 sentences for each situation) e.g. Bill's mother is watching television. He is going to phone her in a minute. She'll be watching television when he phones. She'll answer the telephone when it rings. 1 Richard is standing on the platform. The train will come in a minute. 2. Janet is playing tennis but it is going to rain in a few 248 minutes. 3. Paula is trying to finish her exam. She is writing furiously but the teacher is going to shout "Stop" in a second. 4. Mr: Collins is standing outside Gate 10 at London airport. Her husband will come out soon. 5. The students always listen to the teacher until the bell rings. Then they all rush out. All this will happier tomorrow. 6. Mike is doing his homework. In half an hour his friend will come. VIII. Match the two halves of the following sentences 1. If they find out about this a) if you catch the 9.00 train 2. I won't call a doctor b) there'll be trouble 3. It'll taste much better c) if they offer it to him 4. You'll arrive before lunch dj unless her temperature goes n 5. Will he take the job? e) if you add a little sugar 6. Please don't telephone f) as soon as they arrive 7. I'll cook the spaghetti g) unless it is urgent IX. Make one sentence from two sentences: e.g. You are going to leave soon. You must visit the museum. (... before ...) You must visit the museum before you leave. 1. I'll find somewhere to live. Then I'll give you my address. (... when ...) 2. I'm going to do the shopping. Then I'll come straight home. (... after ...) 3. You'll be in Moscow next month. You must come and see me then.(... when ...) 4. We'll make our decision. Then we'll let you know. (... as soon as ...) 5. I'm going to finish reading this book. Then I'll get the dinner ready. (... after ...) 6. Perhaps I'll need some help. Then I'll ask you. (... if...) 7. George will come soon. We shan't start dinner without him. (... until ...) 8. I'll arrive tomorrow. I'll phone you at once. ( as soon as ...) 9. She's going to Sweden. She'll learn Swedish first. (... before...) 10. Perhaps she'll be sleeping when you come. Don't wake her up then. (... if ...) 11. Jane's working day is over but she isn't going to leave the office. She is typing an important document. (... until ...) X. Complete the following sentences: 1. I'll stay at home until ... 2. If I see Mike tomorrow ... 3. If you hurry ... 4. I'll visit my friend after ... 5. She will help him when ... 6. We shall go for a walk after ... . 7. He won't leave until ... . 8. ... when the rain stops. 9. ... I'll ring you up. 10. As soon as Mike passes his exams ... 11. I shall cook dinner before ... XI. Put the phrases in this list into the right column (J or 3). Write at least 5 sentences. 249 you come, I'll be there, you arrive on time, the weather is fine, we 11 meet you, I'll be very pleased. 1 2 3 if XII. Make up short dialogues. Observe the difference in the use of tense forms in the clauses introduced by the conjunctions "when" and "if". e.g. When will Lucy come? I don't know when she will come. But when she comes I'll let you know. Prompts: Mike/phone me Susan/come to Minsk John/write to me Helen/send a telegram Jack/translate the article The boss/sign the documents Mary/type the letters Jim/buy the tickets e.g. I wonder if Gemma will phone me today. But if she phones me today I'll invite her to my birthday party. Prompts: 1. Jack/call on me we/play a game of chess 2. Mary/visit us we/tell her the news 3. I/see Peter I/tell him about it

4. Alice/come to class I/remind her 5. Father/return home early I/ask him to take me to the circus XIII. Write a short list of Dos and Don'ts. Give explanations for your advice. e.g. Do Wear comfortable shoes. If you don't, you'll get blisters, e.g. Don't Don't be late. If you are late, the teacher will be angry. XIV. Answer the questions using "when" and "if" sentences. 1. When will you go home? 2. How long will you stay at the Institute today? 3. When will you go to the cinema? 4. What will 250 you do on Sunday? 5. When will you visit your friend? 6. When will you go for a walk? 7. What will you do this evening? 8. Will you go shopping today? 9. Will you watch TV tonight? 10. When will you go skiing? Fluency What a Cheek! Jane: I'll clean the car later on this afternoon. Do you want to help me? David: Well, I don't have a lot of time at the moment, but I'll wash the windows for you if you want. Jane: Good If we work together we'll finish it by 3 o'clock. That means I'll have time to change for the party. David: Party? What party? Do you mean that I have to help you so that you can go to a party without me? What a cheek!

/. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: What is Jane going to do this afternoon? What does she ask David to do? Where is Jane going in the evening? //. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases with the Simple Future. III. Read and act out the conversation An Appointment Jill and Steve are going to Netting Hill Gate. They are still at home. Jill: Hurry up, Steve, it's 10 o'clock. We'll be late! The appointment is for 10.30! Steve: Damn! We'll never get to Netting Hill Gate in half an hour. Jill: Oh, yes, we will. We'll go in the car. I'll get it If we leave immediately, we'll get there at the right time. Steve: It'll be quicker if we take the Underground. Jill: No, it won't. Now, where are the car keys? Have you got them? Steve: I hope we'll like the flat. Jill: I'm sure we will. Steve: I expect it'll have some disadvantages. Jill: Where are the car keys? Steve: Well, if you don't find them soon, we won't be there until 11 o'clock. I suppose they'll be in your handbag after all. Jill: Oh, bother! Let's take the Underground. 251 /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: Where are Jill and Steve going? How will they get there? Why can't they go by car? //. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the if-sentences. III. Read and act out the conversation.
Harry is Going to Greece

Harry: I've arranged a holiday abroad this year. I'm going to Greece for six weeks. I fly there on June 5th. James: June 5th? That's the day I begin my new job. Just think, as you fly out of England I'll be putting on my new suit and trying to look like a real banker! Harry: Well, you'll earn plenty of money. But just think! When you're sitting behind your desk I'll be lying on a beach in twenty-seven degrees of sun. James: Well, at least send me a postcard. /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: Where is Harry going to spend his holiday? When is he flying to Greece? What will James be doing on June 5th? //. Read the conversation and analyse the use of tenses expressing a future action. III. Act out the conversation.
The Prime Minister is Leaving for Brussels

The Prime Minister is leaving for Brussels tomorrow to attend an EEC conference. The Minister of Defence will accompany him. The talks will probably last two days. The Prime Minister himself is expecting a difficult debate particularly on the second day when they are discussing the question of defence strategy. / Listen to the text. II. Read the text. III. Cover the text, ask and answer questions on the text. IV. Retell the text.

252
Too Bad

A. Ronald wants to stay up late to watch a movie tonight, but he knows he shouldn't. If he stays up late to watch a movie, he won't get to bed until after midnight. If he doesn't get to bed until after midnight, he'll probably be very tired in the morning. He might oversleep. If he oversleeps, he'll be late for work. If he's late for work, his boss might be angry and fire him. So, even though Ronald wants to stay up late to watch a movie tonight, he isn't going to. Too bad! B. Mr and Mrs Watson want to move to Arizona, but they know they shouldn't. If they move to Arizona, they'll be away from their children in New Jersey. If they are away from their children and grandchildren in New Jersey, they won't see them very often. If they don't see them very often, they'll feel lonely and depressed So, even though Mr and Mrs Watson want to move to Arizona, they aren't going to. Too bad!

/. Listen to the texts. II. Read the texts. HI. Retell the texts. IV. Make up your own texts with if-sentences. Self check /. Put the verbs into the correct tense forms: A. 1. You (not, catch) the 10 o'clock train, if you (not, hurry) 2. I (wait) for you, until you (be) ready. 3. If the weather (be) fine, we (have) a picnic on Sunday. 4. When I (finish) my work, I (take) the children out for a walk. 5. He (leave), before you (arrive). 6. I (have) a rest, after 1 (finish) this work. 7. I (speak) to him, when I (see) him next time. 8. I (not, leave) until you (return). 9. If you (not, take) the job, you (be) sorry. 10. What (happen) to me if I (tell) them? 11. ... (you/tell) me, when breakfast (be) ready? 12. If you (ask) him politely, he (help) you. 13. I (be) there when she (arrive). 14 If he (not, attend) the conference, he (not, see) his friends. 15. When she (hear) her result, she (be) pleased. 16. I (not, phone) you unless something important (happen). 17. If he (not, come), you (be) upset? 18. They (laugh) when they (realise) it's a trick. 19. I think you (like) Nick when you (meet) him. 20. I (send) you a postcard as soon as I (reach) Pans. 21. I (get) some fresh eggs if they (have) any in the market. 22. (Go) she to college if she (get) good grades in her exams?
253

23. If he (offer) Guy a job, Guy (take) it. 24 If he (tell) me to go, I (go). B. "The moment the sun (rise) we (get) up and (dress). While you (prepare) breakfast I (pack) the bags. We (set) off as soon as everyone (be) ready. We (not, stop) until it (be) time for lunch. While we (have lunch) we (discuss) our plans for the day after tomorrow. When we (finish) eating, we (sleep) for an hour. We (hurry) during the afternoon, while it (be) still daylight, and if the weather (be) bad, we (put on) our raincoats. As soon as it (get) dark, we (make) camp. Before everybody (go) to sleep, we (have) another discussion". " we (not, have) any dinner?" C. Mother: I'm off to work now. What time will you be back? Angle: About six. But I (ring) you if there (be) any problems. Mother: Well, if you (be) back before me, you (have to) get something for dinner. Angle: O. K. I (decide) on something when I (get) to the supermarket. Mother: If I (pass) a greengrocer's, I (buy) some strawberries. Angie: Great! Mother: Is Colin coming round tonight? Angie: He didn't say but if he (get in touch), I (invite) him to supper. Mother: Look at the time. I (miss) the bus unless I (go) now. Angie: O. K. Bye. I (see) you when I (get) home. //. Translate into English: 1 , . 2. , . 3. , . 4. , . 5. , . 6. , ? 7 , . 8. , . 9. , . 10. , . 11. , . 12. , . 13. , . 14. , . 15. , . 16. , .

254
UNIT 24 TOPIC: GIVING A PARTY GRAMMAR: REVIEW OF TENSES

PART A TEXT. THE WILSONS' PARTY Mr and Mrs Wilson invited all their friends and neighbours to a party last night. They stayed home all day yesterday and prepared for the party. In the morning the Wilsons worked outside. Their daughter Margaret cleaned the yard. Their son Bob painted the fence. Mrs Wilson planted flowers in the garden and Mr Wilson fixed their broken front steps. In the afternoon the Wilsons worked inside the house. Margaret washed the floors and vacuumed the living-room carpet. Bob dusted the furniture and cleaned the basement. Mr and Mrs Wilson stayed in the kitchen all afternoon. He cooked spaghetti for dinner and she baked apple pies for dessert. The Wilsons finished all their work at 6 o'clock. Their house looked beautiful inside and out! Everybody enjoyed the Wilsons' party last night. The guests arrived at about 7.30. After they arrived, they all sat in the living--room. They ate cheese and crackers, drank wine and talked. Some people talked about their children. Other people talked about the weather. And everybody talked about how beautiful the Wilsons' house looked inside and out! The Wilsons served dinner in the dining-room at 9.00. Everybody enjoyed the meal very much They liked Mr Wilson's spaghetti and they "loved" Mrs Wilson's apple pie. In fact everybody asked for seconds. After dinner they sat in the living-room again. First Bob Wilson played the piano and his sister Margaret sang. Then Mr and Mrs Wilson showed slides of their trip to Hawaii. After that they turned on the stereo and everybody danced. As you can see, the Wilsons' guests enjoyed the party very much. In fact, nobody wanted to go home

Comprehension /. Listen to the text "The Wilsons' Party" and answer the questions: When did the Wilsons have a party? How did they prepare for the party? What time did the guests arrive? What did they do in the
255

living-room? What time did the Wilsons serve dinner? Did the guests enjoy the meal? What did the guests do after dinner? //. Read the text and analyse the language peculiarities of the text. Do some exercises in the next section to remember them.

Special Difficulties
/. Report the following requests Do it as in the example: e.g. Mary to Peter: Will you please give me your dictionary for a few days' Mary asked Peter for his dictionary for a few days. 1. Mike to Jarnes: Will you please lend me your bicycle for an hour? 2 Alice to Helen: Will you please give me your pen? 3. Mrs Smith to her friend- Will you please lend me your records for a week? 4. Mr Jackson to his neighbour: Will you please lend me your car for tomorrow? 5. Dick to his father: Will you please give me some oranges? 6. Bill to Jack: Will you please lend me your tape-recorder? //. Repeat what you have just said: e.g. Put that pen down. Yes, put it down. 1. Take off your coat. 2. Put on your jersey. 3. Don't turn the light off. 4. Give away all your old toys. 5. Switch on the TV set. 6. Write down my address. 7. Take away that typewriter. 8. Turn on the iron. 9. Give back that book. 10. Ring up Peter. ///. Answer the questions, use the verb "prepare". Observe the use of the preposition "for": e.g. What is Betty doing? (the party) She's preparing for the party. 1. What is your daughter doing? (the exam). 2. What are the children doing? (the picnic) 3. What is your father doing? (the business trip) 4. What is Jack doing? (the excursion) 5. What are the students doing? (the test) 6. What is the boss doing? (the meeting) IV. Answer the questions using the prepositions "inside" and "outside": e.g. Where are the keys? They are inside the box. 1 Where is the car? (the garage) 2. Where are the students5 (the lab) 3. Where are the boys? (the garden) 4. Where is Mike? (the house) 5. Where is the bicycle? (the yard) 6. Where is the radio-set? (the box) 7. Where is the ice-cream? (the fridge) 8. Where are the notebooks? (the bag)
256

V. Translate into English (self check): 1. 3 . 2. ? . 3 e . ? . 4. " . 5. . 6. ? . 7. . . 8. .

Text Exercises /. Ask questions about: a) the preparations for the party; b) the dinner; c) the entertainments. //. Speak on: a) the preparations for the party; b) the party itself. ///. When did you last go to a party? Did you enjoy yourself? How did you spend your time? Do you sometimes invite your friends and relatives to your place? When did it happen last? What preparations for the party did you

make? What was the party like?

PA RT Conversation Practice
I'm Looking Forward to it!

(A man is calling a couple he doesn't know) Rose: Hello? Carl: Hello, is this Rose Alexis? Rose: Yes. Carl: You don't know me, but this is Carl Matthews. Ron Apple in Tucson gave me your number and asked me to give you a call. Rose: Oh, that's nice. So you're a friend of Ron's? How is he anyway? Carl: Oh, he's doing very well. Their new baby boy's a real tiger, and Ron's got a promotion. Lucy is planning to go back to work soon, and she's looking forward to that. Rose: Well, that's good to hear. Carl, what are you doing in Minneapolis? Carl: I'm attending a conference at the Hilton until Thursday. Rose: Well, do you have any time at all to get together? Carl: Well, tonight there's a banquet I have to go to. But tomorrow and Thursday evening I'm free Rose: Good, why don't you come for dinner tomorrow? Do you have a car?
Carl: No, I'm afraid I don't.
257

Rose: Well, I'll ask Bill to pick you up after work say, at six? Then he can avoid the rush hour. Carl: Sounds absolutely great! My room's 483, Carl Matthews. He can call me from the lobby and I'll come down. Rose: Fine. I'm looking forward to it! Carl: Me, too. Until tomorrow then. Rose: Bye. /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: Why is Carl Matthews calling Rose Alexis? How is Ron Apple? What is Carl doing in Minneapolis? Is he going to visit Ron's friends? //. Listen to the conversation again. In one paragraph of about 60 words give a brief account of the conversation. III. Read the conversation. IV. Find in the text appropriate phrases for the following: ? . . , 6 ? . ? . . ! . V. Give a piece of advice to your friend: e.g. Why don't you go in for sports? That sounds a good idea. Prompts: go to the seaside, ask David for help, send him a telegram, buy yourself a guidebook, phone Mary, book a room in advance. VI. Act out the conversation. VII. Situation: You are at Paul's house. He has just picked up the phone when you come into the room. You hear what he says, but can only guess what the caller, Lucy, says. Read everything Paul says first, then fill in the phrases Lucy might say. Paul: Lucy! How nice to hear from you. How are you? Lucy: ... Paul: I'm fine, thanks. Lucy: ..... Paul: Next Saturday evening? Nothing special, I think. Lucy: ..... Paul: Of course, if it's anything like your last party. Thanks very much. 258 Lucy: .... Paul: I'd like to, of course, but I'm doing something next Sunday. Lucy: ... Paul: Yes, I will. And give my regards to your parents, too. Lucy: ... Paul: Yes, I'll look forward to it. Bye! VIII. Situation. You have invited a few of your very good friends around for a party this evening, but one of your friends is calling to say he (she) can't come. You are sorry, of course. You agree to meet some other time.
At a Party

Maggie is at an office party. She's talking to a photographer. Maggie: Hallo! This is a good party, isn't it? Joe: Yes, it is. It's fantastic. Maggie: You're not English, are you? Joe: No, I'm not. Maggie: Oh, of course, you're American. Joe: No, I'm not American. I'm Canadian. I live in Toronto. Maggie: Really? Joe: Yeah! But how about a drink? Would you like a glass of beer?

Maggie: No, thank you. I don't like beer very much. Joe: Well, would you like a glass of wine? Red or white? Maggie: White, please and dry. I like dry white wine. Joe: Right! One glass of white wine. It's cold too. Maggie: That's lovely! Thank you. Joe: Would you like to meet my friends? Maggie: Yes, I would. Are they Canadian too? Joe: No, they're not. They are American. /. Listen to the conversation "At a Party" and answer the following questions: Where is Maggie? Who is she talking to? Where is Joe from? What nationality is he? What does Joe offer Maggie? What are his exact words? //. Read the conversation and analyse its language peculiarities. III. Find in the text the appropriate English phrases for the following: ? . , ? ? , . . ? 259 ? ? ? .
IV. Offer your friend:

a cup of tea, a glass of lemonade, a piece of bread, a cup of milk, some biscuits, a cake, a glass of beer, a cup of coffee, a glass of red wine, some apples, some more tea, some more water, some more bread. Your friend will accept or refuse. e.g. Would you like a glass of dry wine? Yes, please. I'd love a glass. e.g. Would you like a glass of red wine? No, thanks. I don't like red wine.

V. Respond expressing invitation: e.g. Is that your book? Yes, would you like to read it? 1. Is that your record? (hear) 2. Is that your car? (see) 3. Are these your books? (read) 4. Are these your stamps? (see) 5. Is this your typewriter? (use) VI. Act out the conversation. VII. Situation 1: Your friend has just come to see you. You invite him (her) into the sitting-room for a cup of coffee. Your friend prefers strong tea with milk. You offer him (her) a cake but he (she) prefers biscuits. After tea you offer your friend to see your photographs. Situation 2: You've come to New York to an international conference. At the moment you are at a banquet at a restaurant. Sitting next to you is a beautiful woman. You are offering her different things on the table and trying to make conversation. You introduce yourselves and exchange information about jobs and nationalities. She is a physicist from Cambridge University.
I Really Must be Going

Angela: Well, it's really late. I really "must be going now. I'm ever so tired. Thanks very much for the party though. It was smashing! Paul: Are you sure? Angela: Yes, I really must be going. I've got a long way to get home. Paul: Well, you don't look tired. Angela: I feel it. (laughs) Paul: Oh, come along! Stay a while!
260

Angela: I'd love to but... Paul: Dan's staying. Tony and Kate are staying. Angela: No, I really can't. 1 must go I have to be up early tomorrow. Paul: You've got to be on your way? Angela: Yes. Pa.ul: What a shame! Well, I hope we'll see you again soon. Angela: Thanks very much. Bye. Paul: Bye, bye. /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: What excuse does Angela give to leave the party? What does Paul say to her as she is leaving?

//. Act out the conversation. III. Situation: You are at a party which you are not enjoying very much and are waiting for an excuse to leave. When you see two or three others leaving early, you think this is your chance. What do you say to your English host/hostess as you get up to go, and what excuse do you give for leaving? Listening Christmas It was Christmas and there was a big party in the house. Guests came and went, but the party continued. Then the bell rang. Several people shouted, "Come in " and a small man opened the front door and came in. Nobody knew him, but the host went to meet him and took him to the bar for a drink. The man sat there happily for an hour and a half and drank. Then suddenly he stopped and looked at his host. "Do you know", he said, "Nobody invited me to the party. I don't know you. I don't know your wife and I don't know any of your guests. My wife and I wanted to go out in our car, but one of your guests' cars was in front of our gate, so I came here to find him and my wife is waiting in our car for me to come back". /. Listen to the text "Christmas". Ask and answer questions on the text.

II. Retell the text. III. How do you usually celebrate Christmas? Do you usually go out or stay at home at Christmas? How did you celebrate Christmas this year? 261
At a Party

It was a few days before Christmas, so when the office closed at half past five, most of the young men and typists stayed and had a party. They ate and drank, danced and sang songs and nobody wanted to go home. But Joe had a wife at home and lived quite a long way from the city. Every few minutes he looked at his watch and at last when it was very late, he began to leave. "Joe!" shouted his friends. "Are you leaving? Why don't you stay and enjoy the party?""! am not leaving", said Joe, "I am only going down to the station to miss the train back home. I will be back here in a few minutes". /. Listen to the text "At a Party", ask and answer questions on the text. /I. Retell the text.

Self check
/. Use the proper tense forms: Caroline: 26721. Paul: Hullo. Caroline? Caroline: Yes? Paul: Caroline. It's Paul. Caroline: Hullo. Paul: We (have) a telegram from Nina's brother this morning. He (fly) in from Ceylon. Caroline: Oh, gosh! Paul: And he (arrive) at Heathrow this evening some time. But we (contact) the airport and the flight number (be) wrong, so we(not, quite, be sure) what time he (come). Caroline: Yes. Paul: And we think we ought to go and meet him. Caroline: Oh, well, yes. Paul: ... because he (not, know) his way around too well. Caroline: No. Paul: So I (doubt) whether we (be able) to come to the party. Caroline: Oh, what a shame! Well, you know if he (feel) up to it, see if you can bring him along. You know, I mean if the time (be) right, and so on. Why don't you do that? Paul: If he (get) in early enough, I think we might try and do that. But we may have a long wait there, and if it 262 (be) too late, he (probably, want) a bath and just want to get to bed. Caroline: Oh, yes. He (just, want) to relax. Paul: But I (take) a week's holiday while he (be) here, so perhaps we can get over and see you one evening during the week Caroline: Oh, well, that would be nice. Just give me a ring. Paul: . . Bye, bye!

//. Translate into English: . 37 . . . . , . , . . 40 . . Fluency /. Talking points 1. Do you like going to parties? If so, what kind of parties do you prefer, and why? If not, why not? 2. Do you like holding and organising parties yourself? Why/Why not? 3. Discuss some ways of getting rid of a party (or guests who overstay their welcome). 4. What is your idea of a good party? 5. Do you like to go out to a restaurant for a party? Why? Why not? //. Act out the following situations: 1. You are going to give a party tomorrow. So you are calling your friend. She (he) says she'd (he'd) like to come and asks you some questions. (Prompts: What time ...? How many guests ...? pop records? bring anything? plenty to eat and drink?) 2. You are at a party. There are some other guests at the party. Some of them are the host's and the hostess's colleagues, the others are their school friends. You get acquainted and ask each other some questions. 3. You have spent a very enjoyable evening at your friend's party. It's time for you to leave. Your friend wants you to stay a little longer but you can't. 263

///. What was the last party you held or were invited to? a birthday party? New Year party? etc. Tell us what it was like. IV. You have a new flat. Write a letter like this inviting your neighbour in the class to a party at your flat. Flat 1, 3, Oakley Street, Chelsea, London S. W. 3 November 1st, 19... Dear Jim, I live in Chelsea now and I have a new flat. Please note my new address. Put it in your diary! Would you like to come to a party on Saturday November 10th at 8 p.m.? Would you like to bring Sally too? Yours Stephen This is Jim's answer to Stephen's letter. Top flat, 3 Riverside Road, Fulham, London S. W. 5 November 3rd 19... Dear Stephen, Thank you for your invitation. I'd love to come to your party. Sally would like to come too, but she's busy. Would you like to borrow my new Japanese tape recorder? It's fantastic. See you on the 10th. Yours, Jim Now write your own answer to your neighbour's letter of invitation.

UNIT 25 GRAMMAR: DEGREES OF COMPARISON. THE USE OF ARTICLES WITH GEOGRAPHICAL NAMES Illustrative Situations /. Study these example situations: Adjectives 1. Iraq is hotter than Italy. 2. Room 10 is much smaller than room 11.
264

3. Betty is a little shorter than her brother. 4. Lake Baikal is the deepest in the world. 5. John is the tallest of his friends. 6. Mary is beautiful. Susan is even more beautiful than Mary. Lucy is the most beautiful of the three girls. 7. This armchair is much more comfortable than that. 8. The red coat costs $ 500. It is very expensive. The blue coat costs $ 300. It is less expensive than the red one. The black coat costs $ 200. It is the least expensive of the three. 9. I'm as tall as my brother. (We are the same height) 10. Is Athens as noisy as Cairo? (Are they equally noisy?) 11. Italy is not as (so) hot as Iraq. 12. The exam was not as (so) difficult as 1 thought. Irregular 1. John's English is good but Maria's better (than John's). 2. Mike's spelling is bad. Roger's spelling is even worse than Mike's. Jack's spelling is the worst. 3. I have few books. I have only 10. Peter has fewer books. He has 7. Jack has the fewest books. He's got only 3 books. 4. I have little free time. Mary has less time than 1. Jane has the least free time. 5. Robert has 6 notebooks. Jack has more notebooks. He has 11. John has the most books. He has 15. 6. My elder brother is 5 years older than 1. My grandmother is the oldest in our family. Her eldest son is my father. 7. The University is farther from here than the Medical Institute. 8. I saw Dick in the farthest corner of the park. 9. Please, send the books back without further delay. Adverbs 1. Jane runs faster than Helen. Mary runs fastest. 2. Tony earns more money than Jim because he works harder than Jim. 3. Alice types more quickly than Tina does. Susan types most quickly. 4. I swim well. My mother swims better than 1 do. My father swims best of all. 5. Olaf speaks English fluently. Hans speaks English less fluently than Olaf. Victor speaks English least fluently. 6. Michael works much harder than his brother. 7. Robert drives much more carefully than he used to. 8. James plays as well as Victor does. 9. You shouldn't drive as (so) quickly as that. . Mary doesn't study as hard as Betty does.
265

11. I'm working harder than 1 did last year for my exams. Well, 1 hope you'll pass them more successfully than you did last year. I ought to. I take my work much more seriously than 1 used to, so 1 hope I'll be all right.

12. Passenger: Could you tell me how 1 could travel most cheaply from London to Derby, please? Booking clerk: You could catch the 5.20 train. It gets there the quickest. It also costs the least. Passenger: It must be my lucky day. 13. I met Jane Green last month. She is a very pretty girl. She can't be as pretty as Kate Smith. Yes, she is. She is prettier. I can't believe it. 14. I think Bill is the smartest man in the town. I don't agree with you. Don't you? No, 1 don't. I think Jim is much smarter. 15. Alice is the prettiest girl in our office. Yes, but she is the least sensible one. Oh, but surely, she is not less sensible than any of her friends. Perhaps not. 16. Is Italy as hot as England? Oh, Italy's hotter than England. Is Austria as cheap as France? Oh, Austria's cheaper than France. 17. I think London's romantic. But it's not as romantic as Paris. I think London's exciting. But it's not as exciting as Paris. Do you really think Paris is romantic? Oh yes. Paris is much more romantic than London. And exciting? Oh yes, much more exciting than London. 18. Daisy thinks she's getting fat and she's talking to Maggie who is very slim. Maggie: How many chocolates do you eat? Daisy: I'm sure 1 eat fewer chocolates than you do. Maggie: How much beer do you drink? Daisy: I'm sure 1 drink less than you do. 19. Waiter: So you want a cheap meal, is that it' Jake: Yes, please, the cheaper the better. Waiter: Yes, sir. Would you like a hot curry? Jake: Yes, please, the hotter the better. 266

Practice
/. Compare the size or quality of the objects: e.g. your garden and your friend's garden (large). My garden is larger than yours. 1. Your kitchen and your neighbour's kitchen, (small) 2. Gemma and Helen, (pretty) 3. Your typewriter and your friend's typewriter, (good) 4. your spelling and your friend's spelling (bad) 5. the grey suit and the black suit (cheap) 6. Moscow and St. Petersburg, (old) 7. January and March, (cold) 8. Spring and summer, (warm) 9. Regent Street and Queen Street (long) 10. Mike and David, (tall) 11. Your holiday and your friend's holiday, (short) //. Disagree with the following statements: e.g. Mike is the oldest in the group, (young) No, he is the youngest in the group. 1. Mary's drawing is the best, (bad) 2. Jack is the shortest of his friends, (tall) 3. This room is the largest at the office, (small) 4. Victor has the most mistakes in his dictation, (few) 5. The 22nd of June is the shortest day in the year. (long). 6. January is the hottest month, (cold) 7. The Indian Ocean is the coldest, (warm) 8. The Baxters' house is the worst in the district, (good) 9. Donald does the most work, (little) ///. Compare: e.g. the film, the book and the play (interesting) The film is interesting, the play is more (less) interesting than the film, the book is the most (the least) interesting. 1. Chinese, English, German (difficult); 2. Ann's dress, Helen's dress. Lucy's dress (fashionable); 3. The hotel in Regent Street, the hotel in King Street, the hotel in River Street (comfortable); 4. The typewriter, the TVset, the radio-set (expensive); 5. Spring, winter, summer (pleasant); 6. Mary, Jane, Alice (beautiful) IV. Say that the things below are of equal quality: e.g. Chinese is difficult. And Japanese? Japanese is as difficult as Chinese. 1. Our house is old. And yours? 2. Our sitting-room is large. And yours? 3. This raincoat is expensive. And what about that one? 4. My car is comfortable. And yours? 5. June is lovely here. And what about July? 6. The book is interesting. And what about the film? 7. I am very busy and you? V. Say that two things or people are different: e.g. India is large. And Poland?

 Poland is not as (so) large as India. 1. The Mississippi is long. And the Volga? 2. The Pacific Ocean is deep. And what about the Indian Ocean? 3. The Black Sea is warm. And what about the Baltic Sea? 4. Asia is large. And Australia? 5. Minsk is old. And Soligorsk? 6. Mrs Smith is beautiful. And her daughter? VI. Make comparisons: e.g. Jill gets up at 7.45. Steve gets up at 8 o'clock, (early) Jill gets up earlier than Steve. Steve doesn't get up as early as Jill. 1. The Netting Hill Gate flat costs 75 a week. The Baxters' flat costs 60 a week, (expensive) 2. Steve's salary is 700 a month. Jill's salary is 450 a month, (high) 3. Steve's office is 30 minutes away by bus. Jill's school is only 20 minutes away, (far away) 4. Jeff weighs 85 kilos. Steve weighs only 75 kilos, (fat) 5. Pam and Jeff have two holidays a year. Jill and Steve have only one holiday, (many) 6. The rent for Steve's flat is 60 a week. The rent for Jeff's flat is 90 a week, (reasonable) VII. Say that you don't agree with the following statements: e.g. Mike's translation is as good as Peter's. No, Mike's translation is much better than Peter's. 1. Exercise 20 is as easy as exercises 26 and 27. 2. Jack makes as many mistakes as Peter. 3. This coat is as cheap as that one. 4. January is as cold as March. 5. Our room is as dark as yours. 6. Mr Brown is as old as Mr Robinson. 7. Roger is as tall as his father. 8. This record player is as good as that one. 9. Finland is as large as India. 10. The airport is as far as the railway station, e.g. Mary is as beautiful as her sister. No, her sister is much more beautiful. 1. Today's programme is as exciting as yesterday's. 2. Mr. Jackson's report is as interesting as Mr Baxter's 3. Betty is as sociable as Susan. 4. Text 5 is as difficult as Text 6. 5. The suit is as expensive as the raincoat. 6. Your office is as comfortable as mine. VIII. Compare the degree of quality of an action. Use the prompts: e.g. Jack, Lucy, Helen/work hard. Lucy works hard. Jack works harder than Lucy and Helen works hardest (of all). 1. Betty, Susan, Mary/type well. 2. John, his father, his mother/get up early. 3. Mr Brown, Mrs Brown, their son/earn much. 268 4. Jane, her sister, her brother/come home late. 5. Jack, Mike, Peter/run fast. 6. Helen, Lucy, Jane/swim little, e.g. Margaret, Linda, Kate/type quickly. Margaret types quickly, Linda types more quickly than Margaret, and Kate types most quickly. 1. David, John, Alec/drive carefully. 2. Olaf, AH, Hans/speak English fluently. 3. Lucy, her sister, her mother/sing beautifully. 4. Jane, Mary, Gemma/dance gracefully. 5. Mrs White, Mrs Baxter, Mrs Short/type carelessly. IX. Respond to the following utterances: e.g. Dick drives quickly. And Jack? Jack drives as quickly as Dick. 1. Helen works hard. And her brother? 2. Mr Smith earns much. And his wife? 3. Kate speaks Spanish well. And her sister? 4. Susan types slowly. And Betty? 5. Mr Wilson lives far. And Mr Short? 6. Mike ran fast. And Peter? 7. Liverpool played badly today. And Arsenal? X. Make up sentences with the following prompts: e.g. drive/carefully Peter drives much more carefully than he used to. sing/well Mary sings much better than she used to. Prompts: 1. play tennis/well 6. dance/badly 2. work/hard 7. type/fast 3. go to bed/late 8. earn/much 4. speak English/fluently 9. drive/carelessly 5. eat/slowly 10. drink/little XI. Complete the utterances: e.g. This car is too slow. I'd like a faster car. 1. This ruler is too short, (long) 2. I don't like this dress, (fashionable) 3. This house is too small, (large) 4. I don't like this armchair, (comfortable) 5. This coat is too expensive, (cheap) 6. These seats are not good, (good) 7. This book is boring, (interesting)
Fluency Comparisons

Now let's compare our sitting-room with the Bakers'. The Bakers are friends of ours. They live next door to us. Our room is
269

a little larger than theirs and it has more furniture in it. There is no wireless set in the Bakers'room. There isn't a bookcase either. Mine is in my sitting-room, but his is in his study. There's a piano in our sitting-room and there's a piano in the Bakers' sitting-room. Both my wife and Mrs Baker are very fond of music and both play the piano very well. But my wife doesn't play as well as Mrs Baker. Mrs Baker not only plays much better than my wife does, but she's the best pianist in the district. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions:

What is the difference between the writer's and the Bakers' sitting-rooms? Does the writer's wife play the piano as well as Mrs Baker? //. Compare your flat and your neighbour's flat (comfortable, large, small, cosy, light, dark, etc.)
The Flat

Estate Agent: And here's the kitchen, madam. It's bigger than the average kitchen and modern. Jill: And it's very light and sunny. Estate Agent: And here's the bathroom, with a bath, a shower and a large wash-basin. Steve: Is it as big as our bathroom, Jill? Jill: No, it isn't as big as our bathroom, but it's nicer. It's a bit smaller, but cosier. Estate Agent: And this is the living-room. Very spacious, big windows, balcony, and a pleasant view. Jill: Oh, yes, 1 like this room. The windows are bigger than our windows, but the view isn't as pleasant. Estate Agent: And very reasonable at 75 a week, madam. Jill: That's bigger than our rent. It's much more expensive. Steve: But it's more reasonable than other flats in this area. Estate Agent: Oh, yes, sir, and the flat's very quiet. Steve: Well, it can't possibly be noisier than our flat and this is a better area. Well, thank you very much. We'll phone next week and tell you our decision. Good-bye! Estate Agent: Goodbye, sir. Goodbye, madam. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What are Steve and Jill doing at the moment? What is the kitchen like? Is it bigger or smaller than their kitchen? And what
270

about the bathroom? What does Jill like and what doesn't she like about the living-room? What does Jill say about the rent?

//. Act out the conversation. III. Jill and Steve are talking about the flat: The bathroom wasn't very big. No, it wasn't as big as our bathroom. The kitchen was sunny. Yes, it was sunnier than our kitchen. 1. The living-room was big. (Yes) 2. The study wasn't very cozy. (No) 3. The bedroom was a bit dark. (Yes) 4. The garage wasn't very convenient. (No) 5. The area is attractive. (Yes) 6. The bath-room was small. (Yes) 7. The street below wasn't very noisy. (No) 8. The windows were all big. (Yes) 9. The lift was small. (Yes) 10. The area is good. (Yes) IV Compare your old flat and your new flat. A Boring Lesson Dad: What did you learn at school today? Son: The highest mountain in the world is the Himalayas; the largest ocean is the Pacific; the largest island is Greenland; the largest planet is Jupitor, the nearest planet to the Earth is... Dad: Stop! Stop! Is that everything? Son: No. The teacher talked for over an hour. It was the most boring lesson this year. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: Which is the highest mountain in the world? Which is the largest ocean? Which is the largest island? Which is the largest planet? //. Compare: a) The Pacific Ocean, the Arctic Ocean, the Indian Ocean (warm, deep, cold) b) the Don, the Neva, the Volga (long) c) Poland, the USA, Russia (small, large) A Letter Dear Jane! I'm very happy in my new job and my new town. In fact I'm much happier than I was before. I like my new job very much. It's much better than my old one. My boss is more polite than my old boss. My office is larger than the previous one. My workers are more friendly than the ones I worked with before-.
271

My hours are shorter than the hours at my old job. And my salary is higher than my previous salary. I also like my new town. In general it's much nicer and more interesting than where I used to live. The streets are much cleaner, the buildings are nicer, and the weather is warmer and the people are more hospitable You should visit here. I think you'll like it a lot. Please write soon. Sincerely, Lucy /. Listen to the text and answer the questions:

What does Lucy think of her new job, her boss and co-workers? What else does she like about her new job? What does she think of her new town? //. Imagine you are Jane. You've just received a letter from your friend Lucy. You are telling your friend about Lucy's letter. III. Compare your previous job and your present job. The Nicest Person Mr and Mrs Jackson are very proud of their daughter Linda. She's a very nice person. She's friendly, she's polite, she's smart and she's talented. She's also very pretty. Mr and Mrs Jackson's friends and neighbours always compliment them about Linda. They say she's the nicest person they know. According to them, she's the friendliest, the most polite, the smartest and the most talented girl in the neighbourhood. They also think she's the prettiest. Mr and Mrs Jackson agree. They think Linda is a wonderful girl and they are proud to say she's their daughter. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: Why are Mr and Mrs Jackson proud of their daughter? What do the neighbours say about Linda? //. Tell about Linda. It Isn't Easy to Be a Teenager I try to be a good son, but no matter how hard I try my parents never seem to be satisfied. They think I should eat healthier food, I should wear nicer clothes and I should get better marks. And according to them my hair should be shorter, my room 272 should be neater and my friends should be more polite when they come to visit. You know ... it isn't easy to be a teenager. What Do His Parents Think? It isn't easy to be parents. We try to be good parents but no matter how hard we may try our children never seem to be satisfied. They think we should wear more modern clothes, we should listen to lovelier music. And according to them we should be more sympathetic when they talk about their problems, we should be more friendly when their friends come to visit and we should be more understanding when they come home late from a Saturday night date. You know ... it isn't easy to be parents. /. Listen to the texts and answer the questions: Why does the boy think it isn't easy to be a teenager? What do his parents think? Have you got any children' Do you think it's easy to be a father (a mother) ? Are you pleased with your children? Why/Why not? //. Compare the members of your family (young, old, strong, tall).

Students' Chat Maurice: Is Arabic a difficult language, Halim? Halim: Well, not for me. I think Chinese is one of the most difficult languages for Europeans. Maurice: Yes, I think Spanish and Italian are two of the easiest and nicest, but of course I speak French! Halim: At the moment English is the most important language for us. And it's certainly the most useful. Juan: It was my worst subject at school. Halim: It was never my best subject, that's why I studied engineering. /. Listen to the conversation and answer the questions: What does Halim think of Chinese? What does Maurice think of Spanish and Italian? What is the most important and useful language according to Halim? //. Act out the conversation. III. What was your best subject at school? What was your worst subject? Did you like English? 273 IV. Compare: Japanese, English and German. Counting Books and Money Tom, Harry and Alice are counting their books. "I have only a few books", says Harry, "I have only fifteen". "I have more than you", says Tom. "I have thirty books. How many have you, Alice?" "I have sixty books", says Alice. Alice has more books than Tom and more books than Harry. She has more books than Tom and Harry together. Alice has the most and Harry has the fewest. Now Tom, Harry and Alice are counting their money. "How much have you, Alice?" says Tom. "I have only a little", says Alice. "I have three shillings". "I have more than you", says Tom. "I have eighteen shillings. How much have you, Harry?" "I have ten shillings", says Harry. Alice has the least money and Tom has the most money. /. Listen to the text and answer the questions: How many books has Tom? Harry has fewer books than Tom, hasn't he? Has Alice more or fewer books than Tom? Which of the children has the fewest (the most) books? Does Tom have more or less money than Alice? Harry has less money than Tom, hasn't he? Which of the children has the most (the least) money? //. Compare quantities: 1. Lucy has ten pencils. Marian has six pencils. Gemma has four pencils. 2. Mrs Brown has three pounds of sugar. Mrs Black has two pounds of sugar Mrs Short has one pound of sugar. Maggie's talking to Signora Campanelli, an Italian journalist. Maggie: I like English food. It's good.

Signora C: Oh, but Italian food is better. Maggie: Then what do you think about English cars? Signora C: Italian cars are better. Maggie: What about English drivers then? Signora C: Italian drivers are certainly worse. /. What does Signora Campanelli think of Italian food? English cars? Italian drivers? //. Now compare things in Britain and in your country. Are they better or worse in your country? Maggie: What do you think of English food? Student: ...
274

Maggie: And English cars? Student: ... Maggie: Are the roads in England as good? Student: ... Maggie: What about English beer? What do you think? Student: ... Maggie: What do you think of the weather, by the way? Student: ... Maggie: Do you think the same of our footballers? Student: ... Maggie: Well, things can change you know. ///. Compare the .quality of objects. Use both the Comparative and the Superlative degrees. Compare: a) your flat, your friend's flat and your sister's flat (good, bad); b) your car, your father's car and your friend's car (good, bad)
What is the Weather Like in London?

Mrs Hunt: When did you move to London, Clare? Mrs Blake: About a year ago. Mrs Hunt: Was it cold last winter? Mrs Blake: Yes, it was but not as cold as in Geneva. December and February were much colder than January. Mrs. Hunt: Did you have much snow? Mrs Blake: Yes, of course we didn't have as much snow as you had in Geneva. Mrs Hunt: What about the other seasons? Mrs Blake: I think autumn was the most beautiful season. The days were clear and dry and it was sunny and warm all the time. September and October were the nicest months but November was terrible. We had a lot of
rain.

Mrs Hunt: What was last spring like? Mrs Blake: It wasn't very nice. May was nicer than March and April. March was cold and April was wet. Mrs Hunt: What's summer like? Is it always as hot as this? Mrs Blake: It wasn't last year. Mrs Hunt: Is August as hot as July? Mrs Blake: No ..., it's usually cooler and drier. Mrs Hunt. It sounds wonderful. Guy might take a job in London and we might buy a house here. Mrs Blake: What a wonderful idea! Mrs Hunt: Well ..., we might but we might not

275 /. Listen to the conversation. , //. Read the conversation. Ill What did Mrs Blake tell her friend about the weather in London?
IV. Compare a) the weather in January, the weather in September, the weather in June (cold, warm, cool), b) the days in February, the days in April, the days in June (long, short); c) the four seasons of the year (pleasant, nice, warm, cool, cold, good); d) the climate in your country and the country you visited.
The Taylors Miss Brownsville

The Taylor family lived in Brownsville for many years. And for many years Brownsville was a good place to live. The streets were clean. The parks were safe. The bus system was reliable, and the schools were good. But Brownsville changed. Today the streets aren't as clean as they used to be. The parks aren't as safe as they used to be. The bus system isn't as reliable as it used to be and the schools aren't as good as they used to be. Because of the changes in Brownsville the Taylor family moved to Newport last year. In Newport the streets are cleaner. The parks are safer. The bus system is more reliable, and the schools are better. The Taylors are happy in Newport, but they were happier in Brownsville. Although Newport has cleaner streets, safer parks and a more reliable bus system and better schools, Brownsville has friendlier people. They are nicer, more polite and more hospitable than the people in Newport. The Taylors miss Brownsville. Even though they are now living in Newport, Brownsville will always be their real home!

/. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What was Brownsville like some time ago' Why did the Taylor family move to Newport? What is Newport like?

Why do the Taylors miss Brownsville?

//. Read and retell the text. III. Compare the town you live in and the town (village) you lived in before. IV. Compare three cities you know well. Use both the comparative and the superlative degrees, (noisy, clean, old, modern, romantic, large, beautiful, expensive, exciting)
276

V. Choose three different countries that you know something about and compare them (size, population, climate, natural beauty, industries) VI. Situation: Your friend is a diplomat. He has travelled all over the world. You are asking him about the countries he visited.
Trying Harder

1. Michael's boss talked with him today. In general, he doesn't think Michael is doing very well in the job, and he should do better. According to Michael's boss, he types too slowly. He should type faster. In addition he files too carelessly, he should file more carefully. Furthermore, he speaks over the telephone too quickly. He should speak slower. 2. Stella's director talked with her today. In general, he doesn't think Stella is doing very well in his play, and she has to do better. According to Stella's director, she speaks too quietly, she should speak louder. In addition, she walks too slowly, she should walk faster. Furthermore, she dances too awkwardly, she should dance more gracefully. Stella wants to do well in the play, and she knows now that she has to try a little harder. 3. Billy's teacher talked with him today. In general, she doesn't think Billy is doing very well in school, and he has to do better. According to Billy's teacher, he arrives too late. He should arrive earlier. In addition he dresses too floppily. He should dress neater. Furthermore, he speaks too impolitely. He should speak more politely. Bill wants to do well at school, and he knows now that he has to try a little harder.

/. Listen to the text and answer the questions: What does Michael's boss think? What does Stella's director think? Billy's teacher is not very pleased with him, is she? Why? //. Compare the way three people work (hard), run (fast), draw (beautifully), speak (fluently), dance (gracefully), drive a car (carelessly), play golf (well, badly). ///. Situation: You are not pleased with your son (daughter). What do you think he (she) should do? 277 Self check /. Use the proper degrees of comparison: Joe Sanders has (beautiful) garden in our town. Nearly everybody enters for "(Nice) Garden Competition" each year but Joe wins every time. Bill Frith's garden is (large) than Joe's. Bill works (hard) than Joe and grows (many) flowers and vegetables but Joe's garden is (interesting). He has made neat paths and has built a wooden bridge over a pool. I like gardens too but I do not like hard work. Every year I enter for the garden competition too and I always win a little prize for (bad) garden in the town! //. Translate into English: 1. , . 2. , . 3. . 4. . 5. . 6. . 7. , . 8. . 9. : ? 10. . . , . 12. , . 13. , . 14. . 15. , . 16. . 17. , . 18. . 19. 22 . 20. , . 21. , . 22. , . U N I 26 TOPIC: SHOPPING GRAMMAR: DEGREES OF COMPARISON
PA RT A TEXT. THE BAXTERS GO SHOPPING

The other day my wife took me on a usual shopping round. In fact I hate going to the butcher's, grocer's and other shops of this sort but of course I have to help my wife about the house. First we bought some pork and beef at the butcher's. Then we dropped in at the grocery and greengrocery Jill wanted to buy 278 sugar, salt, tomatoes and cucumbers. We also called at the baker's where we bought a loaf of brown bread, some buns and biscuits. On our way home we were passing Selfridge's. "Let's drop in here for a while. You need a suit for everyday wear", my wife said. 1 agreed. Selfridge's is still one of the biggest and most popular stores in London. They sell everything here. All the things for

sale are on the counters. The customers walk round and choose what they want. The store has several departments: women's clothes, men's clothes, shoes, toys, sports goods, umbrellas, leather goods, china and glass, food and so on. When we entered the shop we went straight to the men's department. A salesgirl showed us a number of suits but we didn't like any of them. One of them was a bit loose on me, another was too tight. As to the third our opinions were quite different. I liked the suit. My wife found it too expensive. She wanted a suit as good as that one but less expensive. The salesgirl showed us a cheaper suit. It was of good quality but I didn't like the style. We were about to leave the counter when they delivered a new selection of goods. They were not only suits but different kinds of clothes: coats, raincoats, shirts, jackets and trousers. I tried on two or three suits. The last was all right. It was just my size and fitted me perfectly. We both liked the suit and the price was not high. "We'll take it, wrap it up, please!" I said to the salesgirl. After we left the men's department my wife spent the rest of the morning trying on hats. She wanted a pink straw hat to match one of her summer frocks. There was such a good selection of hats in the shop that in the end Jill bought two.

Comprehension
/. Listen to the text "The Baxters Go Shopping" and answer the questions: Does Mr Baxter help his wife about the house? What food shops did the Baxters go to? Why did they go to Selfridge's? //. Listen to the text again and answer more detailed questions on the text. What did the Baxters buy at the butcher's? What departments does Selfridge's have? Did the Baxters choose the right suit at once? What did Jill buy for herself? ///. Read the text and analyse the language peculiarities of the text. Do some exercises in the next section to remember them. 279

Special Difficulties /. Paraphrase the following sentences: a) use the word combinations "to drop in at smb's place" and "to drop in on smb": 1. In the morning 1 called at the butcher's and bought some pork. 2. I called on my schoolmate yesterday. 3. Will you call at the greengrocery on your way back? 4. I often call on my cousin. 5. Does Helen sometimes call at your place? 6. Did you call at the library yesterday? 7. The other day I called on my parents. 8. Let's call at the baker's on our way home. 9. He called at our department store some days ago. b) use "a bit" instead of "a little": 1. I'm a little tired. 2. He speaks English a little. 3. She was a little late. 4. I am a little hungry. 5. Wait a little! 6. Each time I think my holiday is a little short. 7. The course of studies is a little long. 8. I am a little angry with you. c) use the verb "need" instead of "want": 1. Do you want any help? 2. I want two days more to finish the report. 3. I want an assistant to do the work. 4. He wants this journal for his studies. 5. I want two pounds of sausage. Do you want bacon, too? 6. I want a couple of weeks more to finish this work. d) use the verb "let": e.g. May I use your tape-recorder? Let me use your tape-recorder. 1. May I stay here a bit longer? 2. May I have a look at the documents? 3. May I use your dictionary? 4. May I ask you a question or two? 5. May I take your text-book? 6. May I help you? 7. May I try the hat on another time? //. Discuss plans for the weekend with your friend: Suggest: going to the country, playing tennis, having dinner at a restaurant, going shopping, seeing a film, meeting at 10, visiting Mike, having a swim, e.g. Let's go to the country. ///. Make up short dialogues. Use the words prompted: 1. Did you buy a present for Jane yesterday? Yes, I chose an interesting book for her. (Mary a bottle of perfume; your sister a bag; your friend a silk tie) 2. I think this suit is a bit loose on you. I quite agree with you. (shirt, raincoat, jacket) 3. The coat is rather tight. Give me a size larger. Here you are. (suit, sweater, trousers)
280

4. How do you like this suit? You look smart in it, and it fits you well, (raincoat, frock, jacket) 5. What do you think of Maugham's stories? I find them very interesting. (furniture modern; suit expensive; girl sweet; boy clever; sister beautiful; film interesting; weather windy) 6. Do you often go shopping? In fact, I'm fond of it.

(play tennis, play chess, go fishing, go skating) 7. Will you show me another coat, please. I don't like this colour. How do you like this one? I think it'll be all right. (jacket, shirt, pair of shoes) 8. I called on Helen the other day. And when did you see her last? I dropped in at her place on Friday. (Mike yesterday morning; the KJimovs this morning; Robert on Tuesday afternoon) 9. This suit is too expensive. Will you show me something cheaper? Certainly. (hat; bag, shoes, trousers) 10. John will come by the 4 o'clock train. Are you sure of that? No doubt. (Helen take part in the discussion; Peter go away on business tomorrow; Jack help them)

IV. Complete the following statements. Use the word "another": e.g. I don't like this suit, (show) Show me another, please. 1. This pen is broken, (give) 2. I need two notebooks, (bring) 3. This suit is tight on you. (take) 4. I think she hasn't received my letter, (send) 5. I can't translate this article, (give) 6. This set of furniture is too expensive, (show) 7. I don't like this book, (give) V. Fill in the gaps with "other", "another" or (the) others (self check): 1. The store is on the ... side of the street. 2. I must put on ... suit before going to the party. 3. I've got a pen, some pencils, a book and some ... things. 4. Take this chair away and bring me ... . 281
5 I see only five students, Where are .. ? 6. Some children like milk, ... don't. 7. I don't like this apple. Give me ... . 8. There are only two books on the table Where are ...?

Text Exercises
/ Ask questions about' a) what the Baxters bought before they went to Selfridge's; b) how the Baxters were buying a suit.

// Agree or disagree with the following statements:

1. Mr Baxter is very fond of shopping. 2 The Baxters started their shopping with the baker's. 3 Selfridge's is one of the biggest and most popular stores in London. 4. The men's department had a good selection of goods and it was not difficult to choose the right suit. 6. Finally the Baxters bought the right suit 7 Jill didn't buy anything for herself. ///. Speak on the Baxters' shopping round. PA RT

Conversation Practice At a Department Store

Betty: Let's do all our shopping here at the Kaufman department store. Then we can have lunch and go to the movies in the afternoon. Mrs Black: That's a good idea I want to buy some gloves and a purse at this counter There's the clerk Are you busy? Can you wait on us? Shop Assistant: Certainly. What can I show you? Mrs Black: 1 want a pair of brown gloves, size 6. What's the price of this pair? Shop Assistant: They are 3.50. They wear very well. Mrs Black: I'll take one pair. Can you show me a brown purse to match the gloves? Shop Assistant: Here's a nice one. It's the latest style Mrs. Black: How much does it cost? Shop Assistant: It's ten dollars. Betty: Do you want a larger purse? I like that one, mother Why don't you buy it? Mrs Black: All right, Betty Please, wrap the purse and gloves together 282 I'll write a check for them. Let's take this elevator to the fourth floor. I want to look at a suit Good morning. May I help you' Yes, I'm looking for a grey suit, size 12 We have several your size. Do you want to try on one of these? The quality is excellent. Yes. Oh, I like this one. How much is it?

It's 75 dollars. That's too expensive. Do you have a cheaper suit? Shop Assistant: Yes, this grey flannel is cheaper than the gaberdine. It's on sale today for 47.50 Do you want to try it on? Betty: It fits perfectly. I'll take it.

/. Listen to the conversation "At a Department Store" and answer the questions:
1. What does Mrs Black want to buy at the Department Store? 2. Is the shop assistant very helpful? 3. What is Betty looking for? 4. Do they have a good choice of suits at the department store? 5. What size does Betty wear' 6. How much did the suit Betty bought cost?

//. Listen to the conversation again and repeat general questions. Imitate the voice on the tape. III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following:
. ? , 12. . , ? . ? ? ? ? ? . ? () 47 . .

IV. Make up dialogues using the words prompted:

1. What's the price of this pair? They are 3.50. They wear very well. (trousers 20; frock 25; jacket--30; shirt 10, shoes 25) 283

2. Can you show me a brown purse to match the gloves? Here's a nice one. (a silk tie the shirt; a blouse the skirt; a scarf the coat; a shirt the suit) 3. I like that purse. Why don't you buy it? All right. (bag, skirt, shirt, shoes, dress, jacket) 4. May I help you? I'm looking for a grey suit. (a brown bag, a leather jacket, a winter coat, a suit for everyday wear, jeans) V. In one paragraph of about 70 words give a brief account of the conversation. VI. Act out the conversation. It's Too Small for Me Assistant: Do you like this dress, madam? Lady: I like the colour very much. It's a lovely dress, but it's too small for me. Assistant: What about this one? It's a lovely dress. It's very smart. Short skirts are in fashion now. Would you like to buy it? Lady: All right. I'm afraid this green dress is too small for me as well. It's smaller than the blue one. I don't like the colour either. It doesn't suit me at all. I think the blue dress is prettier. Could you show me another blue dress? I want a dress like that one, but it must be my size. Assistant: I'm afraid I haven't got a larger dress. This is the largest dress in the shop. /. Listen to the conversation "It's Too Small for Me" and answer the questions: 1. What does the lady want to buy? 2. What colour does she want? 3. What's wrong with the dresses? //. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases with the adjectives in the comparative and superlative degrees. III. Read the conversation. IV. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following:
284

. . ? . ? . . , . V. In one paragraph of 50 words give a brief account of the conversation. VI. Act out the conversation. VII. Situation I: You are at a men's ready-made clothes department. You want a suit for everyday wear, some shirts and a tie to match the suit. The shop-assistant is ready to help you. Situation 2. You are at a shoe department. You want a pair of good summer walking shoes. The shop-assistant is very helpful. (The students are supposed to write the conversation at home and then to act it out with a partner in class). You are not a Millionaire Mr Frith: I like this record-player very much. How much does it cost, please? Assistant: It's the most expensive model in the shop. It costs sixty-four pounds. Mrs Frith: That's too expensive for us. We can't afford all that money.

Assistant: This model's less expensive than that. It's only twenty-eight pounds. But, of course, it's not as good as the expensive one. Mr Frith: I don't like this model. The other model's more expensive, but it's worth the money. Can we buy it on instalments? Assistant: Of course. You can pay a deposit of ten pounds, and then one pound a week for sixty weeks. Mr Frith: Do you like it, dear? Mrs Frith: I certainly do, but I don't like the price. You always want the best, but we can't afford it. Sometimes you think you are a millionaire! Mr Frith: Millionaires don't buy things on installments. /. Listen to the conversation "You are not a Millionaire" and answer the questions: How much does the record-player Mr Frith likes cost? Can he afford buying it? 285 //. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases with the adjectives in the comparative and superlative degrees. III. Read the conversation. IV. In one paragraph of 50 words give a brief account of the conversation. V. Act out the conversation. VI. Situation: You are at a radio-shop. You need a radio-set. You want it to be both cheap and reliable. At a Car Shop The salesman is now trying to sell a customer a second-hand Lotus Elan but the customer thinks to prefer a Jaguar. Man: I think I rather like the look of that Jaguar. Salesman: But Lotus is a much better car. Man: Well, yes, but ... Salesman: It's smaller and easier to park. Man: Perhaps, but I need room. And Jaguar is a good, fast car. Salesman: But the Lotus has better acceleration. In fact, it's much faster altogether. Man: Yes, I know, but I do like the red and black interior of the Jaguar. Salesman: But the Lotus has more comfortable seats. Man: Mmm. But I want a quiet car. Salesman: Well, the Lotus is much quieter than the Jaguar. It makes tar less noise. Man: Yes, but you see ... Salesman: It's a smaller, better, more comfortable car. Man: Yes, yes. I know it's a fantastic car because I sold it to you altogether ... last week, remember? /. Listen to the conversation "At a Car Shop" and answer the questions: What car does the man want to buy? What car does the salesman want to sell? What does the salesman say about the Lotus' //. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases with the adjectives in the comparative and superlative degrees. III. Read the conversation. IV. In one paragraph of 50 words give a brief account of the conversation. 286 V. Act out the conversation. VI. Situation: You are at a car shop. You want to buy a comfortable fast car with plenty of room. A Few Errands Felix: I'm just going down to the shops to buy some cigarettes, Gertie. Do you want anything while I'm there? Gertie: Yes, what a good idea! There are a lot ot things 1 need, as a matter of fact. Let me see ... . We haven't got many eggs left, so bring a dozen large ones. And there isn't much cooking-fat in the jar, so bring a pound of lard. And .. Felix: Hold on! If you want me to get a lot of things, write them down on a piece of paper, or I'll forget something. Gertie: All right. But wait a minute, while I look in the other cupboard to see what we need. Felix: Hurry up, then! I want to call in for a chat with Gerry on the way back. Gertie: We've got plenty of cocoa, but there isn't much tea or coffee left. Bring a large tin of instant and a quarter pound of tea. Oh! And I want some ham. Felix: How much? Gertie: Half a pound will do. We're short of vegetables, too; bring some beans, and a tin of carrots ... Felix: I only wanted to go out for a stroll and a chat. I'll need a lorry to bring all that home. Gertie: Here's the list. Oh, and you can pick up my coat at the dry-cleaner's while you are passing? And do me a favour while you are at Gerry's: ask Pam if she's free on Thursday morning. We're having a meeting at ten o'clock about the tennis-club dance in August. Bye, dear. /. Listen to the conversation "A Few Errands" and answer the questions. Why is Felix going to the shops' What does Gertie want him to buy? What does Felix want to do on the way back? What favour does Gertie ask Felix? //. Listen to the conversation again and reproduce the phrases in which the indefinite pronouns are used. III. Read the conversation.

IV. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following:

287
! , . . . . ! . , ' . , . . .

V. In one paragraph of 100 words give a brief account of the conversation. VI. Act out the conversation. VII. Read the conversation below. Fill in the gaps with the proper indefinite pronouns.
Peggy: I'm making a shopping list, Tom. Tom: What do we need? Peggy: We need ... things this week. I must go the grocer's We haven't got... tea or coffee and we haven't got... sugar or jam. Tom: What about vegetables? Peggy: We haven't got ... tomatoes, but we've got ... potatoes. I must go to the butcher's, too. We need ... meat. We haven't got ... meat at all. Tom: Have we got ... beer or wine? Peggy: No, we haven't. And I'm not going to get ...! Tom: I hope you've got ... money. Peggy: I haven't got ... . Tom: Well, I haven't got ... either! VIII. Situation: You are having a party on Sunday and you need a lot of things. At the moment your wife (husband) and you are making a shopping list. At a Grocery Store Shop-assistant: Good morning, Mrs Smith. How are you this morning? Mrs Smith: I'm fine, thank you. And how are you? Shop-assistant: I'm having a little trouble. I don't have any eggs or butter. Mrs Smith: Oh. that's a shame. I need two pounds of butter and a dozen eggs. Shop-assistant: I can deliver them this afternoon. Mrs Smith: That'll be fine. I'm having a party tonight for 15 persons. I have a list here of about 20 things. 288 Shop-assistant: First, what do you want m the line of meat? Mrs Smith: Can you give me a ten-pound ham? Shop-assistant: Yes, here's a nice one It's 95 cents a pound. Mrs Smith: That seems expensive. But all right. I'll take it. Shop-assistant: Now what else? Mrs Smith: Well, I want some canned goods, 3 cans of peas and a can of peaches. Shop-assistant: Here they are. Now, do you need any milk' Mrs Smith: Yes, three quarts, please, and a pint of cream ... Well, that's all for today. How much do I owe you? Shop-assistant: That's 17.70. Here's your change from the 20 dollar bill 2.30. Mrs Smith: Thank you. Shop-assistant: Good-bye, Mrs Smith. Thanks a lot.

/. Listen to the conversation "At a Grocery Store" and answer the questions:
Why does Mrs Smith need a lot of things at the grocery today? What products does she want? What trouble does the shopassistant have? Does Mrs Smith want anything in the line of wine?

//. Read the conversation. III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following:

! () , ? ? ? . . 15 . ? IV. Act out the conversation. V. Situation: Tomorrow is your mother's birthday. You've come to the grocer's. You want to buy a lot of food. The grocer is eager to help you. Listening Bob's Bargain Department Store
Bob's Bargain Department Store is the cheapest store in town. However, even though it's the cheapest, it isn't the most popular. People don't shop there very often because the products are bad. In fact, some people say the products are the worst in town. The furniture isn't very comfortable. The clothes aren't very modern. The appliances aren't very dependable and the record-players and tape-recorders aren't very good. Besides that, the ! , . . . . ! . , ' . , . . .

V. In one paragraph of 100 words give a brief account of the conversation. VI. Act out the conversation. VII. Read the conversation below. Fill in the gaps with the proper indefinite pronouns.
Peggy: I'm making a shopping list, Tom. Tom: What do we need?

Peggy: We need ... things this week. I must go the grocer's We haven't got... tea or coffee and we haven't got... sugar or jam. Tom: What about vegetables? Peggy: We haven't got ... tomatoes, but we've got ... potatoes. I must go to the butcher's, too. We need ... meat. We haven't got ... meat at all. Tom: Have we got ... beer or wine? Peggy: No, we haven't. And I'm not going to get ...! Tom: I hope you've got ... money. Peggy: I haven't got ... . Tom: Well, I haven't got ... either! VIII. Situation: You are having a party on Sunday and you need a lot of things. At the moment your wife (husband) and you are making a shopping list. At a Grocery Store Shop-assistant: Good morning, Mrs Smith. How are you this morning? Mrs Smith: I'm fine, thank you. And how are you? Shop-assistant: I'm having a little trouble. I don't have any eggs or butter. Mrs Smith: Oh. that's a shame. I need two pounds of butter and a dozen eggs. Shop-assistant: I can deliver them this afternoon. Mrs Smith: That'll be fine. I'm having a party tonight for 15 persons. I have a list here of about 20 things. 288 Shop-assistant: First, what do you want m the line of meat? Mrs Smith: Can you give me a ten-pound ham? Shop-assistant: Yes, here's a nice one It's 95 cents a pound. Mrs Smith: That seems expensive. But all right. I'll take it. Shop-assistant: Now what else? Mrs Smith: Well, I want some canned goods, 3 cans of peas and a can of peaches. Shop-assistant: Here they are. Now, do you need any milk' Mrs Smith: Yes, three quarts, please, and a pint of cream ... Well, that's all for today. How much do I owe you? Shop-assistant: That's 17.70. Here's your change from the 20 dollar bill 2.30. Mrs Smith: Thank you. Shop-assistant: Good-bye, Mrs Smith. Thanks a lot.

/. Listen to the conversation "At a Grocery Store" and answer the questions:
Why does Mrs Smith need a lot of things at the grocery today? What products does she want? What trouble does the shopassistant have? Does Mrs Smith want anything in the line of wine?

//. Read the conversation. III. Find in the text appropriate English phrases for the following:

! () , ? ? ? . . 15 . ? IV. Act out the conversation. V. Situation: Tomorrow is your mother's birthday. You've come to the grocer's. You want to buy a lot of food. The grocer is eager to help you. Listening Bob's Bargain Department Store
Bob's Bargain Department Store is the cheapest store in town. However, even though it's the cheapest, it isn't the most popular. People don't shop there very often because the products are bad. In fact, some people say the products are the worst in town. The furniture isn't very comfortable. The clothes aren't very modern. The appliances aren't very dependable and the record-players and tape-recorders aren't very good. Besides that, the

289 I paid for the blouse. It was 1.15 already. I didn't go back to work. I went straight home and got into bed. It was the only safe place for me that day. /. Listen to the text "A Bad Day" and answer the questions". When did the girl wake up last Monday? What happened to her in the morning? at noon? //. Retell the text. III. Did you ever have a bad day? What was it like?
Nothing to Eat for Dinner

Jane had to work overtime at the office today. She got home late and she was hungry. When she opened the refrigerator she was very upset. There was nothing to eat for dinner. Jane sat down and wrote a shopping list. She needed a head of lettuce, bananas, a quart of milk, a dozen eggs, two pounds of tomatoes, a pound of butter and a loaf of bread. Jane rushed out of the house and drove to the supermarket. When she got there she was disappointed. There weren't any bananas. There wasn't any milk. There weren't any eggs. There weren't any tomatoes. There wasn't any butter and there wasn't any bread. Jane was tired and upset. In fact, she was so tired and upset that she lost her appetite, drove home, didn't have dinner and went to bed. /. Listen to the text "Nothing to Eat for Dinner" and answer the questions: Why did Jane get home late? What did she need? Why was she disappointed?

//. Retell the text. III. Have you ever been in a situation like this one? When was it?
Two Bags of Groceries

Henry is at the supermarket and he's really upset. He just bought some groceries, and he can't believe he just spent forty dollars! He bought only a few oranges, a few apples, a little milk, a little ice-cream and a few eggs. He also bought just a little coffee, a few onions, a few bananas, a little rice, a little cheese and a few lemons. He didn't buy very much fish. 292 He didn't buy very many grapes. And he didn't buy very much meat. Henry just spent forty dollars, and he's walking out of the supermarket with only two bags of groceries. No wonder, he's upset!

/. Listen to the text "Two Bags of Groceries" and answer the questions: Why is Henry upset? What did he buy? //. Retell the text. III. When did you last go shopping? Did you buy many things? How much money did you spend? Self check /. Fill in the gaps with prepositions where necessary: Mr Jackson: Excuse me, how do I get... the men's department? Woman: Over there, ... the left, sir. Mr Jackson: Thank you. Shop Assistant: What can I do ... you? Mr Jackson: I need ... a suit ... everyday wear. Can I have a look ... that grey suit? What size is it? Shop Assistant: 16. Mr Jackson: Can I try it ... ? Shop Assistant: Certainly. Mr Jackson: I'm afraid this suit is too loose ... me. Shop Assistant: I don't think so. It's just ... your size. Mr Jackson: All right. I'll take it. //. Choose the right word: 1. His clothes ... poor, a) was b) were 2. He took off his clothes and put ... in the wardrobe, a) it b) them 3. I dropped in ... Peter on my way to the University, a) at b) on 4. The suit is a little tight ... you. a) for b) on 5. Your translation is ... than John's, a) more better b) much better 6. Mike is ... than his brother, a) more stronger b) stronger 7. Jane has ... friends than you. a) less b) fewer 8. I saw a car on ... side of the street, a) another b) the other 9. I called ... the library yesterday, a) at b) on c) in ///. Translate into English: ? . ? 293 46. ? , . , , ? . ? . . , , . , . , . . 48. , . -, . , . ? 3000 . . Fluency /. Answer the questions: a) Do you often go shopping? Is there a greengrocery not far from your house? What is it like? When did you last go to the greengrocer's? What did you buy there? b) Where do you usually buy your food? What is the shop like? Do you like to do your shopping there? Why? When did you last go to the grocery? What did you buy? How long did it take you to do your shopping there? c) Which is the biggest department store in Minsk? Where is it? What is it like? Do you sometimes do your shopping there? When did you last go to the department store? Will you describe your shopping there?

d) What shop do you usually go to if you want to buy a present? What present did you buy for your wife (sister, etc.) on her last birthday? Where did you buy it? Did it take you long to choose the present? Are you sure your wife liked the present? //. Speak on: a) your last shopping for food; b) your last visit to a department store.

///. Act out the following situations: 1. You buy a sweater and leave it in a store by mistake. When you discover it is missing you return to the store and ask the clerk if he has seen it. 2. You have bought a pullover. You get home, try it on and it doesn't fit. You haven't washed it and you tried it on in the shop Maybe they gave you the wrong pullover by mistake. 294
UNIT 27 GRAMMAR: MODAL VERBS. BE ABLE TO, HAVE TO, BE TO, CAN (COULD), MUST (REVIEW)

Illustrative Situations /. Study these example situations:

A. I. Jack will be able to finish the work by Saturday. Questions: Will Jack be able to finish the work by Saturday' Yes, he will. When will Jack be able to finish the work? What will Jack be able to do by Saturday? Who will be able to finish the work by Saturday? Will Jack be able to finish the work by Saturday or not? Jack will be able to finish the work by Saturday, won't he? Yes. Jack won't be able to finish the work by Wednesday, will he? No. 2. Mary was able to type all the letters yesterday. Questions: Was Mary able to type all the letters yesterday? Yes, she was. What was Mary able to do yesterday? Who was able to type all the letters yesterday? Was Mary able to type all the letters yesterday or not? Mary was able to type all the letters yesterday, wasn't she? 3. Mrs. Smith is too old. She is not able to look after the house. = She can't look after the house. I think he is able to do this work himself. = I think he can do this work himself. Are you able to walk? No, I'm not. There's something wrong with my leg. B. I. Mr. Dodds has to work hard. He has a large family to support. Questions: Does Mr. Dodds have to work hard? Yes, he does. What does Mr. Dodds have to do? Why does Mr. Dodds have to work hard? Who has to work hard? Does Mr. Dodds have to work hard or not? Mr. Dodds has to work hard, doesn't he? Yes, he does. 2. Mrs. Green had to call the doctor. Her child was seriously ill. Questions: Did Mrs. Green have to call the doctor? Yes, she did. What did Mrs. Green have to do? Who did Mrs. Green have to call? Why did Mrs. Green have to call the doctor? Who had to call the doctor? Did Mrs. Green have to call the doctor or not? Mrs. Green had to call the doctor, didn't she? Yes, she did. 3. Jill will have to go to the dentist tomorrow. Questions: Will Jill have to go to the dentist tomorrow? What will Jill have to do tomorrow? Where will Jill have to go tomorrow? 295 Who will have to go to the dentist tomorrow? Will Jill have to go to the dentist or to the surgeon tomorrow? Jill will have to go to the dentist tomorrow, won't she? Yes, she will. Jill won't have to go to the surgeon tomorrow, will she? No, she won't. C. Hurry up! The train is to leave in ten minutes. Peter and I are going to the theatre today. We are to meet at the entrance to the theatre at 7 o'clock. //. Listen to the dialogues, read and learn them: 1. Susan doesn't have an easy life. What do you mean? She has to get up early every day. What hard luck! 2. What about going to the pictures? I'm sorry I can't. I have to finish writing my essay. Oh, but you needn't. Jack can do it for you. Good idea. 3. Are you going away on business in two days? Yes, I think I'll have to. Can't you put it off till next week? No, I'm afraid that's out of the question. 4. I want Jim to take me to a dance this evening. But must he? Yes, he must. It's his duty. I don't quite agree with you. 5. I feel very tired these days.

 You mustn't read too much. But I don't. And you mustn't stay at home too much, either. 6. I'm trying to learn English. Can you tell me how? Oh, certainly. You must go to England. Thanks for a good piece of advice. 7. I shan't be able to come to see you tomorrow. Why? I'll have to do my homework. 8. I'm going to speak to the boss about my salary today. I'm afraid you won't be able to do it. Why not? Because he is away on business. 9. Will you be able to post these letters today? I don't think so. I have too much typing to do. 10. Can you dance? Yes, I can. Could you dance ten years ago? No, I couldn't. 296 11. As a child I could jump well. I couldn't but I could climb trees. So could I, but I can't now. Neither can I. 12. Where are Jack and Jill? Mother said she needed them at home. What for? Jack is to look after the children and Jill is to cook the dinner.

///. Listen to the text: Frank Martin is very ill. The doctor is talking to him. "You'll have to stay in bed for a week and you'll have to take this medicine every six hours". Frank has a ticket for a big football match tomorrow. He won't be able to use it. Questions: What's wrong with Frank? What will he have to do? How long will he have to stay in bed? What has Frank got? Will he be able to use it? Practice /. Situation: You are a secretary. You work for a big firm. You are always very busy at work. Say what you have to do every day. Prompts: type and photo-copy letters; post papers and parcels; make telephone calls; receive visitors; make coffee for the boss; book plane and train tickets. //. Say what you have to do at your office. III. Respond to the following utterances: e.g. I live not far from the office, (go by bus) So you don't have to go by bus, do you? No, I don't. 1. My classes begin at 10. (get up) 2. I'm on holiday now. (work hard) 3. My son is good at maths, (help) 4. My working day lasts 6 hours, (stay at work late) 5. My wife is a good cook, (cook) 6.1 have a lot of relatives in Moscow, (stay at a hotel) IV. Complete the following utterances: e.g. I missed the last train, (spend the night at the station.) I missed the last train so I had to spend the night at the station. 1. I missed the last bus. (walk home) 2. There were no seats on the train, (stand) 3. There were no porters at the station, (carry) 4. I lost my dictionary, (buy) 5. I couldn't find a hotel, (stay at my relatives') 6. My radio-set wasn't working, (repair) 7. Our lift was out of order, (walk up to my flat) 8. We couldn't eat the hostel meals, (cook) 9. We couldn't hear what the speaker was saying, (change our seats) 297 V. Make up dialogues: e.g. A: (an old man): When I was at school we called the masters "Sir". It was compulsory. B: (a young man who was at the same school): Oh, we didn't have to call the masters "Sir". When I was at school we ... It was compulsory. 1. wore suits; 2. talked French at meals; 3. got up at six;

4. washed in cold water; 5. ran round the playground before breakfast; 6. were in bed by ten; 7. learnt a Shakespeare play by heart; 8. cleaned our own rooms; 9. made our own beds; 10. looked after our own clothes; 11. served ourselves at meals; 12. helped with the washing up; 13. worked on Saturday; 4. wrote home every week; 15. asked permission to go into the town; 16. played football; 17. kept our hair short. e.g. Are you doing anything special tomorrow? I'll have to book a ticket to Moscow. Prompts: meet a friend at the airport; type an article; write some letters; post some parcels; wash the linen; fix my TVset VI. Respond to the following utterances: e.g. I have a toothache, (go to the dentist) I'll have to go to the dentist. 1. I'm busy now. (write the report by Monday) 2. I've lost my dictionary, (buy a new one) 3. It is raining, (you, take an umbrella) 4. She is out. (you, wait) 5. My mother is ill. (I, call the doctor) 6. The bus is late, (we, take a taxi) 7. Peter didn't pass his exam yesterday, (take it again in a week) 8. Mike can't translate the text himself. (I, help him) e.g. The boss is in. (you, wait) You won't have to wait. 1. We shall do the work ourselves, (you, help us) 2. Betty is quite well today, (she, miss the lecture) 3. There is still a lot of time left, (you, hurry) 4. Victor knows about the meeting, (you, ring him up) 5. The station is not far from the hotel, (we, take a taxi) 6. Paul will come here in some minutes, (you, wait). VII. Say what you (your wife, son, etc.) had to do and what 298 you didn't have to do some time ago (yesterday, last week, etc.), what you (your friend, etc.) will have to do and what you won't have to do in the future, (on Sunday, tomorrow, etc.) VIII. Ask your friend if he has to work hard at his office; if he has to stay at work late; if he often has to go away on business; if he will have to travel on business next month; if he will have to go to work on Saturday; if he had to miss his English class on Tuesday; if he had to stay in town this summer, e.g. Do you have to work hard at your office? Yes, I am usually very busy at work. IX. Ask for additional information: e.g. Tom had to go to the police station, (why) Why did he have to go to the police station? 1. Ann has to leave tomorrow, (what time) 2. We had to answer a lot of questions at the exam, (how many) 3. George had to pay a parking fine, (how much) 4. I have to get up early now. (why) 5. Somebody will have to help him. (who) 6.1 shall have to go to the station today, (why) 7. I had to return home, (why) 8. Mike has to spend his weekends at home, (why) 9. I shall have to take my exam soon, (when) 10. I had to wait for Peter, (how long). X. Paraphrase the sentences using "be able to": e.g. I translated the text yesterday. I was able to translate the text yesterday. 1. I finished the work on Sunday. 2. I bought the ticket yesterday. 3. George passed his exam last week. 4. I typed the papers myself. 5. Paul repaired the iron himself. 6. Jane wrote the composition herself. 7. Victor fixed the TVset. e.g. Jane can help me tomorrow. Jane will be able to help me tomorrow. 1. I can go shopping on Sunday. 2. She can come tomorrow. 3. I can do this work in two days. 4. She can type the letters on Saturday. 5. I can translate the text tonight. 6. He can repair your bike tomorrow. 7. She can finish the work today, e.g. I can't phone Peter today. I shan't be able to phone Peter today. 1. I can't go to the country for the weekend. 2. Mary can't take part in the discussion. 3. I cannot go to the cinema on Monday. 4. She can't post the letters today. 5. We can't finish the work tomorrow. 6. She cannot come today. 7. I cannot help you today, e.g. Can you visit Mary tomorrow? Will you be able to visit Mary tomorrow? 1. Can you fix my taperecorder today? 2. Can Peter send the 299 papers tomorrow? 3. Can Lucy come tonight? 4. Can you begin the work on Monday? 5. Can you book the tickets today? e.g. When can you visit Mike? When will you be able to visit Mike? 1. When can you finish the work? 2. When can she type the letters? 3. When can you translate the article? 4. When can you repair my record-player? 5. When can you help me? 6. When can he come? XI. Respond to the following utterances: e.g. George couldn't pass his exam in May. I believe he was able to pass it in June.

1. Mike couldn't buy the "Quadroon" on Friday. 2. They couldn't visit Helen last week. 3. The typist couldn't type the papers on Saturday. 4. He couldn't finish the experiment on Friday. 5. Miss Green couldn't photo-copy the documents on Tuesday. 6. Alec couldn't speak to Mary on Saturday. 7. Jane couldn't clean the windows yesterday. e.g. Mike can't go fishing this morning. I think he'll be able to go fishing tomorrow morning. 1. They can't leave tonight. 2. She can't visit him now. 3. They can't spend their holidays in the South this summer. 4. Paul can't repair the TV set today. 5. He can't talk to the manager today. 6. Jane can't come to the class today. 7. She can't post the parcel today. 8. We can't finish the work tomorrow. XII. Make 2 sentences for each situation, one with "He'll/ she'll/they'll have to..." and one with "He/she/they won't be able to..." e.g. Julia usually catches the 8.15 bus. The next one is at 8.40. It is 8.20 now, and she is running out of the house. 1. She won't be able to catch the 8.15 bus. 2. She'll have to catch the 8.40. Situations: a) Bob has broken his leg. He wanted to play football this evening, b) Tom likes to put cream in his coffee, but they've got only tinned milk, c) Frank wanted to leave work early today. He wanted to see a football match. The boss asked all the men to do overtime, d) Deborah and Arthur wanted to drive to France, but the car broke down yesterday. Deborah has just booked 2 plane tickets instead. XIII. Say what you (the members of your family) were able to do and what you were not able to do some time ago; what you will be able to do and what you won't be able to do in the future. (tomorrow, etc.) XIV. Ask your friend if he will be able to go to the country with you; whether he was able to do his homework yesterday; if he was
300

able to visit his parents last week; if he will be able to come to the English class on Thursday; when he will be able to translate the text; when he will be able to repair your typewriter.

XV. Paraphrase the following sentences. Use "be-\-to infinitive": e.g. We agreed to meet at the bus-stop at 5. We are to meet at the bus-stop at 5. 1. We agreed to dine out on Sunday. 2. We agreed to meet in the library at 10. 3. We agreed to begin the experiment tomorrow. 4. We agreed to start tomorrow morning. 5. They agreed to leave on Tuesday. 6. We agreed to have lunch at the cafeteria. XVI. Make up dialogues: e.g. A: What were your instructions about phoning Bill? B: I was to phone him at 6.00. What were your instructions about... 1. reporting? 2. posting the documents? 3. meeting George? 4. contacting Ann? 5. seeing the agents? 6. leaving? 7. paying the workmen? 8. starting? 9. opening the doors? e.g. A: Did you borrow a car? B: No. We were to have borrowed a car but the plan fell through. Did you... 1. camp on the beach? 2. hire a boat? 3. visit the island? 4. bathe f by moonlight? 5. spend a week in the mountains? 6. cook over open fires? 7. make a film of the seabirds? 8. swim before breakfast? 9. water-ski? 10. get up at dawn? 11. climb the cliffs? 12. take photographs under water? XVII. Read the dialogues, learn them and make up similar dialogues.
Questioning obligations

A little boy is going to visit the zoo with his grandmother. His mother wants him to get ready. Mother: Right! You must wash your hands. Boy: Do 1 have to wash them? Mother: Yes, you do. And you must comb your hair too. Boy: Do I have to comb it?
Releasing people from their obligations(I)

The boy doesn't want to do what his mother tells him to do. So he asks his grandmother if he really has to do. Boy: Gran, must I really wash my hands?
301

Grandmother: No, you needn't wash them if you don't want to. Boy: And must I really comb my hair? Grandmother: No, you needn't comb it if you don't want to. Releasing people from obligations (2) This time the grandmother is going to say the same thing but in a different way. Boy: Gran, must I really wash my hands? Grandmother: No, you don't have to wash them if you don't want to. Boy: And must I really comb my hair? Grandmother: No, you don't have to comb it if you don't want to. XVIII There are always certain things which you mustn't do. These things depend on where you are or what you are doing For example, if you are in a hospital you mustn't make a lot of noise. If you are in a theatre you mustn't smoke, and so on. Look at the following situations and say what you mustn't do in each case 1. When you are training for a big sporting event... 2. When you are working in a library... 3. When there is a fire... 4. When you are driving through a town... 5. When you are travelling abroad... 6. When you are ill with flue...

Fluency
/. Listen to the conversations, ask and answer questions.

Role-play the conversations: 1. Jenny is 26. She is a teacher. She is in class now. Jenny: Now, Martin... can you swim? Martin: Yes, I can... I could swim when I was five. Jenny: Could you? Martin: Yes, Miss ... could you swim when you were five? Jenny: I could swim when I was three. Martin: Really, Miss' Could you read and write when you were three? Jenny: No, Martin . . of course I couldn't. 2. Luisa: Can you swim, Astrid? Astrid: Yes, my parents taught me when I was four. I went swimming yesterday with Ali and because the weather was nice we were able to swim in the open air pool. It was rather crowded, of course, but I was still able to swim six or seven lengths before the usual crowds of children arrived. We couldn't swim much after that, so we just relaxed and enjoyed the sun. Can you swim well, Luisa? , , , 302 Luisa: Well, I couldn't when I was a child, but I can now. //. Situation: Your friend and you are speaking about your abilities in different periods of your life. Prompts: walk, speak, read, write, swim, ride a bicycle, skate, ski, sew, drive a car, dive, etc. ///. Listen to the texts, ask and answer questions, retell the texts: 1. Timmy Brown and all his brothers and sisters are very frustrated. The television broke yesterday while they were watching their favourite TVprogramme. Their parents called the TV repairman, but he couldn't come yesterday. He was fixing televisions on the other side of the town. He can't come today either. And unfortunately, he won't be able to come tomorrow because he'll be out of town. Timmy Brown and his brothers and sisters are afraid they won't be able to watch TV for quite a while. That's why they are so frustrated. 2. Mrs. Murphy doesn't know what to do with her students today. They didn't do their homework last night and now she can't teach the lesson she prepared. Bob couldn't do his homework because he had a stomachache. Sally couldn't do her homework because she was very tired and fell asleep early. John couldn't do his homework because he had to visit his grandmother in the hospital. Donna couldn't do her homework because she had to take care of her baby sister while her mother worked late at the office. And all other students couldn't do their homework because there was a blackout in their neighbourhood last night. All the students promise Mrs Murphy they'll be able to do their homework tonight. She certainly hopes so. IV. Situation:: Marianne is going to enroll in the Speedy Typing School. She's excited about the things she'll be able to do when she finishes the course. What will she be able to do? Prompts' type 70 words per minute; use the most modern equipment; get a good job; earn a high salary; meet interesting people. V. Listen to the conversations, read and learn them: 1. Interviewer: Now, Mr. Jones., why do you, want to go to Australia? Mr. Jones: Well, I'm really thinking about my children. You see there aren't many opportunities here. 1 lost my job last year and wasn't able to find another one. Will I be able to find a job in Australia? Interviewer: What do you do? 303
Mr. Jones: I'm an electrician. Interviewer: Oh, you'll be able to find a job easily. Mr. Jones: What about accommodation? Interviewer: Well, that is a problem... but there are hostels for new immigrants. Mr. Jones: ... and what about my children? Interviewer: Oh, you'll be able to find a good school in Australia. 2. Pat: Mary, will you be able to help me this evening? Mary: No, I won't but I'll be able to help you tomorrow. Pat: John, can you help me today? John: I'm sorry I can't help you today or tomorrow, but I'll be able to help you the day after tomorrow. Pat: Harry. What about you? Can you help me? Harry: I don't think so. I won't be able to help you until I see you next week. Pat: What helpful friends! VI. Situation: You ask your friends to repair your taperecorder, but for different reasons none of them can help you at the moment. They promise to help you some time later. VI/. Listen to the conversation, ask and answer questions. (Mr. Kent, Julia's boss, is talking to Julia on the office phone.) Mr. Kent: Do you think you could possibly work late this afternoon, Miss Frost? I'm afraid there's some work we really must finish this evening. I can't possibly do it myself. Julia: Work late? I ... suppose so, if you really think it's necessary. Mr. Kent: Thank you. We'll have to work about an hour's overtime. That's all. (hangs up) Julia: (to herself, while dialling) Oh, dear. Now I'll have to ring Jim and tell him. He won't like it. Jim: Hello? 26721. Julia: Is that you, Jim? This is Julia. Look... I'm afraid I won't be able to meet you at 7 this evening. I'll have to come later.

Jim: What? You mean you are going to be late again? Julia: Now listen, Jim, please. It isn't my fault. I'll have to work late this evening and then I'll have to go home. I can't possibly go to the restaurant straight from work! Jim: It is always something, isn't it? When will you be able to come then?
304

Julia: Don't worry. You won't have to wait long. I'll be there at 8. Jim: At 8? But we were going to a film after dinner. Remember? Julia: I know... and it starts at 8.30. We'll just have to miss it this evening, that's all. We'll be able to see it some other time. Jim: Oh, no, we won't! Tonight's the last night! Julia: Oh, dear... I suppose I'll just have to come straight from work, that's all. Jim: Yes, you will. Meet me at the restaurant at 7! Julia: Ail right, Jim. I'll be there.

VIII. Reproduce the phrases with "have to" and "be able to" used in the conversation. IX. Give a brief account of the conversation. Role-play the conversation.
X. Situation:^our friend and you agreed to go to the theatre tonight, but you can't as you have to meet your cousin at the station. Your friend asks if you can come tomorrow, but tomorrow you are going to take your cousin sightseeing. You agree to meet some other time.

XI. Listen to the conversations, ask and answer questions, rote-play the conversations:
1. Jill: Why are you taking this course, Maria? Maria: Well, I'm a secretary and I sometimes need English in my job. I can read English well, but I write it badly. I understand it easily but I can't speak it fluently. Jill: Do you have to write letters in English? Maria: Not often, but sometimes I have to speak English on the telephone. Jill: Do you have to write English shorthand? Maria: No, I don't. Jill: Does your boss have to speak English? Maria: Yes, he does. He has to entertain English and American visitors. But when they speak fast, he can't understand them correctly. 2. Barbara: I worked very hard on that article on tourism, but Mr. Short didn't like it. Steve: Oh, dear, did you have to write it again? Barbara: I had to change the entire second page! Steve: Well, at least you didn't have to rewrite it completely. I remember my first articles for Mr. Short. 305

I sometimes had to rewrite them two or three times from start to finish. So don't despair. XII. Situation: Your friend and you are very busy people, you have a lot of things to do every day, you had a very busy day yesterday and you will be very busy tomorrow. At the moment you are speaking about your work. XIII. Listen to the text "A Hard Life": Jerry Floyd is talking to his grandfather about his new job: "It's terrible, granddad. I have to get up at 7 o'clock because I have to catch the bus to work Because I'm new, I have to make the tea. I have to work hard ... I'm only happy at weekends: I don't have to work then". His grandfather isn't very sympathetic: "I had to start work when I was 14. 1 lived in South Wales, and there wasn't much work. I had to be a coal miner. We had to work twelve hours a day. We didn't have to work on Sundays ... but we had to work the other six days of the week. When I was eighteen, the First World War started. I joined the army. 1 had to wear a uniform, and I had to go to France. A lot of my friends died. We had to obey the officers, and we had to kill people. When I was sixty, I had to go into hospital because of the dust from the mines. It was the only quiet time in my life... I didn't have to work, I didn't have to earn money. I retired when I was sixty-five. Nowadays I don't work and I don't have to get up early. But I have to live on my pension, and life is still difficult. I don't feel sorry for you". Questions: Why does Jerry think his life is hard? Was his grandfather's life easy or hard? Why? XIV. Listen to the text again and ask more detailed questions, (general, special, alternative, disjunctive) XV. Was your life hard? What did you have to do? XVI. Listen to the conversations, ask and answer questions. 1. Mr. Williams: Where's Jimmy? Mrs. Williams: He's in bed. Mr. Williams: What's the matter with him? Mrs. Williams: He feels ill. Mr. Williams: He looks ill. Mrs. Williams: We must call the doctor. Mr. Williams: Yes, we must. Mr. Williams: Can you remember the doctor's telephone number?
306

Mrs. Williams: Yes. It's 09754. Doctor: Open your mouth, Jimmy. Show me your tongue. Say, 'Ah'. Mr. Williams: What's the matter with him, doctor? Doctor: He has a bad cold, Mr. Williams, so he must stay in bed for a week. Mrs. Williams: That's good news for Jimmy. Doctor: Good news? Why? Mr. Williams: Because he doesn't like school. 2. Doctor: How's Jimmy today? Mrs. Williams: He's better, thank you, doctor. Come upstairs. Doctor: You look very well, Jimmy. You are better now, but you mustn't get up yet. You must stay in bed for another two days. The boy mustn't go to school yet, Mrs. Williams. And he mustn't eat rich food. Mrs. Williams: Has he a temperature, doctor? Doctor: No, he hasn't. Mrs. Williams: Must he stay in bed? Doctor: Yes. He must remain in bed for another two days. He can get up for about two hours each day, but you must keep the room warm. Where's Mr. Williams this evening? Mrs. Williams: He's in bed, doctor. Can you see him, please? He has a bad cold, too. XVII. Give a brief account of the conversations. XVIII. Reproduce the phrases with modal verbs used in the conversations. XIX. Read and role-play the conversations. X. Situation: You are at the doctor's. The doctor is giving you instructions.

Self check /. Complete the sentences with "can", "could" or "be able to". Sometimes more than one answer is possible. 1. Oh dear, I (not) ... remember her address. 2. Where are the keys? I (not) ... find them last night. 3. The show is very popular but luckily I ... get two seats for Saturday. 4. It's nice ... sleep late on Sundays. 5. My sister (not) ... swim until she was eleven. 6. I lost all my money but fortunately I ... borrow some from my friends. 7. He ... drive a car when he was sixteen. 8. Mary moved to
307

New York last month, so she will ... see her parents more often. 9 The exam was easy. I ... do all the questions. 10. If wear lucky we. see the whole match. 11. I'd like to ... speak a little bit of every language. 12. I went to the library, Mrs. Price, but I ... (not) find the book you wanted. 13. He ... find a good answer if you ask him tonight. 14. Olaf ... speak English better after he has more classes.

//. Complete with "mustn't" or "don't (doesn't) have to". 1. I can stay in bed tomorrow morning because I ... work 2 You ... forget what I told you. It's very important. 3. I ... leave yet. I've got plenty of time. 4. She ... get up so early. She gets up early because she prefers to. ///. Complete with "must" or "have to". 1. You really ... work harder if you want to pass that examination. 2. We couldn't repair the car ourselves. We . . take it to a garage. 3. I'm afraid I can't come tomorrow I ... work late. 4. I'm sorry I couldn't come yesterday. I ... work late 5. Ann was feeling ill last night. She ... leave the party. IV. Complete with "must", "mustn't" or "needn't". 1. We've got a lot of time. We ... hurry. 2. Tom gave me a letter to post. 1 ... forget to post it. 3. Do you want me to wait for you? Okay. You ... wait. 4. You ... come if you don't want to but I hope you will. 5. We have enough time so we ... go shopping today. 6. This book is very valuable. You ... look after it carefully You ... lose it. V. Translate into English: 1 ? , . . 2. . 10 . 3. . , . 4. ' , . . . 5. 6. . 8. 7. . . 8. ? . 9. . 7.
308

Answers U NIT 2 Exercise 1, p. 22 1. Is this your newspaper? No, it's Nina's. 2. What is your new flat like? It's large and light. 3. Whose car is that: your father's or yours? My father's 4. Where are our tickets' They are in my bag. 5. What are those? That is a desk and those are chairs. 6. What colour is your new coat? Blue. 7. Nick is in Moscow now, isn't he? Yes, he is. 8. Is this your pen No, mine is red. I think it's Nina's. 9. What's this? It's a lamp. 10. Whose car

is that? The red one? I think it's Victor's 11. Where is my umbrella? Look on the desk. 12. My suitcase, please. What colour is it? Brown. Here it is. 13. What's this? It's a very interesting book. 14. Is this your umbrella? No. Are you sure? Yes, I am My umbrella is blue. 15. Whose notebooks are these (they) ? Are they yours, Ann? No, mine are in my bag. Ask Helen. Perhaps, they are hers.

UNITS Exercise 1, p. 29 Are we; who is; Enrico is; Luisa is; they are; they are; I am; I am; that is; Are you; we are. Exercise II, p. 29 1. Dick Brown is an engineer. He's thirty (years old). He's a doctor. He's married. His wife's name is Ann She is a journalist. They are from London. 2. What's your name? Harry Stone. What country are you from? England. (I'm from England) Where are your friends from? They are from France. What are your jobs? We are all engineers. 3 What's your brother's name? Alexander. Is he married? No, he is single. What's his job? He's a doctor 4. Hello! How are you? Fine, thanks. How is your sister? She is fine, too. Thank you. Give my regards to her, please. 5. How do you do. I'm Victor Ivanov, a diplomat from Minsk. How do you do, Mr Iva383 nov. Nice to meet you. 6. What is your friend like? He's a tall, thin man. How old is he? 45. (He's forty-five years old)
UNIT 4

Exercise 1, p. 34 1. Has Victor (got) any friends? Yes, he has two good friends. 2. I have no money. Neither have 1. 3. I have some newspapers. So have 1. 4. Have you (got) any sweets? I've got some. 5. I haven't got a piano. (I have no piano) 6. Have you got any sugar? Yes, I've got some. 7. She hasn't got any relatives in Minsk. (She has no relatives in Minsk). 8. Have you got any free time? Yes, I'm free now. 9. I have no boat. (I haven't got a boat) Neither have I. 10. They have no children. (They haven't got any children) 11. I have no notebooks. (I haven't got any notebooks) UNIT 5 Exercise I, p. 41 I. 1 there are, the 2. there is, the 3. this 4. there are 5. there is, the, the 6. this, there are 7. the 8. this, there are, the 9. the Exercise II, p. 41 1. some, any 2. some, any 3. any, any 4. any, some 5. any, some 6. no 7. no, some 8. some 9. any, some 10. no, some 11. any, any Exercise III, p. 41 1. My friend has got a good two-room flat. The rooms are large and light. There is a table and four chairs in the sitting-room. There is a bookcase on the right. In the left-hand corner there is a TV set and an armchair. The bedroom is also large. There are two beds and a wardrobe in it. There is a nice carpet on the floor. The kitchen is very comfortable. There is a kitchen table and some stools in it. There is a cupboard next to the gas-stove. There is a fridge opposite it. My friend's wife is glad that she has such a large and comfortable kitchen. 2. Are there any flowers in the vase? Yes, there are some roses in it. 3. There is no sugar in your tea Put some. 4. Are there any English magazines in your library? No. (there aren't any) 5. There is no sofa (there isn't a sofa) in our sittingroom, but there are two comfortable armchairs. 6. Is there any milk in the fridge? Yes, there are two bottles of milk there. 7. There are no books (there aren't any books) on the desk, 384 there are some magazines there. 8. Is there any chalk in the classroom? No, there isn't any. 9. There is no bread (there isn't any bread) on the bread-plate. Is there any bread in the cupboard? 10. Is there a library in this neighbourhood? Yes, there is a good library not far from here. 11. There are two interesting museums in our town. 12. What is there next to the post-office? There is a shop there. 13. Have you got any notebooks? Yes, I've got some. 14. There is no telephone in our flat. Have you got a telephone? U NIT 6 Exercise I, p. 44 1. from, on 2. into 3. to 4. to 5. out of Exercise II, p. 45 1. them 2. our 3. it 4. her 5. his 6. us Exercise III, p. 45 1. Give me that pencil, please. The black one? No, the red one. 2. Take the vase out of the cupboard and put it on the table. 3. The lecture is very interesting. Don't miss it. 4. Ring up Helen. She is at home now. 5. There are some dirty dishes on the table. Wash them. 6. Don't take my dictionary. Take Ann's (dictionary). 7. Show us your new bicycle. Here it is. U NIT 7 Exercise I, p. 48 1. What time is it? It's a quarter to eleven, (half past eleven; a quarter past twelve; twenty minutes past 8; twenty

minutes to six; half past twelve; ten minutes past four; five minutes to nine; five minutes past nine; a quarter to eight) 2. What time is it by your watch? It's ten minutes to eleven. My watch is ten minutes slow. And my watch is five minutes fast. 3. What date is it today?Today is Tuesday, the twenty-fifth of January. (Today is Friday, the ninth of June. Today is Wednesday, the twelfth of July Today is Saturday, the twenty-third of May)

UNITS Exercise I, p. 55 1. Everybody is; Mr Anderson is cleaning; Mr Wilson is fixing; Mr and Mrs Thomas are painting; Mrs Black is doing; Tommy Lee is feeding; Mr and Mrs Lane are washing; I am; I'm washing... 385 I'm watching. 2. What are you doing; I'm typing; What are you typing; Is your husband; he's reading; Where are; They are playing; How is; What is she doing; She's visiting; how are you; Is your husband; he is. Exercise II, p. 55 Where is Victor? He's in his room. What is he doing? He's fixing the radio-set. 2. What are you writing? I'm writing a letter to my sister. 3. Is Ann still typing? Yes, she is. 4. What are you thinking about? My work. 5. What are Jane and Dick doing now? They are listening to music. 6. What are you looking for? My umbrella. UNIT 9 Exercise I, p. 62 Where is? She is; What is she doing; She's making; Is Johnny; he isn't; He is; What are they doing; They are playing; When is he coming back; What are you doing; I'm writing; Is she going; she isn't; Lucy and her husband are going. Exercise II, p. 62 1. Are the students going to write a dictation? What are the students going to do (to write)? Who is going to write a dictation? Are the students going to write a dictation or a test? The students are going to write a dictation, aren't they? The students aren't going to write a test, are they? 2. Is she going to send a letter to her mother? What is she going to do? What is she going to send to her mother? Who is she going to send a letter to? Is she going to send a letter or a telegram to her mother? Is she going to send a letter to her mother or to her sister? She is going to send a letter to her mother, isn't she? She is not going to send her a telegram, is she^ 3 Are the Browns leaving on Monday? When are the Browns leaving? Who is leaving on Monday? What are the Browns doing on Monday? Are the Browns leaving on Monday or on Tuesday? The Browns are leaving on Monday, aren't they? They aren't leaving today, are they? 4. Is Betty coming to the party? Who isn't coming to the party? Is Betty coming to the party or not? Betty isn't coming to the party, is she? 5. Is Mike waiting for Lucy? Who is Mike waiting for? What is Mike doing? Where is he waiting for Lucy? Is Mike waiting for Lucy or for Paul? Mike is waiting for Lucy, isn't he? Exercise III, p. 62 1. for 2. to 3. for 4. about 5. to 6. about 7. to 8. with
386

Exercise IV, p. 62
1. Are you going to watch television tonight? Yes. So am I. 2. Lavrov is leaving on Tuesday. 3. What is Robert doing now? He's translating an article. And what is he going to do then? He's going to the cinema. 4. When are you going to visit your brother? Tomorrow morning. 5. Are you going to the country tomobrow? No. Tomorrow I'm taking my English exam. 6. My friends are coming on Sunday. I'm going to meet them at the station. 7. I'm going to the theatre tonight.

UNIT 10 Exercise I, p. 71
a) 1. something 2. anybody 3. something 4. anybody 5. anything 6. somebody 7. nobody 8. nothing 9. anybody b) 1. little 2. much 3. a lot of, few 4. much, little 5. many (or a lot of) 6. many, few, a few 7. little 8. a few 9. many, a lot of 10. much, little 11. much 12. a lot of 13. many 14. many

Exercise II, p. 71
1. How many cinemas are there in your town? There are some, two or three, I think. 2. Have you got any chalk? Yes, I've got a little. Take some in the box. 3. There is too much furniture in their sitting-room, (or They've got too much furniture in their sitting-room.) 4. Please, give me something to read. 5. There is nothing (isn't anything) in the vase. 6. How many sisters has he? He has no (hasn't any) sisters. He has two brothers. 7. There is nobody in the flat. 8. There is something on the table. 9. Is there anybody in the office? 10. How much money have you got? 11. There are a lot of children in the park. 12. There is no (isn't any) butter in the fridge. 13. I haven't got many relatives. (I have few relatives) 14. Have you got many (a lot of) books? No, very few. 15. There are some (a few) parks in our city. 16. There are no (aren't any) chairs in the sitting-room. 17. Somebody is standing at the window. 18. There is nothing in the bag. 19. I have no (haven't any) time to go there. 20. I have very little paper. I'm going to buy some. 21. There are a lot of women at this factory, but very few men. 22. He hasn't got many friends. 23. There isn't much tea in the teapot. 24. We haven't got much work today. 25. You haven't got many mistakes in your dictation, (or There aren't many mistakes in your dictation.) 26. Are there many roses in your garden? (or Have you got many roses in your garden?) 27. There are some (a few) newspapers on the table. 28. I have a little time. I'm going to the cinema.

387

UNIT 11

Exercise I, p. 79 1. can (may) 2. must, needn't 3. can't, must 4. must, must, can't 5. may, mustn't 6. can, can 7. can't 8. may (can) Exercise II, p. 79 1. May I smoke here? No, you mustn't. 2. I can play golf And you? So can I. 3. I can't swim. Neither can I. 4. Where can we meet? In the library. 5. Can I speak to you? Yes, please. 6. Must I come, too? No, you needn't. 7. I can't go with you. I must visit my sister. 8. Can I see Doctor Brown? I'm afraid not. He is busy now. 9. Who can meet his mother at the station? Mary can. UNIT 12 Exercise I, p. 94 A. 1. Jack is often; 2. Mary and Jane often go; 3. Mike is never, 4. Betty sometimes phones; 5 They are sometimes; 6. Alice is usually; 7. Paul doesn't often come; 8. Jane always visits; 9. James doesn't often watch; 10. Donald doesn't know... he speaks. B. It is; It is; Mary and James Wilson are; James is; His wife teaches; The Wilsons don't go; they are; They are having... listening, They always listen; Peter isn't; He is; He does... his parents are; Peter's hobby is; He often plays. Exercise II, p. 94 1. Victor doesn't want to go out of town. Neither do I. 2. My brother doesnt' smoke. 3. Sometimes I go to work on foot, (or Sometimes I walk to my office) 4. I read a lot. So do I 5. My sister is usually busy on Monday. 6. He doesn't always rest in the south. 7. I don't like this picture. Neither do 1. 8. We never go to the south in summer. 9. My son often visits me. 10 We are usually at home on Sunday evening. I like to spend the evenings at home, to listen to some music, to watch TV or read a book. I don't go to bed late, but I like to get up early. 11 Robert doesn't play tennis. Yes, he does 12. He is very busy now. So am I. 13. My son studies at the Medical Institute. So does my daughter. 14. Do you ever see Peter? Seldom. Exercise I, p. 105 1. The swimming bath opens... closes; 2. I don't use; 3. How many cigarettes do you smoke; 4. What do you do; 5. Where does your father come; He comes; 6. why don't you get; 7. I play... I don't; 8. I do not understand; What does "deceive" mean; 9. What time do the banks close. 388 Exercise II, p. 105 1. Do you often see my brother at the plant? Yes, I do. 2. Robert never writes to me. 3. Why don't you cook yourself? I have no time. 4. What time do you have supper? At 8 o'clock. 5 I wonder why Victor doesn't phone me. 6. Does your son like to watch TV? Yes, he watches television every day. 7. I wonder whether he knows her address. 8. Do you know whether (if) he smokes? I've no idea. 9. Nick lives far from here, doesn't he? "Yes, very far. 10. Sometimes I go to work on foot. And you? I always drive to work. 11. Where do you usually spend your holidays? In the south, as a rule. 12. Don't you know my brother? No. 13. Peter doesnt speak German, does he? Yes, he does. 14. Do you usually dine (have dinner) at home or at the canteen? At home, as a rule. I live not far from work. 15. Do you like her flat? No. Neither do I.

Exercise I, p. 109
1. Where is, She is; What is she doing; She is cooking; Does she always cook; she does. 2. What are they discussing; They are speaking. 3. What is Mike doing; He is translating; Does he know; he does. 4. Does he often walk; he usually goes. 5. He is having; Does he always have. 6. Mike doesn't speak; He knows. 7. The students are writing. 8. The baby is sleeping; The baby sleeps. 9. I'm sitting; I usually sit. 10. AH speaks... he is speaking. 11. What are they talking about. 12. What does your father do. 13. My parents live; Where do your parents live. 14. Where are you going; Do you often go. 15. Our teacher is not standing; She is sitting. 16. She is eating; She always eats. 17. Alice doesn't take; She usually walks.

Exercise II, p. 110

1. As a rule my father gets up at 8 o'clock. 2. I always rest after supper. 3. Where is Victor? He is having dinner. 4. My brother knows English and he can help you. Ring him up. I think he isn't sleeping yet. 5. What is Robert doing? He is playing tennis. Does he play tennis well? Not very. 6. How often do you see your sister? Two or three times a month. 7. Mary is in the library now. She is writing an article. She works in the library every day. 8. Where are you in the evening? I often go to my classes at the Institute. 9. Why are you often late? I don't like to get up early. 10. Are the children having dinner? No, they are playing football. 11. What are you doing now? I'm listening to the radio. 1 always listen to the news in the morning. 12. We often go to the theatre. So do we. 13. I wonder what he is doing now. I think he is 389 reading. 14. Peter doesn't play chess. Neither does Nick. 15. She is usually at work at 10 a. m., but today she is at home. 16. How often do you meet Victor? Every week, on Thursday. Do you know where he lives? No. 17.

Who knows French? Petrov does. 18. Who is playing the piano? Helen is. She plays the piano very well. 19. He never writes to you, does he? Yes, he does. 20. Do you often go to the cinema? Once or twice a month.

UNIT 13 Exercise VIII, p. 114

1. Are you interested in football? Yes, but I seldom go to the stadium, I prefer to watch football matches on television. 2. My brother is a bright boy. He does well at school, he can draw and play the piano well, he is keen on sports. In a week he is going to Moscow to take part in a tennis competition. 3. When do you want to go fishing? Either on Tuesday or on Wednesday. 4. Please, switch on the TV set. But I don't know how to switch it on. 5. Nick often goes away on business, and I seldom see him. 6. My wife doesn't work now, she looks after the baby. She is going back to work in three months. 7. Do you read a lot? Yes, my bookcase is full of books, but I'm very busy now, but usually I read for two hours in the evening. 8. My father comes home from work at 6 o'clock, has supper, rests about an hour and then he goes for a walk either to the park or to the river. He likes to go for a walk in the evening. 9. Both my brother and I are keen on sports. In winter we often go skiing on Sunday, and in summer we like to go fishing and boating.

Exercise I, p. 121
1. Mrs Wilson is sitting; She is reading, She reads; Mr Wilson is pouring; He drinks .. he goes; the children are not watching; They are playing; They usually watch... they are not paying; Mrs Wilson is not watching; She doesn't like; Mr Wilson leaves, Mrs Wilson doesn't go; She stays; She does ... looks. 2. Where is Jackson from; He is; What does he do; He is; What is he doing; He is; When is he leaving; 3. I'm phoning; I'm working; You never stay; I am having difficulty; you seldom have; You always finish; what are you doing; Are you watching; Jill is preparing ... I am getting.
390

Exercise II, p. 122

1. Where do you spend your free time? We often go to the country. 2. When does the meeting begin? At 5. 3. I come home late now, because I have a lot of work. 4. Where is Victor? He is still having dinner. He usually dines at a restaurant, doesn't he? Yes, he does. Why doesn't he dine at home? He lives far from work. 5. Do you speak German? No, I speak Spanish. Who else knows Spanish? I think Mary does. 6. Is your daughter keen on sports? Yes, she is very keen on tennis. 7.1 seldom see my sister, because she lives out of town. 8. What are you doing now? I'm translating an article. 9. My son doesn't like hockey. He prefers football. 10. Where are you going? To the library. Do you often work in the library? Once or twice a week.

UNIT 14 Exercise VIII, p. 127

1. going 2. coming 3. go, go 4. comes 5. go 6. goes, comes 7. go 8. go 9. going 10. come

Exercise IX, p. 127

1. My parents are old. I have to help them. 2. I don't have to get up early now, because I'm on holiday. 3. The train arrives in Moscow at 6 a. m. 4. When do you come home? As a rule, at 6 p. m. 5.1 am going to the south. And you? 1 don't know where to spend my holiday. 6. Do you have to type yourself? Not always, my sister helps me. She can type very well. 7. We must meet at the bus-stop at 12.30. I must hurry up. 8. I am looking forward to seeing my brother. He is coming back in a week.

Exercise I, p. 135
in; at; from; till; on; to; by; for; at; before; at; till; at; -; -; -; for; after; in; for; in; to;.-; of; with; with; on; at; to; at.

Exercise II, p. 135

James is; He works; He gets up... he doesn't like... he has breakfast; He gets ...he likes; He studies... he has; He teaches; he has; His physics lab is.. he does; His astronomy classes are; James is not athletic... he doesn't want... he jogs; He also plays; He is always; James and Bill are talking; What are you doing; I'm going; You are working; Do you often go; I'm taking; How long are you going; Do you want.

391
Exercise III, p. 135

1. Why does James get up early every day? 2. What time does he have breakfast? 3. What time does he get to the University? 4. What does James do? 5. When does he teach? 6. When is his physics lab? 7. What does James do not to get fat?

Exercise IV, p. 136 1. I must phone Mother. Wait for me a minute, please. 2. Where is Victor? He is still having dinner. 3. It takes me about an hour to get to work. I live in the country. 4. What are you going to do tonight? I want to help my son with his maths 5. Ring her up now I think she isn't sleeping yet. She usually goes to bed late. 6. Where are you usually in the evenings? I always go for a walk in the park. Sometimes I play tennis or volley-ball there. 7. How often do you go away on business? Once or twice a month. 8. I wonder what Father is doing now. I think he is still working in the garden. 9. I don't know his address. Neither do I. 10. We often go fishing. So do we. 11.1 am very busy now. So am I. 12. Victor is coming at 6 o'clock. I'm going to the station to meet him. UNIT 15 Exercise I, p. 146 An Englishman came; He stopped... and decided; He went... and did so; he sent; he went; he wanted... he didn't remember; he sent.

Exercise II, p. 146 1. Yesterday Nick phoned me. He is going away on business tonight. 2. Two weeks ago my wife and I heard "Aida". We liked the opera very much. 3. My son is a student. He finished school three years ago. 4. Yesterday we were at the cinema. We met our friends there. 5. On Sunday we didn't go to the country. We visited our relatives. 6.1 didn't buy a ticket yesterday. Neither did I. 7. 1 forgot her address. So did I. 8. We came home late. So did we. 9. I left home early. So did I. Exercise I, p. 155 A. lived; went; came; stopped; helped; said; lost; telephoned; sent; was; thanked; left; said; How did you lose; smiled; closed; said; didn't quite lose; got; didn't want. Who did the grandfather live with? Where did he go every day? What time did he come home for lunch? What happened one day? What did one of the policemen say? Did the grandfather really lose his way? Why did the grandfather telephone the police? B. Arthur is; He went; Deborah is; Did you have; Yes, I did... 392 I met; Did the train get; it didn't; It was C. Jack is;; Why didn't he go; He was; Does he often travel; Where did he go; I don't know I'm afraid. Exercise 11, p. 156 1. When did you last see Victor'' 3 days ago at the Institute. 2. Did you like the lecture? Yes, very much. So did I. But my brother didn't like it. Really? 3. Who visited him yesterday? - Bill did. 4. Whom did you invite to your birthday party? Mary and Helen. Why didn't you invite Emma? She's very busy just now I invited her but she didn't come. 5. You phoned her yesterday, didn't you? No, I phoned her on Thursday. 6 When did they come back from London? A week ago. How long did they stay there? A month. 7. Where did you go yesterday after classes? To the library. I spent the whole evening there. 8. We didn't translate this text last week, did we? Yes, we did. 9. Did you look through the documents yesterday? Yes, certainly. 10. You worked at the University before, didn't you? Yes, I worked there for 10 years. 11. How much did you pay for your TV set? 10 000 roubles. 12. Didn't you send him a telegram yesterday? No, I forgot. 13. I don't know whether Victor came yesterday. I think he did. 14. When did she leave? I've no idea when she left. Exercise I, p. 166 A. was ... was; didn't speak; was ... came ... went; didn't say ... went; washed ... did; went... found; were; woke ... was; saw; took ... read. B. Julia is having; Were you late; I was ... the manager was; Did he see; he did; He saw ... I came in. C. Were you; I wasn't; Where were you; I was; When were you; 1 rang you up... you didn't answer; I was; I came. Exercise II, p. 166 1. Were you late for the lecture yesterday? No, I came on time. 2. Where were your parents in summer? At the seaside. 3. When was your brother abroad? Last year. 4. Were vou at the Institute yesterday? No, I was ill. 5. I wonder where they were last night. 6. Nick was in Italy in June, wasn't he? No, he was there in September. 7.1 don't know whether Jane was at the lecture. Perhaps, she was. 8. She was disappointed by the news. Really? 9. I was very busy yesterday. So was I. 10. We were not late. Neither were we. 11. You weren't at the party, were you? Yes, I was.
393

Exercise I, p. 170 A. was ... was; bought ... put; came ... said; are ... are; didn't say ... walked ... went; was ... didn't say; came; had; are ... said; forgot. B. I got; My wife opened; she said; I answered; Are you... she asked; I answered; I'm not ... I'm; Dinner is... she said; I took... sat; My wife sat; Did you catch ... she asked; I answered; I missed it; I ran ... got; Which train did you catch; What time did you get ... she asked; I answered; my wife exclaimed; Wasn't the boss; he wasn't ... I said; He arrived; He missed. Exercise II, p. 171 1. Yesterday evening we were in the club. There was a concert there. There were a lot of workers from our plant at the concert. 2. Five years ago I lived in Moscow, then I worked at a plant. 3. When did you last see Nina? Last week. 4. Were you at home on Monday morning? No, I was at work. 5. When did you have dinner? At 3 o'clock. 6. What language did you study at school? German. 7. When did you get married? In 1988. 8. Last week the postman brought me a letter from my father. 9. Did you come to work on time yesterday? Yes, I did. 10. Where were you on Sunday evening? At Victor's. 11. When were you at the theatre last? A month ago. 12. Yesterday I woke up at 7 o'clock. I washed, had breakfast and went to the plant. I came to the plant at 8 o'clock, looked through the papers and dictated business letters to my secretary. After dinner I took part in a meeting and

made a report. At our meeting we discussed a lot of questions. I was busy till 8 o'clock. 13. Did you enjoy the concert? Yes, I did. So did I. 14. I wasn't at the Institute yesterday. Neither was I. 15. Why didn't you phone me yesterday? I came home too late. 16. Weren't you at the cinema yesterday? No, I was at a party. 17.1 didn't enjoy the film. Neither did I. 18.1 didn't have breakfast today, because I got up late and was in a hurry to get to work on time. I had to take a taxi. 19. Yesterday evening 1 was in the library. So wasj. 20. I was not late. Neither was I. 21. When did you first hear "Aida"? 6 years ago. 22. Where did he buy this dictionary? I've no idea where he bought it. 23. Last year I used to get up early.

UNIT 16 Exercise VII, p. 175 1. doing ... making 2. do 3. to do ... to make 4. do 5. to make 6. did 7. made 394 Exercise VIII, p. 175
1. My watch was slow, so 1 had to take it to the repairs. 2. Did you have to wait for him long? No, he came on time. 3. I didn't have to go to the Institute yesterday, we had no classes. 4. She told me to come at 6 and asked me not to be late. 5. I asked the typist to type some documents for me. 6. She told me not to wait for her. 7.1 want to ask Victor to meet me. 8. He told me not to switch on the TV set today. 9. She asked you not to phone her so late 10. I want to ask my brother for his typewriter for a few days. 11. Tomorrow Peter is leaving for Moscow. He is going to take part in a conference. 12. Switch on the radio. I want to listen to the news.

Exercise I, p. 185 at, to, on, at, before,at, on, for, off, on, on, to, off, of, into, at, at, on, out, for, at, with, alter, back, to, till (until), at, back, on, on, -, -. Exercise II, p. 186 1. How often does Miss Green go to the office? 2. At what time does she start work? 3. Was she late for work yesterday? 4. How long did she type? 5. Where did she have lunch? 6. Who did she have lunch with? 7. What did she do after lunch? (Where did she go after lunch?) 8. When did she go home? Exercise III, p. 186 I. The text was difficult and I had to use a dictionary. It took me about two hours to translate the text. 2. Did you listen to the news yesterday? Certainly, I always listen to the news in the evening. 3. Hurry up. Father asked us not to be late. 4. Yesterday we had a meeting. My boss made a report. Everybody liked his report. 5 Today I left home at 8.20 and came to work 15 minutes earlier. 6. Yesterday my sister left for London. She will come back in two weeks. 7. Please, ask Victor to phone me tonight. UNIT 17 Exercise I, p. 195 1. I was having 2. When I saw... I realised 3. I wrote. 4.'I took... it was raining 5. It was snowing... I wanted. Exercise II, p. 196 A. 1 What were you reading ... I came; I took; 2. Ann was still waiting ... I arrived. She got... I was; 3. Where were you hurrying ... I met you; I was going; 4. I was not driving... the accident happened; 5.1 came; While I was waiting... I was reading; 6. The telephone rang... we were having. My wife answered. 395 . The students were talking... the teacher came in... they stopped... the teacher spoke; He walked... began; While he was writing, the students sat... took... prepared; The teacher finished... sat... opened; He was reading... the students were answering, the bell rang... most of them were still writing; The teacher told .. he collected; they left... he began.

Exercise III, p. 196

1. While the typist was typing, I was speaking to the chief engineer. 2. What were you doing on Monday from 8 to 10 in the evening? I was preparing for my exam. 3.You were busy yesterday, weren't you? Yes, I was writing an article. That's a pity. There was a very interesting lecture at the University yesterday. 4. Who were you talking to when I met you? To my cousin. 5. Yesterday evening we were all at home. I was reading the whole evening. My wife was watching television, and the children were playing chess. 6. What were you discussing at yesterday's meeting? We were speaking about our production plan. 7. Who helped you to translate the article? I translated it myself. 8. She never told about herself. 9. Who signed the documents? You signed them yourself. 10. I didn't have to phone Nick. He phoned me himself. 11. We didn't ask anybody for help and did all the work ourselves. 12. They told me about it themselves.
UNIT 18

Exercise I, p. 210
1. I am going; 2. it will rain; 3. Tom will get; 4. A friend is coming; 5. we are going; 6. It won't hurt you; 7. I'll do.

Exercise II, p. 210

a) 1. I'm going to wash; 2 I'll lend; 3. What are you going to do; 4. I'll send; 5.1 am going to watch; 6. I'll do; 7. I'll go; 8. it is going to fall down; 9. I'll show; 10. I'll have; 11. I'll turn on; 12. He is going to have... he is going to start; 13. I'll buy; 14. What colour are you going to paint; 15. What are you going to wear; 16. When are you going to type; I'll do. b) 1. what I am going to do; 2. The pUme is leaving; 3. you are going to like; 4. We are going to be; 5. Sue and Alan are getting married; 6. it is going to snow; 7. I'm taking; 8. My parents are arriving; 9. I'm going to be; 10. The

new supermarket is opening. c) 1. We are going; 2. We are having; 3. Does the film begin; 4.1 am not going away ... Are you going away; 5. The concert starts; 6 you are getting married, 7. The art exhibition opens... finishes; 8. What time does the next train leave; 9. we are going ... Are you coming.

Exercise II, p. 211 1. How long will it take you to finish this work? I think I'll finish it in a week. 2. Where are you going to rest this summer? I want to go to the south. 3. What are you doing tonight? I'm going to the theatre. 4. I wonder whether Jane will come to the party. I don't think so. Her mother is coming tonight, she's going to the station to meet her 5. Did you bring the dictionary? No, I forgot. I'll bring it tomorrow. 6. Robert won't be present at the meeting. He's leaving for Moscow. He will stay there for a month. 7. Hurry up. The train starts in half an hour. 8. Don't worry about your daughter. I will look after her. 9. When are you taking your last exam? On Friday. UNIT 19 Exercise V, p. 214 1. It may rain tomorrow. Very likely. It rains every day. October is always very wet here. 2. It was raining hard yesterday and it was very cold. 3. It often snowed last month, and this month it often rains. 4. It is usually warm here in July, but this July is cool. 5. When did it last snow? On Friday. 6. I am looking forward to summer. My sister and I are going to the south,. 7. Did it snow yesterday? Yes, but the snow melted very quickly. 8. There isn't a cloud in the sky. I don't think it will rain today. Exercise I, p. 218 Two men were travelling; They saw; they saw ... Indians lived; they met ... who was, He was ... knew; He could; the weather will be...asked; he answered; Rain will come; there will be... the sunshine will come...the weather will be; said; he turned; how do you know; I heard. Exercise II, p. 219 1. Where did you spend your holiday? 1 was in the Caucasus. What was the weather like there? It was dry and sunny. I swam and sunbathed a lot. 2. What is the climate like in Belarus? Summer is not hot Winter is mild. The climate is wet, it often rains. 3. What is the weather forecast for tomorrow? It will be cloudy and cool, but it won't rain. UNIT 20 Exercise I, p. 225 1. Will you please translate this article? I'll try to. 2. Shall I buy this dictionary for you? Please, do. 3. Where shall we
397

mee? Let's meet at the cinema at 7. 4. Shall we play a game of chess? I'm sorry but I can't. I'm going to the Institute. 5. Shall we go to the theatre tomorrow? Good idea. 6. Shall I switch on the TV set? --Yes, please. 7. Will you please pass me the salt? 8. Will you please lend me some money? Certainly. 9. Shall I invite Victor to my birthday? 10. Shall I type these letters? Please, do 11. Shall we go out of town tomorrow? I'm afraid I can't. I shall be busy tomorrow. 12. Shall I buy you a ticket for the match? Please, do. That's very kind of you. 13. Will you please tell me the time? It's 10.30.

U NIT 21 Exercise I, p. 231

I'll be working; When will you be setting off ( = When are you setting off); I'm taking ( = will be taking); I'm spending (= will be spending); We are doing ( = will be doing); Will you be travelling ( = Are you travelling); I'm taking; I'll be staying... I'll be leaving; I'll be sitting...it will probably be pouring; my gin-friend will be waiting... she won't wait; I'll be doing.

Exercise II, p. 231

1. Come to see me tonight. My friend will be telling about his trip to England. 2. When is he flying to Paris? Next week. 3. Don't go away. The train will be arriving in a few minutes. 4. Let's hurry up. It will be raining in a minute. 5. I won't write to him. He's coming next week. 6. Will you be travelling again in summer? Yes, we are going to the Caucasus. 7. What will you be doing tomorrow? From 10 to 2 I shall be working in the library. From 3 to 7 I'll be having my classes at the Institute.

UNIT 22
Exercise VI, p. 234
1. another 2. other 3. other 4. another 5. other 6. another 7. other 8. other 9. another 10. other 11. other

Exercise VII, p. 234

1. Do you enjoy French films? Yes, I do. 2. 1 didn't enjoy the concert. And you? Neither did I. 3. One of her sons is a pilot, the other is a diplomat. She is very proud of them. 4. This summer we rested in the south. Did you have a good time? (Did you enjoy yourselves?) Yes, the weather was fine. We enjoyed swimming in the sea and lying in the sun. My husband spent a lot of time fishing. It is his hobby. 398

Exercise I, p. 242

It was; I never get up; 1 sometimes stay; I got up; I looked; It was; I thought; It is raining; the telephone rang, It was; she said; I came; I am still having ... I said; What are you doing...she asked; I'm having... I repeated; she said; Do you always get up; It is.

Exercise II, p. 242

1. What are you going to do tonight? Nothing special. Shall we go to the cinema? Good idea. 2. I couldn't buy the tickets for this film yesterday. What a pity! 3. Do you enjoy playing tennis? Yes, it's my favourite kind of sports. 4. Are you going to the south this year? No, this year I am having my holiday in Novemder. November in the south is rainy and cool. 5. My father is very fond of gardening. We have a good garden, and he is very proud of it. 6. Last Sunday we went to a restaurant to celebrate our wedding anniversary. We enjoyed ourselves greatly.

UNIT 23
Exercise I, p. 253
A. 1. You won't catch... you don't hurry. 2. I shall wait...you are 3. the weather is... we'll have 4.1 finish... I'll take 5. He will leave... you arrive 6. I'll have... I finish 7. I'll speak... I see 8.1 won't leave... you return 9. you don't take... you'll be 10. What will happen... I tell 11. Will you tell ...breakfast is 12. you ask... he will help 13. I'll be...she arrives 14. he doesn't attend... he won't see 15. she hears... she'll be 16. I shan't phone... something important happens 17. he doesn't come, will you be? 18. They will laugh...they realise 19. you'll like... you meet 20. I'll send... I reach 21. I'll get... they have 22. Will she go... she gets 23. he offers... Guy will take 24. he tells... I'll go B. the sun rises... we'll get up and dress While you prepare... I'll pack. We'll set off...everything is ready. We won't stop...it's. While we have... we'll discuss. When we finish... we'll sleep. We'll hurry... it's ... the weather is... we'll put on. As soon as it gets... we'll make. Before everybody goes... we'll have. Won't we have ... C. I'll ring... there are, you are. . you'll have; I'll decide . I get; I pass... I'll buy; he gets in touch, I'll invite; I'll miss... I go, I'll see.. I get home.

Exercise II, p. 254

1. I'll call on you as soon as I am free. 2. I'll tell you my new address before we move to our new flat. 3. If nobody meets me at the station, I'll take a taxi. 4. After the meeting is over, I'll go to the cinema. 5. I'll wait until he phones me. 6. What will you do if you don't find him at home? 7. When I come to Moscow I'll send you a 399

41 telegram. 8. I'll help you as soon as I finish writing my article. 9. I shan't leave until you return. 10. You'll miss the train if you don't hurry up. 11. We won't have dinner until you come. 12. I'll call on you before I leave Moscow. 14. If he doesn't come tomorrow, send him a telegram. 15. I'll speak to him about it when I see him. 16. If I don't go away on business, I'll call on you one of these days. UNIT 24 Exercise V, p. 257 1. Do you enjoy Indian films? Yes, I do. 2. What is your brother doing? He's preparing for his exams. 3. I didn't enjoy the concert. And you? Neither did I. 4. Here's your coat. Put it on. 5. Yesterday Nick rang me up. He asked me for my tape-recorder for a few days. 6. Where are the books? They are inside the drawer 7. Switch on the light It's dark. 8. We enjoyed ourselves at the party. Exercise I, p. 262 We had; He's flying; He arrives; we contacted ... the flight number is; we're not ... he's coming; he doesn't know; I doubt... we'll be able; he feels; the time is; he gets; it's; he'll probably want; he'll just want; I'll be taking... he's. Exercise II, p. 263 It was my wife's birthday on Saturday. She was 37. We invited our parents and some friends to her birthday party. We had a good time. My wife cooked tasty dishes. One of her friends brought good records, and we enjoyed listening to them. While we were dancing, our parents were watching the slides of their trip to the Crimea. My birthday is in June. We are going to celebrate it in a restaurant. UNIT 25 Exercise I, p 278 the most beautiful; the Nicest; larger; harder; more; more interesting; the worst Exercise II, p. 278 1. Yesterday I got up later than usual. 2. My father is the oldest in our family, and my sister is the youngest. 3. Our sitting-room is the lightest room in our flat. 4. He is the most talented of his friends. 5. My elder brother is five years older than I (me). 6. My father is the tallest of us. 7. She is as beautiful as her mother. 8. It is the most interesting book in his collection. 9. Which language
400

is more difficult: German or English? 10. This summer is the driest. 11. There are more students in our group than in yours. 12 My suit is much more expensive than yours. 13. The railway station is farther from here than the airport. 14. The Moscow under ground is the best in the world. 15. This story is not so interesting as that. 16. Mary is much more beautiful than her sister. 17 I have fewer books than you. 18. Your dictation is the worst. 19 The twentysecond of December is the shortest day of the year. 20. This exercise is much more difficult than that. 21. This film

is less interesting than that. 22. She is as sociable as her sister.

UNIT 26 Exercise V, p. 281 1. other 2. another 3. other 4. another 5. the others 6. others 7. another 8. the others Exercise I, p. 293
to; on; for; ; for; at; on; on; .

Exercise II, p. 293 1. were 2. them 3. on 4. on 5. much better 6. stronger 7. fewer 8. the other 9. at Exercise III, p. 293 What can I do for you? I'd like to buy a light raincoat. What size do you wear? 46. How do you find this blue raincoat? I think it will suit you. I like the colour, but I don't like the style Have you got a raincoat the same colour, but a different style? Have a look at this raincoat. How do you find it? I like it. I'd like to try it on.__Go to the fitting-room. I think this raincoat is a bit tight on me. Yes, you need a size larger. Take off this raincoat I'll bring you size 48. Here you are, I think this raincoat fits me. Yes, it is your size. How much is it? 3000 roubles. I'll take it. UNIT 27 Exercise I, p. 307 1. can't 2. couldn't 3. was able to 4. to be able to 5. couldn't 6. was able to 7. could 8. be able to 9. was able to 10. shall be able to 11. be able to 12. couldn't 13. will be able to 14. will be able to Exercise II, p. 308 1. don't have to 2. mustn't 3. don't have to 4. doesn't have to 401 Exercise III, p. 308 1. must 2. had to 3 I'll have to 4. had to 5. had to Exercise IV, p. 308 1. needn't 2 mustn't 2. mustn't 3 needn't 4. needn't 5. must 5. must, mustn't Exercise V, p. 308 1. Will you be able to help me with maths tonight? I'm afraid not. I have to go to the airport to meet a friend of mine. 2. I must hurry up. Ann and I are to meet at the Institute at 10. 3. You needn't (don't have to) to get up so early. You will be able to do everything if you get up an hour later. 4. May I look through these journals? I'm afraid not. I must show them to the manager. You may (can) take them only after dinner. 5. I worked hard and I was able to finish the work on time. 6. I shan't be able to go to the theatre with you. I shall have to stay at work till 8. 7. I didn't have to send her a telegram. She rang me up herself 8. Did you have to wait long? About an hour. 9 Hurry up. The ship is to sail at 7. TOPIC: HOUSE. FLAT Text Many families in London live in flats but some people live in their own houses in the suburbs. The Browns too have a house in a London suburb. There are two floors in it, the ground floor and the first floor. On the ground floor there's a sitting-room, a kitchen and a hall. Upstairs there are two bedrooms and a bathroom. In front of the house the Browns have a small garden where they grow flowers. At the back of the house there's a large garden with some fruit trees in it. At the side of the house there is a garage. Let's have a look at Mr Brown's sitting-room. There is a piano with a low (music) stool in front of it. Next to the piano there's a bookcase. On the left there is a large window. Under the window there's a cosy sofa. The fireplace is at the other end of the room. On each side of the fireplace there's an armchair. Opposite the fireplace you can see a small table with some newspapers on it. By the table there's a small chair. On the right there's a radio-set. There's a nice thick carpet on the floor. During the day the sitting-room is full of light. The Browns are glad to have a sitting-room like this. Conversation Paul: It's quite a big house. How many floors are there? Dan: Three altogether and a basement. There's the sitting room and the kitchen on the ground floor, three rooms on the next floor and three on the top floor. Liz: And my study is in the basement. Dan: There's a small garden at the back, too Paul: Well, it's a lovely house. Liz: Yes we like it, too, but there's one thing... Paul: What's that? Liz: Too many stairs. Dan: The stairs! 403 TOPIC: FAMILY. FRIENDS. RELATIVES. Text 1

Victor Raul Manani is twelve years old. He lives in a little town near Lima on the west coast of Peru. He's got three brothers and two sisters. His father is dead. His mother sells potatoes in the market. Victor sells chewing gum and hats to people in cars. "I work because I need to eat", says Victor. "I don't like selling things in the streets but I like making money. I make quite a lot. 1 spend it on shoes, school books and clothes but I give some money to my mother. I like school and learning English. I can speak a little English now."

Text 2 Paloma Jerez is Spanish. She is married to Juan, a dentist, and lives in a flat in Madrid. She has twins, two girls aged three, and she's a teacher of mathematics. In her spare time she likes going to parties, playing the classical guitar and swimming, but she doesn't like watching television at all. She likes going to Ibiza for her holidays. Text 3 My name is Georgina, but I'm called "Georgie" by my friends. I live near York, in the north-east of England. I'm a dental nurse. I work for a young Australian dentist. He's very nice and he's a very good dentist, but I don't like my job very much. My sister is called Rosie. She's married with two children, a girl and a boy, and lives in a house near London in a town called Enfield. She's a teacher. She teaches in a big school in the north of London. She likes her job very much. My brother's name is Andrew. He doesn't have a job. He's unemployed. Conversation Presenter: And now on Radio 5: Sportworld with Kevin Callaghan. Kevin: Good afternoon, and welcome to Sportsworld. Today in the studio we have a special guest, an up-andcoming tennis star, winner of the Monte Carlo Cup, second in the Earls Court Indoor Championships yes, it's Debbie Ford. Hello, Debbie! Debbie: Hello' Kevin: Well, Debbie, you're a very successful tennis star and you're still very young... just how old are you? Debbie: 15.
404

Kevin: Just 15! That's fantastic! Tell me, Debbie, what's the secret of your success? Are you all good sportsmen in your family? Debbie: Well, I started playing tennis very young. My mother's a teacher and she started me playing. Kevin: I see... what about your father? Debbie: Oh Dad? ... No ... he's a bit lazy ...he's 49 now ... and he just doesn't have the time. Kevin: What does he do? Debbie: He's a doctor. He used to play football when he was younger... Kevin: Have you got any brothers or sisters? Debbie: Yes, I've got a brother and a sister. Kevin: Tell me about them. Debbie: Well, Jane... my sister's name's Jane .. she's 20 and she's a secretary... she works for the Chesterton Gazette. Kevin: And what about your brother? Debbie: David ... well he's only 10 so he's still at school. Kevin: Are they good at sport? Debbie: Mmm! Not bad! Jane swims quite well ... she likes swimming ... but David's the one to watch. Kevin: Oh yes? Debbie: He started playing tennis two years ago and... Kevin: With your mum? Debbie: Yes, Mum started him off. It's good ... we can practise together ... he's faster than... Kevin: And he's only 10! Debbie: Mmm! Kevin: So, we'll have to look out for David in a few years time. Now, Debbie ... tell us something about your training schedule... TOPIC: WORKING DAY. DAILY ROUTINE. Text Gavin is a student from Cardiff College of Further Education. He is spending a year at the Sorbonne University in Paris. After a few weeks in Paris he wrote a letter to his friends at the college. Paris, 21 st October Dear All, I'm writing this letter in my room and I can see the river Seine from my window. It's beautiful.
405

I am staying in a student hostel some miles from the centre of Paris. I've got a big room and I use it as a bedroom and a study and a sitting room! I share a big kitchen with the other students in the hostel. I sometimes cook there, but I usually have my meals, at the University. The food there is good and quite_h The University is about two stops from here on the Metro (the underground). It only takes ten minutes to get there, so that's easy Most of the other students cycle, but I haven't got a cycle yet. I'm enjoying myself very much Pans is a fascinating city. I really like walking round the old parks It's very different from Cardiff.

Do write if you have time. All the best Yours, Gavin

Conversation John: So you work in a pub. Lucy: Yes, that's right. John: What's it like? Lucy: It's nice. I like it. You meet a lot of interesting people. A lot of boring ones too, mind you. John: I beg your pardon? Lucy: I said, a lot of boring ones too. John: Oh, yes. I can imagine. A pub I should think that's hard work, isn't it? Lucy: Yes and no. It depends. John: How do you mean? Lucy: Well, it's hard at weekends. I mean, last Saturday night, with both bars full and one barman away ill well, my feet didn't touch the ground. But on weekdays it's usually very quiet. What about you? What do you do1 You're an accountant or something, aren't you? John: I work in a bank. Lucy: Oh yes, that's right. Ann said. That must be nice. John: It's all right. Lucy: But you have to move round from one place to another, don't you? I mean, if you get a better job if they make you manager or something it'll probably be in another town, won't it? John: Yes, probably. Lucy: I wouldn't like that. I mean, I've got lots of friends here. I wouldn't like to move somewhere else.
406

John: Oh, we like it. We've lived here for, what, six years now. We're ready for a change. TOPIC: WEEKEND. PASTIME. HOLIDAYS. Text The Woods are a busy family. Paul is a businessman and Sheila is a doctor at a busy clinic in Oxford. Their daughter, Joan, is busy too She is only 20, but she is a trainee manager at a hotel in town. The Woods have got a large, smart house near Oxford but they do not really live together. One of them is always out, and they are often all out. Rich, the "baby of the family", now lives away from the family. He is a student in London and he lives in a small flat there. This is his first year away from home, and life in London is not always easy. So he's often at home at weekends. This weekend he's at home but he's got problems there too. He's got a suitcase full of dirty clothes and the washing machine is broken. He's hungry, too, but there is something wrong with the cooker and the electrician's away for the weekend. There are some cheese biscuits on the table and there's some cold soup in the fridge but that's all. His mother and father are at a conference in New York and his sister's no help! She's got an invitation to a conference this weekend and the taxi's on its way. This is not Rich's idea of a happy weekend at home!

Conversation 1 Chris: 7^82 double 5 -0. Nick: Hello. This is Nick. Is that Chris? Chris: Yes it is. Nick: Do you want to come to the cinema tonight? There's a good film at the Odeon. Chris: Er ... Well, I'm sorry, Nick, but I visit my gran on Mondays, so I can't go to the cinema today Nick: Oh dear! Well, let's go on Thursday then. Chris: Thursday? Oh, on Thursdays I have my trumpet lesson. Nick: Oh no! Well, what do you do on Saturdays? Chris: I always play football on Saturdays. Nick: You certainly have a busy week! Chris: Yes, I'm sorry, Nick. See you, Nick: Goodbye! Conversation 2 Simon: What's the matter? Wendy: I'm bored. Simon: Why don't we watch television? Wendy: Oh Simon, television's boring.
407

Simon: You're right Well, let's play football then Wendy I don't like football, Simon! Simon: Oh! Do you like dancing? Wendy: Yes, I do. Simon: Well, let's go to the disco Wendy: Simon, what time is it? Simon: It's 4.30 Wendy: And what time does the disco open? Simon: At 8 o'clock Well, shall we go to the ice rink? Wendy: I can't skate, Simon. Simon. Oh, can you ride a bicycle?

Wendy: Yes I can ... But I haven't got a bicycle. TOPIC: SHOPPING Text John wanted a copy of "War and Peace", by Tolstoy, so he went to a famous bookshop in Charing Cross Road and asked for it. The assistant looked puzzled. "You should try the foreign book department", she said. "But it's a novel, and I want it in English," John replied. "Oh, novels are on the first floor," she said. Eventually John found the novels, and after some time he discovered a copy of "War and Peace". "I'd like to buy this, please," he said to an assistant in a yellow jumper. She took it from him and gave him a receipt. "Pay at the cash desk," she said pointing towards the far corner of the shop. John waited for ten minutes in a small queue, then he paid and the girl at the cash desk stamped his receipt and gave it back to him. He took it to the girl in the yellow jumper. She glanced at it and handed him a parcel. "Thank you," he said. "Thank you," she replied. When John got home, he opened his parcel. It contained a book about roses.

Conversation 1
Mrs Cox: Good morning. Perhaps you can advise me... Assistant: Yes, madam. Mrs Cox: I'm looking for a toy ... for my nephew. Assistant: Oh, yes ... how old is he? Mrs Cox: He'll be nine years old on Saturday. Assistant: Skateboards are still very popular. Mrs Cox: Hmm, I don't want him to hurt himself. Assistant: What about a drum set? Mrs Cox: I don't think so. His father will be angry if I buy him one of those. Have you got anything educational? You see, he's a very intelligent boy. Assistant: I've got the perfect thing! A do-it-yourself computer kit!
408

Conversation 2
Man: Good morning, madam. Can I help you3 Anna: Yes, please Have you got the Times? Man: No, madam, we haven't. We Anna: Oh dear What about the Guardian? Man: No, madam. We haven't got the Guardian. We don't Anna: Well, have you got Time Magazine? Man: No, we haven't This isn't Anna: You haven't got any newspapers or magazines? Is this a newsagent's shop or isn't it? Man: It isn't. It's a bookshop. We don't sell newspapers and we haven't got any magazines.